Skip to main content

Full text of "Cambridge Senate-House problems and riders for the year 1860 : with solutions"

See other formats


Digitized  by  tlie  Internet  Arcliive 

in  2007  witli  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/cambridgesenateliOOroutuoft 


FOR  THE  YEAR  1860; 


WITH    SOLUTIONS. 


BT 

The  Rev.  H.  W.  WATSON,  M.A. 

LATE  FBIXOW  OF  TKINITY  OOLLBOB. 


AJif) 


E.  J.  EOUTH,  M.A. 

WMUJOW  AKD  AflSmANT .TUTOR  OF  ST  PETEB'S  COLLBOB.  CAJfBKIDOK 
AjrO  BXAlOirEfi  IN  THE  aMVEBSITY  OF  LUSDON. 


Cambrilige: 

MACMILLAN  AND  CO. 
AND  a,   HENRIETTA  STREET,   COVENT  GARDEN, 

Hontion. 

I860. 


CITambntigt: 


fKINTED    BY    C  J.  CLAY,   M.A. 
AT  THE  UiaVBBSITY   TBESS. 


PREFACE. 


The  value  of  a  Collection  of  Solutions  depends  in  great 
measure  on  the  fact  that  every  Problem  is  solved  by  the 
framer  of  the  question,  thus  showing  the  student  the  manner 
in  which  he  was  expected  to  proceed  in  the  Senate-House. 
The  Moderators  desire  therefore  to  thank  the  Examiners  for 
the  many  valuable  Solutions  of  the  Problems  set  by  them, 
by  which  the  book  has  been  made  more  complete  than  it 
would  othei'wise  have  been. 

The  Senior  Moderator  also  acknowledges  his  obligation  to 
Mr  Droop,  Fellow  of  Trinity  College,  for  much  valuable 
assistance,  and  particularly  for  the  suggestion  and  the  solu- 
tion of  the  three  following  Problems,  viz.  No.  \'i.  of  Tuesday 
Morning,  Jan.  17,  and  Nos.  3  and  5  of  Wednesday  Moniing, 
Jan.  18. 


SOLUTIONS    OF    SENATE-HOUSE 
PROBLEMS  AND    RIDERS 

FOR  THE  YEAR  EIGHTEEN  HUNDRED  AND  SIXTY. 

Tuesday,  Jan.  3.    9  to  12. 


JUNIOB  MODEBATOB.     Arabic  numbers. 
Seniob  ExAiiiNEB.        Roman  numbers. 

1.  If  a  straight  line  DME  be  drawn  through  the  middle  i^ 
point  M  of  the  base  of  a  triangle  ABC,  so  as  to  cut  off  equal 
parts  AD,  AE  from  the  sides  AB,  A  C,  produced  if  necessary, 
respectively,  then  shall  BD  be  equal  to  CE. 

Through  C  draw  CJ?' parallel  to  AB,  and  cutting  BE  in  F. 
Then  the  two  triangles  DMB,  FMG  are  clearly  equal,  and 
therefore  CF=  BD.  Again,  CF  being  parallel  to  AB,  the 
angle  CFE  =  the  angle  ADE,  and  because  AD  =  AE,  the 
angle  ADE  =  angle  AED ;  whence  it  easily  follows  that 
CF=  CE. 

2.  Shew  how  to  construct  a  rectangle  which  shall  be  equal  *^ 
to  a  given  square ;  (I)  when  the  sum  and  (2)  when  the  differ- 
ence of  two  adjacent  sides  is  given. 

The  first  case  is  too  obvious  to  require  any  solution.  In  the 
second  case,  refer  to  the  figure  in  Euclid,  Book  ii.  Prop.  14. 
A  little  consideration  will  shewthat  GE  is  twice  the  differ- 
ence between  the  two  sides  BE,  ED.  Whence  the  following 
construction.     Take  QE=\ia\i  the  given  difference,  describe 


2  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  3, 

a  circle  BIIF  with  radius  equal  to  the  side  of  the  given 
square,  and  cutting  GE  produced  in  B  and  F.  Tlien  BE, 
EF  are  the  sides  of  the  rectangle  required. 

3.  If  two  chords  AB,  AC  ha  drawn  from  any  point  A  of 
a  circle,  and  be  produced  to  D  and  E,  so  that  the  rectangle 
A  C,  AE  is  equal  to  the  rectangle  AB,  AD,  tlien  if  0  be  the 
centre  of  the  circle,  AO  is  perpendicular  to  DE. 

Since  AB .  AD  =  AC .  AE,  a  circle  may  be  described  about 
BCED.  Therefore  the  angle  BDE  =  BCA.  Hence  if  A  and 
B  be  fixed  while  C  moves  round  the  circle,  the  angle  ADE 
will  be  constant  and  tlie  locus  of  E  will  be  a  straight  line. 
Take  AC  to  pass  through  0  and  cut  the  circle  in  C  and  DE 
in  P.  Then  as  before  the  angle  APD  =  ABC  =  a  right 
angle. 

iv.  Describe  an  isosceles  triangle  having  each  of  the 
angles  at  the  base  double  of  the  third  angle. 

If  tI  be  the  vertex,  and  BD  the  base  of  the  constructed 
triangle,  D  being  one  of  the  points  of  intersection  of  the  two 
circles  employed  in  the  construction,  and  E  the  other,  and  AE 
be  drawn  meeting  BD  produced  in  F,  prove  that  FAB  is 
another  isosceles  triano-le  of  the  same  kind. 


*o* 


For  ADE  is  an  isosceles  triangle,  and  the  angle  AED  at 
the  base  is  the  supplement  of  the  angle  A  CD  in  the  opposite 
segment  of  the  circle.  Hence  AED  =  BCD  and  therefore  bv 
Euclid  =  ABD,  and  also  the  angles  ADE,  ADB  are  equal, 
therefore  the  third  angle  DAE=  the  third  angle  BAD.  Hence 
the  whole  angle  BAE  is  double  the  angle  BAD,  and  therefore 
equal  to  ABD.  Hence  the  triangle  FAB  is  isosceles,  and 
each  of  the  angles  at  the  base  is  equal  to  the  angles  at  the 
base  of  ABD.     Therefore,  &c. 

V.  Prove  that  the  straight  lines  bisecting  one  angle  of 
a  triangle  internally  and  the  other  two  externally  pass 
through  the  same  point. 

Let  the  exterior  angles  A  and  C  of  the  triangle  ABC  be 
bisected  by  AD,  CO,  meeting  each  other  in  0;  tben  BO  will 
bisect  the  angle  ABC.     Because  AD  bisects  the  exterior 


9 — 12.]  AND  RIDERS.  3 

angle  A,  BA  :  BD  ::  AC  \  CD.  And  because  CO  bisects 
tlie  angle  ACD,  therefore  AC  -.  CD  ::  AO  :  OD,  therefore 
BA  :  BD  ::  AO  :  ODy  and  therefore  BO  bisects  the  angle 
ABD.    See  fig.  1. 

vi.  If  three  straight  lines,  which  do  not  all  lie  in  one 
plane,  be  cut  in  the  same  ratio  bj  three  planes,  two  of  which 
are  parallel,  shew  that  the  third  will  be  parallel  to  the  other 
two,  if  its  intersections  with  the  three  straight  lines  are  not 
all  in  one  straight  line. 

This  may  be  easily  proved  by  a  "  reductio  ad  absurdum." 

vii.  Define  a  parabola:  and  prove  from  the  definition 
that  it  cannot  be  cut  by  a  straight  line  in  more  than  two 
points. 

For  if  possible  let  a  straight  line  cut  the  parabola  in  three 
points  P,  Q,  R,  and  let  it  cut  the  directrix  in  T.  Draw  Pp, 
Qq,  Br  perpendiculars  to  the  directrix,  and  let  ;S^  be  the  focus. 
Then  since  SP=Pp,  SQ=  Qq,  it  follows  that  SP:  SQ  ::  PT 
:  QT,  and  therefore  ST  bisects  the  exterior  angle  to  PSQ. 
Similarly  ST  also  bisects  the  exterior  angle  to  PSE.  Which 
is  absurd. 

viii.  P,  Q  are  points  in  two  confocal  ellipses,  at  which  the 
line  joining  the  common  foci  subtends  equal  angles ;  prove 
that  the  tangents  at  P,  Q  are  inclined  at  an  angle  which  is 
equal  to  the  angle  subtended  by  PQ  at  either  focus. 

Let  the  normals  at  P  and  Q  meet  in  G,  join  QP  and  pro- 
duce it  to  any  point  R.  Then  the  angle  between  the  tangents 
is  equal  to  the  angle  PG  Q  which  is 

=  RPG  -RQG  =  {RPS-  RQS)  +  {SPG  -  SQG). 

Now  SPG  =  SQG,  being  the  halves  of  equal  angles,  and  the 
difference  RPS  -RQS  =  PSQ.  Similarly  the  angle  PGQ 
may  be  proved  =  PUQ. 

ix.  If  a  circle,  passing  through  Y  and  Z,  touch  the  major 
axis  in  Q,  and  that  diameter  of  the  circle,  which  passes  through 
Q,  meet  the  tangent  in  P,  then  PQ  =  BC. 

b2 


4  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  EIDERS.        [Jan.  3. 

Let  the  tangent  YZ  cut  the  major  axis  in  T.  Then  by 
similar  triangles 

PQ  _SY      .PQ_nZ  P(^     SY.HZ 

QT"  YT         QT~ ZT''    •*•  QT"""  TY.TZ' 

But  TY.  TZ=  Tqt  by  Euclid,  iii.  36,  and  8Y ,  HZ=BG*; 

.'.  PQ  =  BC. 

11.  In  an  hyperbola,  supposing  the  two  asymptotes  and 
one  point  of  the  curve  to  be  given  in  position,  shew  how  to 
construct  the  curve ;  and  find  the  position  of  the  foci. 

Let  OX,  0  F  be  the  two  asymptotes,  and  P  the  given  point. 
Draw  PN  parallel  to  OY  cutting  OX  in  N.  Measure  OB 
=  OJE  along  the  asymptotes,  such  that  OB'  =  4 .  ON.  NP. 
Bisect  the  angle  BOE  by  OA  cutting  BE  in  A.  Then  OA, 
AB  are  equal  to  the  axes;  and  the  remainder  of  the  con- 
struction is  obvious. 

12.  Given  a  right  cone  and  a  point  within  it,  there  are 
but  two  sections  which  have  this  point  for  focus;  and  the 

f)lanes  of  these  sections  make  equal  angles  with  the  straight 
ine  joining  the  given  point  and  the  vertex  of  the  cone. 

Let  V  be  the  vertex,  VCO  the  axis  of  the  given  cone, 
and  P  the  given  point.  Then,  if  two  spheres  be  inscribed  in 
the  cone  and  passing  through  P,  the  tangent  planes  to  these 
spheres  will  evidently  be  the  only  two  sections  whose  foci  are 
at  P.  Let  G  and  0  be  the  centres  of  the  two  spheres,  then 
VCi  VO  ::  CL  :  OM ::  CP:  PO;  therefore  VP  bisects  the 
angle  exterior  to  CPO  in  the  triangle  CPO.  But  the  raSii 
CP,  PO  are  perpendicular  to  the  sections  AB,  BE,  therefore 
VP  bisects  the  angle  between  these  sections.     See  fig.  2. 


(    5    ) 


Tuesday,  Jan.  3.    1^  to  4. 

Sbkiob  Modebatob.    Arabic  numbers. 
JONIOB  ExAMiNEB.       Eoman  numbers. 

4.     (3)     Solve  the  equations, 

Multiplying    the    second    and   third  of   these    equations 
together,  and  subtracting  the  square  of  the  first,  we  get 

X  {3xyz  —  o^—y^  —  a')  =  5V  —  a* ; 
therefore  by  symmetry 

Hence,  substituting  in  the  first  equation, 


therefore  x—± 

y  =  ± 

2  =  + 


(o'  +  J'  +  c'-Sa'JV)*' 
(a'  +  ^^'  +  c'-Sa'iV)** 


6  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  3, 

m         xi       1             •      •         p  sin  (tt  COS  ^)      "  ^ 
viii.     Trace  the  cnansres  in  sign  oi 7 — ■. — ^i ,  as  0  vanes 

°  °        cos  (tt  sin  0} 

from  0  to  TT. 

The  numerator  is  positive  when  6  lies  between  0  and  -  , 

TT 

and  negative  when  ^  lies  between  -  and  tt. 

TT 

The  denominator  is  positive  when  6  lies  between  0  and  -  , 

negative  when  6  lies  between  —  and  — ,  and  positive  when  B 

lies  between  -—  and  tt. 
6 

If 
Hence  the  expression  is  positive  from  0  to  -  , 


negative 

11 

TT 

6 

to 

TT 

2' 

positive 

» 

TT 

2 

to 

6   ' 

negative 

>j 

h-ir 
6 

to 

TT. 

Prove  that, 

sin  3  (^  - 15)  =  4  cos  [A  -  45)  cos  {A  + 15)  sin  (^  - 15), 
and  find  sin  A  and  sin  B  from  the  equations, 
a  sin'  -4  +  6  sin"  B=G, 
a  sin  2-4—6  sin  2B=  0, 
(1)  sin  3-4  =  3  sin -4- 4  sinM,  ^ 

cos  3-4  =  4  cos' -4  —  3  cos  vl ; 

.'.  sin  3-4  —  cos  3-4 

=  (sin  A  +  cos  -4)  [3  —  4  (sin'  A  +  cos'  -4  —  sin  -4  cos  -4)}, 
=  2  sin  45  cos  {A  -  45)  {2  sin  2^-1], 
=  4  sin  45  cos  (-4  —  45)  {sin  2-4  —  sin  30}, 
=  8  sin  45  cos  [A  —  45)  sin  (-4  — 15)  cos  (-4  +  15). 
But  sin  ZA  -  cos  3.4  =  sin  3-4  -  sin  (90  -  ZA) 

=  2  cos  45  sin  (3-4  -  45) ; 


1^—4.]  AND   RIDERS.  7 

.-.  sin  3(^  - 15)  =  4 cos  {A  -  45)  sin  {A  - 15)  cos  (^  +  15). 

(2)  a  sin'  A  +  b  sin'J?  =  c, 

a^  sin'  A  cos'  J.  =  J'  sin'  B  cos'  -B, 
a'  sin'  A-b^  sin' 5=  a'  sin*  ^  -  i'  sin*  B 

=  c{a  sin'  A  —  b  sin'  5) ; 
.*.     a  (a  —  c)  sin'  A  =  b{b  —  c)  sin'  -B ; 

T  /7       \        7  /         \       6c  (J  —  c)      ac(a  —  c) 
^        '^  ^        '         sm'^  sin^j^    ' 

•  «  J  5c  (5  —  c)      _      e{b  —  c) 

.-.  sin^  -ab{a  +  b-2c)~a{a  +  b-2c)' 


sin' 5 


_      ac  (a  —  c)  c  (a  —  c) 

~ ab{a  +  b-2c)  ^b{a+b-2c) 

whence,  &c. 


xii.  A  railway  passenger  seated  in  one  corner  of  the  car- 
riage looks  out  of  the  windows  at  the  further  end  and  observes 
that  a  star  near  the  horizon  is  traversing  these  windows  in  the 
direction  of  the  train's  motion  and  that  it  is  obscured  by  the 
partition  between  the  corner  window  on  his  own  side  of  the 
carriage  and  the  middle  window  while  the  train  is  moving 
through  the  seventh  part  of  a  mile.  Shew  that  the  train  is 
on  a  curve  the  concavity  of  which  is  directed  towards  the 
star,  and  which,  if  it  be  circular,  has  a  radius  of  nearly  three 
miles;  the  length  of  the  carriage  being  seven  feet  and  the 
breadth  of  the  partition  four  inches. 

Owing  to  the  great  distance  of  the  star,  the  motion  of  the 
carriage  parallel  to  itself  has  no  effect  upon  the  point  in  which 
the  line  joining  the  star  and  the  passenger's  eye  meets  the 
window.  Hence  since  this  line  meets  the  window  in  points 
which  move  in  the  direction  of  the  carriage's  motion,  the 
direction  of  the  carriage  must  be  continually  varying,  and 
the  carriage  must  be  on  a  curve  concave  to  the  star.  The 
rest  of  the  question  is  too  obvious  for  explanation. 

xiii.     If  a,  &,  and  B  be  given,  shew  under  what  circum* 


8  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  RIDEES.        [Jan.  3. 

Stances  there  will  be  two  triangles  satisfying  the  conditions 
of  the  problem. 

Prove  that  the  circles  circumscribing  both  triangles  are 
equal  in  magnitude,  and  that  the  distance  between  their 
centres  is  »J{b^cosec^B—a'). 

The  radius  of  the  circumscribing  circle  =  -  -: — f^,  and  this 

is  the  same  for  both  triangles.     See  fig.  3. 

The  centres  of  the  circles  0'  and  0  are  situated  in  the  line 
ODO',  which  bisects  BG  at  right  angles,  and  since  the  per- 
pendiculars from    0'  and   0  upon  BA'A  meet  this  line  at 

distances  -——  and  —^  from  B,  it  follows  that 

00'  =  \{BA-  BA')  cosec  B. 

Now  BA  and  BA  are  the  values  of  p  determined  from  the 
equation 

(?  —  2ac  cos  B-^a'  =  ¥; 

.'.  BA-BA'=r2^{h*-a'8iR'B); 
.'.  I  {BA  -  BA')  cosec  B=  >^{V  cosec'  B-a"). 


(    9     ) 


Wednesday,  Jan.  4.    9  to  12. 


Seniob  Moderatob.    Arabic  niimbers. 
Jdniob  Exakineb.       Boman  numbers. 

1.  Enunciate  the  proposition  of  the  parallelogram  of 
forces;  and,  assuming  its  truth  for  the  magnitude,  prove  it 
also  for  the  direction,  of  the  resultant. 

Let  AB  and  A  C  represent  two  forces  acting  on  the  point  A. 
Complete  the  parallelogram  AD,  then  by  hypothesis  AD  re- 
presents the  resultant  in  magnitude ;  it  is  required  to  prove 
that  AD  represents  the  resultant  in  direction  also.    Fig.  4. 

Draw  AD'  in  the  direction  of  the  resultant  and  equal  to  it 
and  therefore  also  equal  to  AD.  Complete  the  parallelogram 
AD' EC  and  draw  the  diagonal  AE. 

AD',  AB  and  AC  represent  three  forces  in  equilihrium, 
each  of  them  is  therefore  equal  and  opposite  to  the  resultant 
of  the  other  two.  But  by  hypothesis  AE  is  equal  to  the 
resultant  of  AD'  and  A  C. 

Therefore  AE  is  equal  to  AB  and  therefore  to  CD, 

Also  EC  is  equal  to  AD'  and  therefore  to  AD. 

Hence  the  quadrilateral  AECD  has  its  opposite  sides  equal, 
it  is  therefore  a  parallelogram;  therefore  EC  is  parallel  to 
AD. 

But  EC  is  also  parallel  to  AD' ;  therefore  AD'  and  AD 
are  in  the  same  straight  line. 

2.  Two  equal  particles,  each  attracting  with  a  force  varying 
directly  as  the  distance,  are  situated  at  the  opposite  extremrties 


10  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  4, 

of  a  diameter  of  a  liorizontal  circle,  on  whose  circumference  a 
small  smooth  ring  is  capable  of  sliding ;  prove  that  the  ring 
will  be  kept  at  rest  in  any  position  under  the  attraction  of 
the  particles. 

Let  A  and  B  be  the  particles  at  opposite  extremities  of  the 
diameter  AB,  and  let  P  be  the  attracted  ring.  Join  AP,  BP. 
These  lines  represent  the  forces  on  P,  and  the  resultant  force  is 
therefore  in  the  direction  of  that  diagonal  of  the  parallelogram 
on  AP,  PB  which  passes  through  P.  Hence  the  resultant 
passes  through  0  the  centre  of  the  circle  since  the  diagonals 
of  parallelogi-ams  bisect  each  other,  and  therefore  the  reaction 
of  the  smooth  curve  is  capable  of  counteracting  the  resultant 
force  wherever  P  may  be  situated. 

3.  Two  equal  heavy  particles  are  situated  at  the  extremi- 
ties of  the  latus  rectum  of  a  parabolic  arc  without  weight, 
which  is  placed  with  its  vertex  in  contact  with  that  of  an 
equal  parabola,  whose  axis  is  vertical  and  concavity  down- 
wards ;  prove  that  the  parabolic  arc  may  be  turned  through 
any  angle  without  disturbing  its  equilibrium,  provided  no 
sliding  be  possible  between  the  curves. 

In  the  figure,  fig.  5,  it  follows  from  the  equality  of  the 
parabolas  that  the  arcs  AP  and  A'P,  and  the  angles  ASP 
and  A'S'P  are  equal,  and  that  the  tangent  at  P  bisects  the 
angle  SPS'.  But  the  tangent  at  P  bisects  the  angle  between 
SP  and  the  line  through  P  parallel  to  the  axis  AS.  Hence 
PS'  is  parallel  to  AS  and  therefore  vertical. 

Hence  the  perpendiculars  from  P  upon  the  verticals  through 
L  and  L'  the  extremities  of  the  latus  rectum  are  always  equal, 
and  therefore  equal  weights  at  these  points  always  balance 
about  P. 

4.  Find  the  position  of  equilibrium  when  a  common 
balance  is  loaded  with  given  unequal  weights. 

If  the  tongue  of  the  balance  be  very  slightly  out  of  adjust- 
ment, prove  that  the  true  weight  of  a  body  is  the  arithmetic 
mean  of  its  apparent  weights,  when  weighed  in  the  opposite 
scales. 

^         „  /,  (P-Q)a 

Generally         tan  S  =  ppL^^^-^ . 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  11 

In  this  case  the  beam  appears  horizontal  when  it  is  really 
inclined  at  a  very  small  angle  a  to  the  horizon.  If  then  P 
be  the  true  weight,  W^and  W'  the  apparent  weights, 

P-  W=  {{P+  W)h  +  Wh]  tana, 

W'-P=  {(P+  W')h  +  WJc]  tan  a, 

and  we  may  consider  W  and  W  as  equal  in  the  coefficients  of 
the  very  small  quantity  tan  a ; 

.*.  P^  W=  W  —  P  approximately, 

2 

5.  In  the  figure  of  Euclid,  Book  i.  Prop.  47,  if  the  perime- 
ters of  the  squares  be  regarded  as  physical  lines  uniform 
throughout,  prove  that  the  figure  will  balsuice  about  the  mid- 
dle point  of  the  hypothenuse  with  that  line  horisontal  the  lines 
of  construction  having  no  weight. 

Let  D  be  the  middle  point  of  AB,  and  DNE,  DMF  per- 
pendiculars from  D  bisecting  the  sides  AG  and  CB  in  N 
and  M.     See  fig.  6. 

Then  DE=EN+NI) 

=^AC+^CB 
=  DF. 

Therefore  the  perpendiculars  from  D  upon  the  verticals 
through  E  and  F  are  proportional  to  the  cosines  of  the  angles 
EBA  and  FBB  respectively,  and  are  therefore  proportional 
to  BG  and  A  C  respectively,  i.  e.  to  the  weights  of  the  peri- 
meters of  the  squares  acting  at  F  and  E  respectively. 

Hence  these  weights  balance  about  B  when  ^P  is  hori- 
zontal, and  it  is  clear  that  the  weight  of  the  perimeter  on  AB 
passes  through  B;  therefore  the  whole  balances  about  this 
point. 

6.  A  uniform  heavy  rod,  having  one  extremity  attached 
to  a  fixed  point,  about  which  it  is  free  to  move  in  all  direc- 
tions, passes  over  the  circumference  of  a  rough  ring  whose 


12  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  4, 

centre  is  at  the  fixed  point  and  whose  plane  is  inclined  at  a 
given  angle  to  the  horizon ;  find  the  limiting  position  of  equi- 
librium. 

Let  0  be  the  centre  of  the  ring,  fig.  7.  OH  the  line  of 
greatest  slope  through  0  in  the  plane  of  the  ring  and  inclined 
to  the  horizon  at  the  angle  a,  OB  the  rod,  acting  on  the  circle 

at  a 

Let  2a  he  the  length  of  the  rod, 

b  radius  of  the  ring, 

0  angle  HOB, 

fi  the  coefficient  of  friction,  W  the  weight  of  the  rod,  and  B 
the  normal  action  at  C. 

XI'    (ft*  _  yjr  J  fv 

We  may  replace  TF  acting  at  G  by  — ^^ at  0  and  W~ 

at  C,  and  this  latter  by  TF-cosa,  perpendicular  to  the  plane 
of  ring,  and  W-  sin  a  along  this  plane ; 

.*.  B  =  W-  cos  a    and  aB  =  W-  sin  a  sin  0, 

T  T 

resolving  perpendicular  to  rod ;  therefore  by  division 
sin  ^  =  /i  cot  a. 

vii.  A  point,  moving  with  a  uniform  acceleration,  describes 
20  feet  in  the  half-second  which  elapses  after  the  first  second 
of  its  motion ;  compare  its  acceleration  with  that  of  a  falliug 
heavy  particle;  and  give  its  numerical  measure,  taking  a 
minute  as  the  unit  of  time,  and  a  mile  as  that  of  space. 

Let  a  be  the  numerical  measure  of  the  acceleration  of  the 
point,  taking  a  foot  as  the  unit  of  space,  and  half-a-second  as 
that  of  time. 

Then  it  will  describe  -  feet  in  the  first  half-second. 

At  the  end  of  this  time  it  will  have  a  velocity,  which,  if 
it  continued  uniform  during  the  next  half-second,  would  carry 
it  over  a  feet. 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  13 

At  the  end  of  the  first  second,  its  velocity  will  be  twice  as 
great  as  at  the  end  of  the  first  half-second ;  that  is,  a  velocity 
which  if  it  continued  uniform  during  the  next  half-second, 
would  carry  the  point  over  2a  feet.     In  consequence  of  the 

acceleration,  it  will  move  over  -  feet  more,  or  —  feet    Hence 

1  =  20, 

or    a  =  8. 

Hence,  taking  a  second  as  the  unit  of  time,  and  a  foot  as 
the  unit  of  space,  the  numerical  measure  of  the  acceleration 
will  be  32 ;  that  is, 

acceleration  of  this  point :  acceleration  of  falling  particle 
::  32  :  32*2 
::  160  :  161. 

If  a  minute  be  the  unit  of  time,  and  a  mile  that  of  space, 
the  acceleration  will  be  measured  by 

32  X  60'     32  X  15 


5280  22 

_240 
~  11  • 

ix.  A  heavy  particle  slides  down  a  smooth  inclined  plane 
of  given  height ;  prove  that  the  time  of  its  descent  varies  as 
the  secant  of  the  inclination  of  tlie  plane  to  the  vertical. 

Let  h  be  the  height  of  the  plane,  a  its  inclination  to  the 
vertical,  then  its  length  will  be  h  sec  a,  and  the  acceleration 
down  the  plane  g  cos  a ; 

.'.  if  T  be  the  time  of  descent 

gcosa.  T*     , 

=  h  sec  a, 

or  T*  =  2gh.Bec*a; 
.-.  T={2gh)^8eca, 
or  Tex:  sec  a, 


14  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  4, 

X.  A  heavy  particle  is  projected  from  a  given  point  with  a 
given  velocity,  so  as  to  pass  through  another  given  point; 
prove  tliat,  in  general,  there  will  be  two  parabolic  paths  which 
the  particle  may  describe ;  and  give  a  geometrical  construction 
to  determine  their  foci.  Also  find  the  locus  of  the  second 
point  in  order  that  there  may  be  only  one  parabolic  path. 

Since  the  velocity  of  projection  is  given,  the  directrix  of  the 
parabolic  path  is  given. 

Let  MN  be  the  directrix,  P  the  point  of  projection,  Q  the 
point  through  which  the  particle  is  to  pass.     Fig.  8. 

Draw  PM,  QN,  perpendicular  to  MN.  With  P,  Q  as 
centres  and  PM,  QNas  radii,  describe  two  circles ;  these  will 
in  general  intersect  in  two  points  S,  S',  which  will  be  the  foci 
of  the  two  parabolic  paths. 

If,  however,  the  two  circles  toueh  one  another,  there  will  be 
but  one  parabolic  path.  In  order  that  this  may  be  the  case, 
we  must  have 

QN+PM=PQ. 

Hence  if  QN  be  produced  to  K,  so  that  NK  may  be  equal 
to  PMf  and  KK'  be  drawn  parallel  to  MN,  we  shall  have 

distance  of  Q  from  KK'^PQ, 

or,  the  locus  of  <?  is  a  parabola,  of  which  P  is  the  focus,  and 
KK '  the  directrix. 

xi.  A  series  of  perfectly  elastic  balls  are  arranged  in  tlie 
same  straight  line,  one  of  them  impinges  directly  on  the  next, 
and  so  on  ;  prove  that,  if  their  masses  form  a  geometrical  pr^ 
gression  of  which  the  common  ratio  is  2,  their  velocities  after 
impact  will  form  a  geometrical  progression  of  which  the  com- 
mon ratio  is  f . 

Let  M,  2il/,  be  the  masses  of  two  adjacent  balls,  v  the  velo- 
city of  M  before  impact,  u^,  ii^,  the  respective  velocities  of 

2 
M,  23/,  after  impact,  then  we  have  to  prove  that  %=nV. 

o 

Now  the  momentum  is  the  same  before  and  after  impact ; 
.'.  Mu^-VlMu^  =  Mv (1), 


9_12.]  AND   RIDERS. 


15 


and  since  tlie  balls  are  perfectly  elastic,  the  vis  viva  is  un- 
altered: ,  , 
.-.  Mu*  +  2Mu^  =  Mv^ (2). 

Squaring  (1)  and  multiplying  (2)  by  if,  we  get 

Hence  eliminating  u^  by  (1), 

2v 
•••««=  3"- 


(     16    ) 


Wednesday,  Jan.  4.    1^  to  4. 


JuHlOB  MODEBATOB.    Arabic  numbers. 
Senior  Examines.       Boman  numbers. 

1.  A  UNIFORM  tube  is  bent  into  the  form  of  a  parabola,  and 
placed  with  its  vertex  downwards  and  axis  vertical :  supposing 
any  quantities  of  two  fluids  of  densities  p,  p  to  be  poured  into 
it,  and  r,  r  to  be  the  distances  of  the  two  free  surfaces  respec- 
tively from  the  focus,  then  the  distance  of  the  common  surface 

TO  "-•  T  O 

from  the  focus  will  be  — — ,  -  . 
P-P 

This  follows  at  once  from  the  two  principles : 

(1)  If  two  fluids  be  placed  in  a  bent  tube,  the  altitudes  of 
the  free  surfaces  above  the  common  surface  are  inversely  as 
their  densities. 

(2)  The  distance  of  any  point  of  a  parabola  from  the  fd^s 
is  equal  to  its  distance  fi'om  the  directrix. 

2.  A  parallelogram  is  immersed  in  a  fluid  with  one  side  in 
the  surface ;  shew  how  to  draw  a  line  from  one  extremity  of 
this  side  dividing  the  parallelogram  into  two  parts  on  which 
the  pressures  are  equal. 

Let  ABCD  be  the  parallelogram,  AE  the  line  drawn  from 
one  angle  to  the  base.     Then  the  pressure  on  the  triangle 

is  =  -  the  pressure  on  the  whole  parallelogram.     Fig.  9. 


1^—4.]  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.  l7 

Now  the  pressure  cc  area .  depth  of  centre  of  gravity ;  the 

CE 
areas  of  the  two  figures  are  as  — -  :   CD ;   the  depths  of  the 

centres  of  gravity  are  aa  -  :  - ; 

O         it 

.    2    CE_l    1 
••  3-    2   -2*2^^' 

.-.   CE=^-CD. 
4 

3.  A  heavy  hollow  right  cone,  closed  by  a  base  without 
weight,  is  immersed  in  a  fluid,  find  the  force  that  will  sustain 
it  with  its  axis  horizontal. 

Let  AB = A  be  the  axis  of  the  cone,  A  the  vertex.   The  forces 

acting  on  the  cone  are,  its  weight  TF acting  downwards  at  G  the 

2 
centre  of  gravity  of  the  surface,  AG=  -h;  and  W  the  weight 

of  the  water  displaced  acting  upwards  at  H  the  centre  of 

3 
gravity  of  the  volume,  An=-h. 

The  resultant  of  these  isW—W  acting  at  a  point  C,  where 

(W-W")AG=W.lh-W','^h. 
^  o  4 

4.  A  given  weight  of  heavy  elastic  fluid  of  uniform 
temperature  is  confined  in  a  smooth  vertical  cylinder  by  a 
piston  of  given  weight;  shew  how  to  find  the  volume  of 
the  fluid. 

It  is  proved  in  Goodwin's  Course^  lipp  be  the  pressures  of 
the  atmosphere  at  two  points  whose  vertical  distance  is  x,  that 


X  = -^ r  .  log  ^ , 

,o,(,-f)         P 


where  t  is  the  thickness  of  the  very  small  layers  into  which 
the  atmosphere  was  supposed  divided. 

c 


la*  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  4, 

If  W=  weight  of  the  piston,  A  its  area,  and  W  =  weight 
of  air  contained  in  the  cylinder,  then  pA  =  W,  p'A  =  W+  W', 
and  Ax  becomes  the  volume  of  the  nuid.     Hence  we  have 

T  ,  W 

X  =  .  log 


In  this  equation  t  is  any  very  small  quantity.  If  t  =  0  it 
is  proved  in  the  Course  cited  above,  that  the  expression  for  x 
becomes 

5.  If  A  be  the  area  of  the  section  of  each  pump  of  the  fire 

engine,  I  the  length  of  the  down  stroke,  n  the  number  of 

strokes  per  minute,  B  the  area  of  the  hose,  then  it  is  obvious 

that  the  average  velocity  from  the  hose,  when  both  pumps 

,        2Aln 
work,  = — j5— . 

JD 

6.  Supposing  some  light  material,  whose  density  is  p,  to 
be  weighed  by  means  of  weights  of  density  p ,  the  density 
of  the  atmosphere  when  the  barometer  stands  at  30  inches 
being  unity ;  shew  that,  if  the  mercury  in  the  barometer 
fall  one  inch,  the  material  will  appear  to  be  altered  by 

P'-P 


(p-l)(30p'-29) 

of  its  former  weight.     Will  it  appear  to  weigh  more  or  less  ? 

Let  V  =  volume  of  the  material,  Fthe  volume  of  the  weightj' 
then  V  measures  the  apparent  weight  of  the  material,  and 
we  have 

V{p'-l)  =  v{p-l). 

AVlien  the  barometer  has  fallen  one  inch,  the  density  of  the  air 

29 
lias  become  — ,  and  in  this  state  let  V  be  the  volume  of  the 

weight  required  to  balance  the  same  material.     Then 


1^—4.]  AND   RIDERS.  19 

V  (30/)'-29)  (p-l)* 

ix.  A  bright  point  is  at  the  bottom  of  still  water,  and  an 
eye  is  vertically  above  it,  at  the  same  distance  from  the  sur- 
face ;  if  a  small  isosceles  prism,  of  which  the  refractive  angle 
i  is  nearly  two  right  angles,  be  interposed  so  as  to  have  its 
base  in  contact  with  the  water,  prove  that  the  angular  distance 
between  the  images  of  the  point  in  the  two  faces  is 

fi,  fi  being  the  refractive  indices  for  water  and  for  the  prism 

respectively. 

Let  a  ray  diverge  from  the  bright  point  Q,  and  after  pass- 
ing through  the  prism  enter  the  centre  of  the  eye  E.  Then 
this  ray  makes  equal  angles  {<f))  with  the  vertical  before  and 
after  refraction,  because  the  eye  and  Q  are  at  equal  distances 
from  the  surface  of  the  water.  Imagine  a  very  thin  layer  of 
air  to  be  placed  between  the  prism  and  the  surface,  the  de- 
viation of  a  ray  on  entering  this  layer  will  be  —  (/i'—  1)  <f). 
The  deviation  on  passing  through  the  prism  will  be 

Hence  the  total  deviation  will  be 

0^-i)^'-(/-i)<^. 

But  the  total  deviation  of  a  ray  is  the  sura  of  the  acute  angles 
it  makes  with  the  vertical  before  and  after  refraction,  which  is 
2<f>.     Hence  equating  these,  we  get 

X.  Prove  that,  as  the  focus  of  an  incident  convergent  pencil 
moves  from  a  concave  lens,  the  distance  between  the  conju- 
gate foci  always  increases,  except  when  the  focus  of  incident 
rays  passes  between  the  distances /and  2/ from  the  lens. 

C2 


20  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  A, 

In  a  convergent  pencil  converging  to  a  distance  u, 

1_1_1 
v~f     u' 
As                           u  increases  from  0  to/, 
V  0  ...  00  , 

(— V)— W    0...CX3. 

As  u  increases  from  /  to  2/j 

V  is  positive  and  decreases  from  co  to  2/, 

and  v  +  u co  ...4/. 

As  u  increases  from  2f  to  qo  , 

V  decreases 2/'...0, 

v  +  u  increases 4/*...  qo  . 

xi.  If  the  focal  length  of  a  convex  lens  be  3  inches,  and 
the  shortest  distance  of  distinct  vision  be  6  inches,  prove  that, 
when  the  eye  is  always  placed  so  as  to  see  distinctly  under  the 
greatest  possible  angle,  the  lens  magnifies  when  within  6  inches 
of  the  object,  and  diminishes  at  greater  distances. 

If  PQ  be  the  object  on  the  axis,  CQ  of  the  lens.     Fig.  10. 

PQ 

—^  =  greatest  angle  with  the  naked  eye. 

I.    When  the  image  is  on  the  same  side  as  PQ,  \eXpq  be 

the  image ; 

J_^J 1  ^ 

•*•    Gq~  CQ     3' 

(1)  Let       C^<6;    ...  J^>  1  +  1  or  1; 

.'.  ratio  of  apparent  angles  =  ^k  =  7777  >  1. 

(2)  Let  Cq  >  6,  or  CQ  >  2, 
then  the  greatest  angle,  with  lens,  =  ^  ■ , 


1^—4.]  AND  EIDERS.  21 

ratio  of  apparent  angles  —  pk-  yr  =  /yT^  ^  ^' 
II.     When  the  image  is  on  the  opposite  side,  SLSjy'q'j 
ratio  of  apparent  angles  =  ^-r.  =  -jSi  > 

3 
.*.  the  ratio  =  -j^rri — -  >  1  if  (7^  <  6, 

<  1  if  0<3  >  6. 

xii.  If  the  object-glass  be  divided,  so  as  to  form  two  semi- 
circular lenses,  and  these  be  displaced  along  the  line  of  di- 
vision, what  must  be  the  displacement  of  the  centres  in  order 
that  a  double  star  may  appear  as  three  stars  ? 

This  is  the  combination  devised  to  cause  a  duplication  of 
an  image,  and  called  the  Heliometer. 

Each  half  forms  an  image  of  each  star,  8,  S',  and  8,  8", 
and  if  one  of  each  pair  coincide  at  8,  the  double  star  ap- 
pears as  three  stars.     See  Figs.  11  and  12. 

If  a  be  the  number  of  seconds  in  the  angular  distance  of  the 
stars,  F  the  focal  length  of  each  semi-lens,  the  distance  of 
the  centres  (7,  C  will  subtend  at  the  middle  of  the  three 
images  of  the  stars  an  angle  08C '  =  a" ; 

,'.  the  distance  of  the  centres  =  Fa  sin  1". 


(    22     ) 


Thursday,  Jan,  5.    9  to  12. 


Seniob  Modebatob.    Koman  numbers. 
JUKIOB  MODBBATOB.    Arabic  numbers. 

i.  Three  concentric  circles  are  drawn  in  the  same  plane. 
Draw  a  straight  line,  such  that  one  of  its  segments  between 
the  inner  and  outer  circumference  may  be  bisected  at  one  of 
the  points  in  which  the  line  meets  the  middle  circumference. 

Let  0  be  the  common  centre.  Take  any  point  P  on  the 
circumference  of  the  middle  circle;  join  OF  and  produce  to 
Q  making  FQ  =  OF.  With  centre  Q  and  radius  equal  to 
that  of  the  smallest  circle  describe  a  circle,  and  let  one  of 
the  points  in  which  it  meets  the  outermost  circle  be  B. 
Again,  with  centre  Q  and  radius  equal  to  that  of  the  largest 
circle  describe  a  circle,  and  let  one  of  the  points  in  which  it 
meets  the  innermost  circle  be  S.  Then  if  E  and  ;S^  be  taken 
properly  HP  and  FS  shall  be  in  one  straight  line  which 
line  will  also  satisfy  the  required  condition.     Fig.  13. 

Join  OB,     QS,     OS,     QR, 

Then  ORQSia  a  parallelogram,  because  its  opposite  sides 
are  equal,  and  from  this,  together  with  the  property  that 
diagonals  of  a  parallelogram  bisect  each  other,  the  truth  of 
the  proposition  is  obvious. 

ii.  If  a  quadrilateral  circumscribes  an  ellipse,  prove  that 
cither  pair  of  opposite  sides  subtends  supplementary  angles 
at  either  focus. 

Let  ABCD  be  the  quadrilateral ;  P,  Q,  B,  T  the  points  of 
contact  of  the  respective  sides,  and  S  one  of  one  foci.   Fig.  14. 


9—12.]  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  RIDERS.  23 

Join  S  with  the  angles  of  the  quadrilateral  and  the  points 
of  contact. 

By  a  property  of  the  ellipse  ASP=  TSA,  applying  this  to 
the  eight  angles  at  S  taken  in  pairs,  we  get 

A8B  +  DSG=ASD  +  B8G; 

and  since  all  the  angles  at  8  are  together  equal  to  four  right 
angles  the  truth  of  the  proposition  is  evident. 

iii.  If  a  polygon  of  a  given  number  of  sides  circumscribes 
an  ellipse,  prove  that,  when  its  area  is  a  minimum,  any 
side  is  parallel  to  the  line  joining  the  points  of  contact  of  the 
two  adjacent  sides. 

The  polygon  of  minimum  area  and  given  number  of  sides 
circumscribing  a  circle  is  the  regular  polygon,  and  any  side  is 
therefore  parallel  to  the  line  joining  the  points  of  contact  of 
the  two  adjacent  sides. 

Hence  by  projecting  this  circle  into  an  ellipse  the  truth  of 
the  proposition  is  obvious. 

Or  we  may  prove  it  thus :  Fig.  15. 

Let  EA,  AB,  BFhe  three  consecutive  sides  of  the  polygon. 
Then  if  the  area  is  a  minimum  a  small  displacement  given 
to  AB  while  KA  and  DF  remain  fixed  cannot  alter  the  area 
of  the  polygon.  Let  AB  be  displaced  to  A'B".  The  point 
of  intersection  of  these  lines  will  ultimately  coincide  with  tlie 
point  of  contact  P,  and  we  have 

AAPA'  =  ABPB  ultimately  ; 

.-.  AP.  A'P  sin  APA'  =  BP.  BP  sin  BPB, 

AP.A'P=BP.B'P; 

.'.  AP=BP, 

since  A'P  and  B'P  are  ultimately  equal  to  AP  and  BP  respec- 
tively. 

Hence  the  diameter  which  bisects  chords  parallel  to  EF 
meets  the  ellipse  in  P,  and  therefore  the  tangent  at  P  is 
parallel  to  EF. 


24  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

4.  If  the  tangent  at  any  point  P  of  an  hyperbola  cut  an 
asymptote  in  T,  and  if  SP  cut  the  same  asymptote  in  Q, 
then  SQ  ^QT.     See  Fig.  16. 

If  from  any  point  T,  two  tangents  are  drawn  to  a  conic, 
they  subtend  equal  angles  at  either  focus.  One  of  these  tan- 
gents in  this  problem  becomes  an  asymptote,  the  other  is  TP. 
Therefore  if  SR  be  drawn  parallel  to  QT,  the  angles  TSQ, 
TSR  are  equal,  and  therefore  the  angles  QST,  QTS  are  equal, 
or  SQ^QT. 

5.  Prove  that  the  sum  of  the  products  of  the  first  n  natural 
numbers  taken  two  and  two  together  is 

{n-l)n{n  +  l){3n+2) 
24 
Since 

{a  +  h  +  c  +  ...y  =  a'  +  h''-\-c''+...  +  2{ab  +  hc+...), 

let  a  =  1,  i  =  2,  c  =  3,  &c.  ...  ,  then  we  have  the  sum  of  the 
products 

=  H("-"-^)'-"-""e'"'1' 

which  reduces  to  — — '  ^     — — . 

24 

6.  The  centres  of  the  escribed  circles  of  a  triangle  must 
lie  without  the  circumscribing  circle,  and  cannot  be  equidistant 
from  it  unless  the  triangle  be  equilateral. 

It  may  be  proved,  as  in  Todhunter's  Trigonometry  (Art^.^ 
253),  if  Q  be  the  centre  of  the  circumscribing  circle,  P  of 
any  one  of  the  escribed  circles,  and  R,  r,  their  radii,  that 
PQ^  =  I^+2Rr^;  whence  it  follows  that  PQ  must  be  greater 
than  R,  and  the  tliree  distances  cannot  be  equal,  unless  the 
radii  of  the  escribed  circles  are  equal.     The  formulte  for  these 

radii  are  respectively  -^ —  ,  -^ — -. ,  -^ — ,  where  a,  b,  c  are  the 
)j  —  a     o  — O     a  —  C 

sides  and  A  the  area  of  the  triangle.     Whence  it  follows  that 

a,  i,  c  are  all  equal. 

This  may  also  be  proved  independently  of  the  proposition 
quoted  from  Todhunter. 


9—12.]  AND   EIDERS.  26 

vii.  If  perpendiculars  be  drawn  from  the  angles  of  an  equi- 
lateral triangle  upon  any  tangent  to  the  inscribed  circle, 
prove  that  the  sura  of  the  reciprocals  of  those  perpendiculars 
which  f.dl  upon  the  same  side  of  the  tangent  is  equal  to  the 
reciprocal  of  that  perpendicular  which  falls  upon  the  opposite 
side. 

Let  ABC  be  the  triangle,  0  the  centre  of  the  inscribed 
circle,  and  P  be  the  point  of  contact  of  the  tangent  in  ques- 
tion so  that  OP  makes  the  angle  6  with  AO,  {0  being  the 
centre  of  the  circle).     Fig.  17. 

Then  the  inclinations  of  OB  and  OC  to  OP  produced  are 

|-^,     and|  +  ^. 

Hence  remembering  that  in  this  case  the  radius  of  the  cir- 
cumscribing circle  =  2  the  radius  of  the  inscribed  =  2r,  suppose 

perpendicular  from  A  =  '2r  cos  6  —  r  =  r  {2  cos  ^  —  1), 


and 


for 


B  =2rco3(^-0\+r=r  i2QoaC^-e)+l 
0  =  2rcos('|+^)+r  =  r|2cos^|  +  ^]+ll 


+  ' 


o         f"^   ,   a\    ,   t       o        f"^      n\   ,    1       2  cos  ^  —  1  ' 
2cosf-+^j+l     2cos(-— ^j+I 


+ 


(2co8^+l)-V38in^     (cos^+1)  +  V3  sin^ 

2  (cos  0  +  1) 

~l  +  co3'^-3  8in''^+  2  co8^ 

2(C08^  +  1)  cos^+1 


4cos''^  +  2cos^-2      2cos' ^+008^-1 

cos  ^  +  1 1 

~(2co8^-l)  (cos^+l)~2co8^-l  ■ 

viii.     Four  equal  particles  are  mutually  repulsive,  the  law 
of  force  being  that  of  the  inverse  distance.     If  they  be  joined 


26  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

together  by  four  strings  of  given  length  so  as  to  form  a 
quadrilateral,  prove  that,  when  there  is  equilibrium,  the  four 
particles  lie  in  a  circle.    Fig.  18. 

When  there  is  equilibrium,  the  action  of  C  on  -4  :  action 
of  5  on  -4 

::  ein DAB  :  aia DAC, 
also  action  of  D  on  JB  :  action  of  -4  on  5 

::  Bin  ABC  :  ain  BBC; 
.'.  action  of  0  on  ^  :  action  of  i>  on  B 

::  sin  BAB .  sin  BBC  :  sin  BAC.  sin  ABC; 
.-.  BB  :  AC  ::  sin  BAB  sin  BBC  :  sin  BA C  sin  ABC. 

(It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  action  between  A  and  B  is 
the  difference  between  the  repulsive  force  and  the  tension,  it 
therefore  follows  no  law) ; 

AB  sin  BAB  ,  AB  sin  ABC 
•**      sin^Z?^      •      sin  ACB 

::  sin  BAB .  sin  BBC  :  sin  BA  C  sin  ABC, 

sin  A  CB  :  sin  ABB  ::  sin  BBC  :  sin  BA  C ; 

BO.ainBBC     AG  sin  BAC      .     ^^^       .    „,^ 
.'.  Y)7i * nn '•  ^^^  BBC  :  sin  BA  C ; 

.'.  BO.OB  =  AO.OC,  whence,  &c. 

9.  A  heavy  rod  is  placed  in  any  manner  resting  on  two 
points  A  and  B  oi  &  rough  horizontal  curve,  and  a  string 
attached  to  the  middle  point  C  of  the  chord  is  pulled  in  any 
direction  so  that  the  rod  is  on  the  point  of  motion.  Prove 
that  the  locus  of  the  intersection  of  the  string  with  the 
directions  of  the  frictions  at  the  points  of  support  is  an  arc 
of  a  circle  and  a  part  of  a  straight  line. 

Find  also  how  the  force  must  be  applied  that  its  inter- 
sections with  the  frictions  may  trace  out  the  remainder  of  the 
circle.    See  Fig.  19. 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  27 

First,  let  the  rod  be  on  point  of  slipping  at  both  A  and 
B,  and  let  F,  F'  be  the  frictions  at  the  two  points.  Then 
F,  F'  are  both  known,  and  depend  only  on  the  weight  and  the 
position  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  rod.  Since  there  la 
equilibrium  the  two  frictions  and  the  tension  must  meet  in 
one  point,  let  this  be  P.  Then  since  AC=  CB,  it  is  evident 
that  CP  is  half  the  diagonal  of  the  parallelogram  whose  sides 
are  AP,  PB ;  hence  by  the  triangle  of  forces,  AP,  PB,  and 
2  .  PC  will  respectively  represent  the  forces  in  those  directions. 
Hence  AP  :  PB  ::  F  :  F'  and  are  therefore  in  a  constant 
ratio.     Therefore  the  locus  of  P  is  a  circle. 

The  string  CP  cuts  the  circle  in  two  points,  but  the  forces 
can  meet  in  only  one  of  these.  It  is  evident  that  the  rod  must 
be  on  the  point  of  turning  about  some  one  point  as  a  centre, 
which  point  0  is  the  intersection  of  the  perpendiculars  drawn 
to  PA,  PB  at  A  and  B.  Now  the  frictions,  in  order  to  balance 
the  tension  must  act  towards  P  and  therefore  the  directions  of 
motion  of  ^  and  B  must  hejrom  P.  This  clearly  cannot  be 
the  case  unless  the  point  0  is  on  the  same  side  of  the  line  AB 
as  P.  Therefore  the  angle  PAB  is  greater  than  a  right  angle. 
Thus  the  point  P  cannot  lie  on  the  dotted  part  of  the  circle. 

Secondly.  Let  the  rod  be  on  the  point  of  slipping  at  one 
point  of  support  only.  Then  since  the  centre  of  gravity  is 
nearer  B  than  A,  the  rod  will  slip  at  A,  and  turn  round  B  as 
a  fixed  point.  Thus  the  friction  acts  along  QA,  and  the  locus 
of  P  is  the  fixed  straight  line  QA. 

But  P  cannot  lie  on  the  dotted  part  of  the  straight  line,  for 
if  possible  let  it  be  at  R.  Then  if  AR  represents  F,  RB  must 
be  less  than  F'  because  there  is  no  slipping  at  B.   But  because 

R  lies  within  the  circle,  the  ratio  ^775  is  <  ^rrr,  i.e.  <r=;  and 
'  RB  PB  F 

therefore  RB  >  F'  and  therefore  the  rod  has  moved  at  B  which 

is  contrary  to  supposition.    Thus  the  string  being  produced 

will  always  cut  the  arc  of  the  circle  and  the  part  of  tlie 

straight  line  in  one  point  and  one  point  only,  and  the  frictions 

always  tend  towards  that  point  when  the  rod  is  on  the  point 

of  motion. 

In  order  that  the  locus  of  P  may  be  the  dotted  part  of  the 
circle,  it  is  necessary  that  the  frictions  should  tena  one  from 


28  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [/an.  5, 

Pand  the  other  to  P,  and  the  tension  must  therefore  act  in 
the  angle  between  PA  and  FB  produced.  By  the  triangle  of 
forces  APB  we  see  that  the  tension  must  act  parallel  to  AB 
and  be  proportional  to  it. 

X.  A  rigid  wire  without  appreciable  mass  is  formed  into 
an  arc  of  an  equiangular  spiral  and  carries  a  small  heavy 
particle  fixed  in  its  pole.  If  the  convexity  of  the  wire  be 
placed  in  contact  with  a  perfectly  rough  horizontal  plane,  prove 
that  the  point  of  contact  with  the  plane  will  move  with  uniform 
acceleration,  and  find  this  acceleration. 

Let  P  be  the  point  of  contact  at  any  instant  and  S  the 
corresponding  position  of  the  pole. 

Since  the  curve  rolls  on  the  line  the  instantaneous  direction 
of  the  motion  of  S  is  perpendicular  to  SP,  i.  e.  SP  is  the 
normal  to  the  path  described  by  S  at  S. 

But  SP  is  always  parallel  to  itself  by  the  property  of  the 
spiral,  and  therefore  the  path  of  /S'  is  a  straight  line  inclined 

at  the  angle  „  —  a  to  the  horizon,  where  a  is  the  constant 

angle  between  the  tangent  and  radius  vector. 

Hence  the  heavy  particle  is  constrained  to  move  along  this 
line,  and  the  acceleration  of  gravity  resolved  in  the  direction 
of  the  particle's  motion  is  ff  cos  a. 

If  S'  and  P'  be  consecutive  positions  of  S  and  P  respectively, 
it  is  clear  that  PP'  :  >S'^'  ::  1  :  sin  a  ; 

.*.  acceleration  of  P  is  —. =  g  cot  a.  ^ 

sm  a       ^ 

11.  If  two  parabolas  be  placed  with  their  axes  vertical, 
vertices  downwards,  and  foci  coincident,  prove  that  there  are 
three  chords  down  which  the  time  of  descent  of  a  particle 
under  the  action  of  gravity  from  one  curve  to  the  other  is 
a  minimum,  and  that  one  of  these  is  the  principal  diameter 
and  the  other  two  make  an  angle  of  60°  with  it  on  either 
side.     See  Figs.  20  and  21. 

The  chord  PQ  do^vn  which  a  particle  will  slide  in  tlie 
least  time  from  a  given  point  P  to  a  given  curve  CD, 
makes  equal  angles  with  the  vertical  and  the  normal  to  the 


9—12.]  AND  BIDERS.  29 

given  curve  at  the  point  Q  where  the  chord  cuts  the  curve. 
For  the  chord  PQ  will  clearly  be  found  by  describing  a  circle 
to  touch  the  curve  in  Q  and  the  centre  0  of  which  shall  be 
vertical]y  under  P.  Then  it  is  evident  that  P  Q  makes  equal 
angles  with  the  normal  QO  and  with  the  vertical  PO. 

Similarly  it  may  be  proved,  that  the  chord  of  shortest 
descent  PQ  from  any  curve  AB  io  &  fixed  point  Q,  makes 
equal  angles  with  the  normal  at  P  and  with  the  vertical. 

Again,  if  PQ  be  the  chord  of  quickest  descent  from  any 
curve  AB  to  any  other  curve  CD,  by  considering  P  fixed 
and  Q  variable,  it  is  evident  that  PQ  makes  equal  angles 
with  the  normal  at  Q  and  with  the  vertical.  Also  by  con- 
sidering P  variable  and  Q  fixed,  it  is  evident  that  PQ  makes 
equal  angles  with  the  normal  at  P  and  with  the  vertical. 
Hence  the  normals  at  P  and  Q  must  be  parallel. 

Now  the  parabolas  in  the  problem  are  similar,  and  have 
their  foci  coincident,  therefore  the  normals  to  the  two  para- 
bolas at  the  extremities  of  any  radius  vector  through  the 
focus  are  parallel,  and  no  others  are  parallel.  Hence  the 
chord  of  quickest  descent  passes  through  the  focus. 

First.  To  find  the  chord  of  quickest  descent  from  the 
outer  to  the  inner.  We  must  have  the  angle  SQO  =  the 
angle  GSQ,  and  therefore  GQ=GS.  But  SG  =  8Q; 
therefore  the  triangle  GSQ  is  equilateral,  and  the  angle 
GSQ  =  eO\     Fig.  22. 

Secondly.  To  find  the  chord  of  quickest  descent  from  the 
inner  to  the  outer.  We  must  have  the  angle  GQS=  the  ex- 
terior angle  QSA,  which  is  impossible  imless  SQ  coincides 
with  the  axis. 

12.  If  a  particle  slide  along  a  chord  of  a  circle  under 
the  action  of  a  centre  of  force  varying  as  the  distance,  the 
time  will  be  the  same  for  all  chords  provided  they  terminate 
at  either  extremity  of  the  diameter  through  the  centre  of 
force.     See  Figs.  23  and  24. 

If  a  particle  describe  an  ellipse  about  a  centre  of  force  in 
the  centre  C,  the  time  of  describing  any  arc  AP  from  the 
vertex  A  is  known  to  be  measured  by  the  angle  ACQ,  where 


30  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

QPN  is  a  common  ordinate  of  the  ellipse  and  the  auxiliary 
circle.  This  proposition  is  still  true  when  the  ellipse  de- 
generates into  its  major  axis  and  the  particle  describes  the 
straight  line  AC.      Thus   the   time   of  describing  AN  is 

measured  by  cob'^yta  • 

Let  AB  be  any  chord,  S  the  centre  of  force,  then,  drawing 
SC  perpendicular  to  AB,  the  resolved  part  of  the  attraction  of 
S  on  any  point  P  is  proportional  to  CF,  and  therefore  the 

time  of  describing  AB  is  measured  by  cos"^  y^ .     But  by 

.      I        1  .      CB     SB      1  •  1 

similar    triangles    the   ratio  77-4=  "on    which    is   constant. 

Therefore  the  time  down  all  chords  through  B  is  the  same. 

13.  A  hollow  cone  floats  with  its  vertex  downwards  in  a 
cylindrical  vessel  containing  water.  Determine  the  equal 
quantities  of  water  that  may  be  poured  into  the  cone  and 
into  the  cylinder  that  the  position  of  the  cone  in  space  may 
be  unaltered. 

Let  AB,  CD  be  the  old  and  new  planes  of  floatation, 
cutting  the  cone  in  EF,  HC.  The  condition  that  the  posi- 
tion of  the  cone  may  be  unaltered  is  the  volume  HF=  ^  vol. 
CB.     Fig.  25. 

Let  h  =  OL  the  part  originally  immersed,  x  =  LMa  =  radius 
of  cylinder,  2a  =  angle  of  cone.     Then 

o 

.'.  x=-lh±  V(ia'  cof  a  -  f  A"). 

The  lower  sign  makes  x  negative  and  is  inadmissible ;  this 
determines  the  required  quantity  of  water. 

xiv.  A  hemispherical  bowl  is  filled  to  the  brim  with  fluid, 
and  a  rod  specifically  heavier  than  the  fluid,  rests  with  one 
end  in  contact  with  the  concave  surface  of  the  bowl,  and 
passes  over  the  rim  of  the  bowl,  find  an  equation  for  de- 
termining the  position  of  equilibrium. 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  31 

In  this  case  let  2a  be  the  length  of  the  rod  A  C,  2h  the 
radius  of  the  bowl  whose  centre  is  0,  6  the  inclination  of 
the  rod  to  the  horizon,  p  the  relative  specific  gravity  of  the 
rod  and  the  fluid,  A  and  B  the  points  where  the  rod  rests 
against  the  concave  surface  and  the  rim  of  the  bowl  respec- 
tively. 

The  forces  acting  on  the  rod  are, 

(1)  A  force  proportional  to  AB{p—  1)  vertically  down- 

wards through  G  the  middle  point  of  AB. 

(2)  A  force  proportional  to  BC.p  vertically  downwards 

through  H  the  middle  point  of  BC. 

(3)  A  force  B  along  A  0. 

(4)  A  force  B'  perpendicular  to  AB  at  B. 

These  two  last  forces  obviously  intersect  in  I)  the  other 
extremity  of  the  diameter  through  A.  Let  the  vertical  through 
I)  meet  the  rod  in  E.  Then  for  equilibrium  taking  moments 
about  £, 

{p-l)AB:GE=p.BC.EH. 

AB  =  2bcosd,     BC =2  {a -b  cos  6), 

BD"  _hs{n^e 
AB~cosd    ' 
Substituting,  we  get 

cos'6'-|p|cos'^  +  i(/>^!  +  l)cos<9  +  g  =  0, 

a  cubic  equation,  with  its  last  term  positive,  whence  the 
positions  of  equilibrium  may  be  found,  and  from  which  it 
appears  that  the  equilibrium  can  only  be  possible  when  all 
the  roots  of  the  equations  are  real. 

XV.  A  ray  of  light  passes  through  a  medium  of  which 
the  refractive  index  at  any  point  is  inversely  proportional 
to  the  distance  of  that  point  from  a  certain  plane.  Prove 
that  the  path  of  the  ray  is  a  circular  arc  of  which  the  centre 
is  in  the  above-mentioned  plane. 

The  medium  is  obviously  arranged  in  planes  of  equal  re- 
fracting power  and  parallel  to  the  plane  mentioned  in  the 
question. 


32  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

And  it  is  clear  that  the  path  of  a  ray  is  in  one  plane 
perpendicular  to  the  above-mentioned  plane. 

Let  the  plane  in  which  the  ray's  path  lies  be  the  plane 
of  the  paper,  and  let  a  small  portion  of  the  path  be  RPQ, 
AB  being  the  intersection  of  the  plane  of  reference  by  the 
plane  of  the  paper  and  HP,  and  FQ  elementary  portions  of 
the  path  before  and  after  passing  through  the  plane  at  P, 
parallel  to  AB,  and  which  may  tlierefore  be  considered  as 
small  straight  lines.  PJfand  ^iV  perpendiculars  on  AB^  QN 
being  produced  to  L,  draw  PO  perpendicular  to  PR  to  meet 
the  line  AB  in  0,  and  join  Q0\    See  Fig.  26. 

1 
sin  P03f_QiV    PM  ^ 
'*•     smPQL     _1_      QN' 
PM 

"  smPQL     Bin  POM 
But  if  the  perpendicular  to  PQ  met  AB  in  0'  then 

am PQL     ^^  ' 

.'.       QO'=POy 

which  is  impossible  unless  0  and  O  coincide. 

Therefore  the  normal  to  the  ray  at  every  point  of  its  path 
meets  the  line  AB  in  the  same  point.     Whence,  &c. 

IG.  A  small  bead  is  projected  with  any  velocity  along  a 
circular  wire  under  the  action  of  a  force  varying  inversely  as 
the  fifth  power  of  the  distance  from  a  centre  of  force  situated 
in  the  circumference.  Prove  that  the  pressure  on  the  wire  is 
constant. 

This  is  a  particular  case  of  a  more  general  proposition. 
Let  a  wire  be  of  such  a  form  that  a  particle,  if  projected  with 
velocity  F',  would  freely  describe  it  without  causing  any 
pressure  on  the  wire ;  then  if  the  particle  be  projected  with 


9—12.]  AND   EIDERS.  33 

velocity    V,  the  pressure  at  any  point  where  the  radius  of 

curvature  is  p  will  be  m .     The  pressure  will  there- 

P 
fore  vary  as  the  curvature. 

For  divide  the  arc  into  small  elements  s^  Sg  •  •  •  *«»  ^^^  ^^^ 
t\  v^  ...v^he  the  velocities  acquired  at  the  end  of  those  arcs ; 
let  F^F^...  Fn  be  the  resolved  parts  of  the  impressed  forces 
along  the  respective  tangents.  Then  when  the  arcs  are  very 
small,  we  have 

v,'-r=2F,s,-] 

v^  —  v*  =  2Fs    I 

&c.  =  &c.     J 

Let  r/  v^...vj  be  the  corresponding  velocities  of  the  particle 
when  freely  describing  the  wire,  then  by  similar  reasoning 

v:'-V''  =  2F,s,+  ...  +  2F„s^; 

...  v:-v^''=T-V'\ 

Now  the  pressure  on  the  wire  =  Statical  Pressure  +  the 

centrifugal  force  =  P+  m  -^ .    But  when  the  particle  describes 

the  curve  freely,  the  pressure  =  0,  therefore  P=  —  m-^. 

.*.  Pressure  =  m  ~ ^ 

P 

=  m . 

P 

In  the  case  of  a  circle  described  under  the  action  of  a 
central  force  varying  as  the  inverse  fifth  power,  we  know  by 
Newton,  that  the  particle  if  properly  projected  would  not  exert 
any  pressure  on  the  wire.  Therefore,  when  otherwise  pro- 
jected, the  pressure  varies  inversely  as  the  radius  of  curvature, 
that  is,  it  is  constant. 

17.  A  bright  spot  of  white  light  is  viewed  through  a 
right  cone  of  glass,  the  vertex  of  which  is  pointed  directly 

D 


34  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

towards  the  spot.  Describe  the  appearances  seen  ;  and  prove 
that,  if  a  section  of  the  locus  of  the  images  corresponding 
to  different  values  of  the  refractive  index  be  made  by  a 
plane  through  the  axis  of  the  cone,  it  will  be  a  rectangular 
hyperbola. 

Let  AB  be  the  axis  of  the  cone,  fig.  27,  A  the  vertex,  2a  the 
angle  of  the  cone,  h  the  height,  Q  the  bright  spot,  AQ  =  u. 

By  the  ordinary  optical  formulae  it  can  be  easily  proved 
that  the  image  of  Q,  formed  by  light  of  refractive  inaex  fi, 
will  be  a  ring  whose  radius  and  position  is  given  by  the 
formulse 

qn  =  (jj,—  1)  u  sin  a  cos  a  ] 

„   _u+h+  {fi—l)u sin' a>  • 
^~  ^i  J 

Hence 
{qn  +  w  sin  a  cos  a)  {Bn  —  u  sin'  a)  =  (w  cos'  a +  h)u  sin  a  cos  a. 

Therefore,  by  Goodwin's  Conies,  Prop,  ix.,  q  lies  on  a 
rectangular  hyperbola  whose  asymptotes  are  parallel  and  per- 
pendicular to  BA.  And  since  the  position  and  magnitude  of 
this  hyperbola  is  independent  of  //.,  all  the  coloured  rings  will 
lie  on  the  surface  formed  by  the  revolution  of  this  hyperbola. 

xviii.  An  elastic  string  passes  through  a  smooth  straight 
tube  whose  length  is  the  natural  length  of  the  string.  It  is 
then  pulled  out  equally  at  both  ends  until  its  length  is 
increased  by  \/2  times  its  original  length.  Two  equal  per- 
fectly elastic  balls  are  attached  to  the  extremities  and  pro^ 
jected  with  equal  velocities  at  right  angles  to  the  string,  and 
so  as  to  impinge  upon  each  other.  Prove  that  the  time  of 
impact  is  independent  of  the  velocity  of  projection,  and  that 
after  impact  each  ball  will  move  in  a  straight  line,  assuming 
that  the  tension  of  the  string  is  proj)Oi1;ional  to  the  extension 
throughout  the  motion. 

Let  AB  be  the  tube,  C  and  D  the  positions  to  which  the 
ends  of  the  string  are  extended. 

Each  particle  describes  an  ellipse  round  the  coiTcsponding 
extremity  of  the  tube  as  centre,  the  absolute  force  depending 
on  the  material  of  which  the  string  is  composed. 


9—12.]  AND  KIDERS.  35 

The  line  CD  will  coincide  with  the  major  or  minor  axes 
of  the  ellipses  according  to  the  magnitude  of  the  initially 
impressed  velocity,  and  the  particles  will  impinge  at  a  point  P 
in  the  line  PE  bisecting  AB  at  right  angles.     See  fig.  28. 

(1)  If  CD  be  the  direction  of  the  major  axes  the  arc 
of  the  auxiliary  circle  described  by  either  particle  is 

,    -xa   EP 

_,a   h    >^{2.AE'-AE')  ^    _.        Stt 

or         IT  —  tan    r  •  -  •  — ^ Trf ='jr—  tan    1  =  —  . 

0    a  AE  4 

(2)  If  CD  be  the  direction  of  the  minor  axes,  then  the 
corresponding  arc  of  the  auxiliary  circle  is 


or 


or 


or 

therefore  in  both  cases  the  time  of  impact  is  independent  of  the 
velocity  of  projection.  Let  the  tangents  to  the  two  curves 
before  impact  at  P  be  PT  and  PT'  meeting  AB  in  T 
and  T'; 

then  AT.AE=2AE^; 

.'.  AT=2AE, 
=  AB; 

therefore  T  and  T'  coincide  with  B  and  A  respectively,  and 
therefore  since  the  velocities  parallel  to  AB  are  reversed  at 
impact,  those  perpendicular  to  AB  remaining  imaltered,  it  is 

d2 


2+**°    i 

AE 
EP' 

TT      ,     _,  a 

AE 

~,^{b'-AE') 

l  +  tan-l; 

(V    5  =  V2. 

Stt 
4  ' 

36  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.         [Jan.  5. 

clear  tliat  the  direction  of  each  particle's  motion  after  impact 
passes  through  A  and  B  respectively. 

xix.  A  particle  is  projected  along  a  chord  of  an  ellipse 
from  any  point  in  the  curve,  and  wlien  it  again  meets  the 
ellipse  has  a  certain  impulse  towards  the  centre  of  the  ellipse 
impressed  upon  it,  causing  it  again  to  describe  a  chord,  and 
so  on  for  any  number  of  times.  Prove  that,  if  after  a  given 
number  of  such  impulses  the  particle  pass  through  another 
given  point  on  the  circumference  of  the  curve,  the  polygonal 
area  so  described  about  the  centre  is  a  maximum,  when  the 
successive  chords  are  described  in  equal  times. 

Since  the  particle  leaves  one  given  point  on  the  curve,  and 
Yjasses  through  another  given  point  after  touching  a  given 
number  of  points  on  the  curve,  (see  fig.  29);  then  in  order 
that  the  polygonal  area  described  about  the  centre  should  be 
a  maximum  every  such  triangle  as  FQB  must  also  be  a 
maximum,  P  and  M  being  fixed  and  Q  variable.  Hence,  if 
we  take  a  point  Q'  near  to  Q,  the  triangle  RQ'P  must  be 
equal  to  RQP,  and  therefore  the  tangent  to  the  ellipse  at 
Q  must  be  parallel  to  PR.  Hence  by  the  property  of  the 
ellipse  if  QT'  be  the  direction  of  central  impulse  at  Q,  QT 
bisects  RP. 

Produce  PQ  to  S,  making  QS  equal  to  PQ.  Then  RS  is 
parallel  to  QT. 

Now  QS  represents  the  original  velocity  at  Q  in  direction 
and  magnitude,  RS  represents  the  direction  of  the  impressed 
velocity,  and  QR  of  the  resultant  velocity  after  the  central, 
impulse;  therefore  QR  is  proportional  to  the  magnitude  or 
the  resultant  velocity,  and  therefore  time  through  QR  equals 
time  through  PQ,  and  so  on. 


(     37     ) 


Thursdaf,  Jan.  5.     1  to  4. 


Senior  Exahineb.    Roman  numbers. 
Junior  Examiner.    Arabic  numbers. 

2.    Enunciate  and  prove  Newton's  tenth  Lemma. 

If  the  curve  employed  in  the  proof  of  this  Lemma  be  an 
arc  of  a  parabola,  the  axis  of  which  is  perpendicular  to  the 
straight  line  on  which  time  is  measured,  prove  that  the  ac- 
celerating effect  of  the  force  will  vary  as  the  distance  from 
the  axis  of  the  parabola. 

Let  time  be  measured  along  the  line  AN  from  the  point 
N,  and  let  V  be  the  vertex  of  the  parabola.  Then,  at  the 
instant  corresponding  to  F,  the  time  is  represented  by  AN^ 
and  the  velocity  by  FN.     See  fig.  30. 

Now,  if  Z  be  the  latus  rectum  of  the  parabola, 
FM'  =  L.VM, 
AK'  =  L.VK; 

.:  FM'-AK'  =  L.FN, 
or  AN{AK+AN)  =  L.FN; 

.'.  when  F  approaches  indefinitely  near  to  A 
,.    .   FN     2AK 

^'"^''AN-^-ir^ 

or  varies  as  the  distance  of  A  from  the  axis  of  the  parabola. 


38  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

Again,  if  P  be  not  indefinitely  near  to  A,  and  P'  a  point 
contiguous  to  P,  it  may  be  shewn  that  the  force  at  P 

^^''^''       NN' 

=  tan  FXN,  if  FX  be  the  tangent  at  P, 

_2.VK 

~    MF 

2. MP 
~     L     ' 

or  varies  as  the  distance  of  P  from  the  axis. 

3.  One  circle  rolls  uniformly  within  another  of  twice  its 
radius;  prove  that  the  resultant  acceleration  of  a  particle 
situated  on  the  circumference  of  the  rolling  circle  tends  to  the 
centre  of  the  fixed  circle,  and  varies  as  the  distance  from  that 
centre. 

Let  0  be  the  centre  of  the  fixed,  C  of  the  moving  circle,  P 
the  point,  the  acceleration  of  which  is  required.     See  fig.  31. 

Now  P  describes  a  circle  uniformly  round  C  while  C  de- 
scribes a  circle  of  equal  radius,  and  in  the  same  time,  uniform- 
ly round  0. 

Hence  the  acceleration  of  P  is  made  up  of  a  constant  accele- 
ration in  the  direction  (7P,  and  of  an  equal  constant  acceleration 
in  the  direction  CO.     Therefore  its  whole  acceleration  will  be 
represented  in  magnitude  and  direction  by  0F\  or  tends  to  0^ 
and  varies  as  the  distance  from  0. 

Note.  If  the  point  P  be  fixed  relatively  to,  though  not  on 
the  circumference  of  the  moving  circle,  it  may  be  proved  in  a 
similar  manner  that  its  acceleration  will  still  tend  to  0,  and  be 
proportional  to  OF.  In  this  case,  it  may  be  geometrically 
proved  that  the  path  of  P  will  be  an  ellipse  of  which  0  is  the 
centre ;  hence  we  learn  that  if  the  acceleration  of  a  moving 
point  tend  to  a  fixed  point,  and  vary  as  the  distance  from  it, 
its  path  will  be  an  ellipse  of  which  the  fixed  point  is  the 
centre;  the  converse  of  Newton,  Sect.  ii.  Prop.  9. 


1 — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  39 

iv.  Prove  that,  when  a  body  moves  along  a  smooth  tube 
under  the  action  of  any  force  tending  to  a  point  and  varying 
as  the  distance  from  the  point,  the  difference  of  the  squares 
of  the  velocities  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  an  arc  varies 
as  the  difference  of  the  squares  of  the  distances  of  the  ex- 
tremities of  the  arc  from  the  fixed  point. 

The  acceleration  in  PQ  =  fi .  SP.  -pr-. ,  ultimately,  fig.  32 ; 

An 

.-.  (vel.)'  at  ^  -  (vel.)'  at  P=  2fi8P.  —^ .  PQ 

=  2fj,SP .  Pm,  ultimately, 
=  ^l{SP-\-SQ){SP-SQ) 
=  fi  {SP^-  SQ'),  ultimately; 
.'.  by  Lemma  IV. 

(vel.)*  at  SA  -  (vel.)»  at  5  =  /i  {SA'  -  SB'). 

V.  A  body  is  revolving  in  an  ellipse  under  the  action 
of  such  a  force,  and  when  it  arrives  at  the  extremity  of  the 
major  axis  the  force  ceases  to  act  until  the  body  has  moved 
through  a  distance  equal  to  the  semi-minor  axis,  it  then 
acts  for  a  quarter  of  the  periodic  time  in  the  ellipse ;  prove 
that,  if  it  again  ceases  to  act  for  the  same  time  as  before, 
the  body  will  have  arrived  at  the  other  extremity  of  the 
major  axis. 

The  velocity  a.t  A  =  <^fiCB  =  velocity  at  D.    Fig.  33. 

The  body  on  arriving  at  I)  proceeds  to  describe  an  ellipse  of 
which  CD  and  CSsire  semi-conjugate  diameters,  and  in  a  quar- 
ter of  the  periodic  time  it  arrives  at  B  and  moves  with  velo- 
city tJfiCB  in  direction  parallel  to  DC  and  therefore  towards 

o,  and  arrives  at  a  in  time  -; — 7^7^=  -, — ttp^,  the  time  from 

*/fi  CJJ     */fiBu 

Ato  D. 

vi.  When  a  body  revolves  in  an  ellipse  under  the  action 
of  a  force  tending  to  the  focus,  find  the  velocity  at  any  point 
of  its  orbit,  and  the  periodic  time. 


40  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS   AND   RIDERS.         [Jan.  5. 

If  on  arriving  at  the  extremity  of  the  minor  axis,  the 
force  has  its  law  clianged,  so  that  it  varies  as  the  distance, 
the  magnitude  at  that  point  remaining  the  same,  the  periodic 
time  will  be  unaltered,  and  the  sum  of  the  new  axes  is  to 
their  difference  as  the  sum  of  the  old  axes  to  the  distance 
between  the  foci. 

-^  =  fi'SB,     SB  =  a; 

27r  _  27rrt* 

{\e\.YsitB=-=fjL'a^,  where  a  =  semi-diameter  parallel  to  the 

major  axis  of  the  old  orbit ;  if  a,  /S  be  the  semi-axes  of  the 
new  orbit.  Since  SB  and  the  semi-conjugate  diameter  each 
equals  a 

a/3  =  ab, 
{a±^y  =  2a{a±b); 
.'.  a  4-/8  :  a-/3  ::  ^/{a  +  b)  :  s/{a-b) 
::       a  +  b    :  V(a*-&*) 
::  2{AC  +  BC)  :  SH. 


(    41     ) 


Monday,  Jan.  16.     9  to  12. 


Seniok  Modkbatob.     Arabic  numbers. 
Seniob  Examixeb.     Roman  numbers. 


1.  A  UNIFORM  heavy  ellipsoid  has  a  given  point  in  contact 
with  a  smooth  horizontal  plane.  Find  the  plane  of  the 
couple  necessary  to  keep  it  at  rest  in  this  position ;  and 
investigate  its  equation  referred  to  the  principal  axes  of  the 
ellipsoid. 

The  ellipsoid  is  acted  on  by  its  weight  vertically  down- 
wards, through  the  centre,  and  the  normal  action  of  the 
horizontal  plane  vertically  upwards,  through  the  point  of 
contact. 

The  plane  of  the  required  couple  must  therefore  be  the 
vertical  plane  which  passes  through  the  centre  and  the  point 
of  contact  or  be  parallel  to  this  plane.  If  ar,  y,  z  be  the  co-ordi- 
nates of  the  point  of  contact  referred  to  the  principal  axes 
of  the  ellipsoid,  the  equations  of  the  normal  at  tnat  point  are 

^-a?  ^  v-y  ^  .y-g 

X  y  z     ' 

a*  h*  ? 

Hence  the  plane  sought  must  contain  this  line,  and  pass 
through  the  centre,  or  be  parallel  to  the  plane  thus  deter- 
mined. 


42  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

Its  equation  is  therefore  easily  found  to  be 

where  d  is  any  arbitrary  constant. 

2.  An  oblong  taible  has  the  legs  at  the  four  comers  alike 
in  all  respects,  and  slightly  compressible.  Supposing  the 
floor  and  top  of  the  table  to  be  perfectly  rigid,  find  the 
pressures  on  the  legs,  when  the  table  is  loaded  in  any  given 
manner,  supposing  the  compression  to  be  proportional  to  the 
pressure ;  and  prove  that,  when  the  resultant  weight  lies  in 
one  of  four  straight  lines  on  the  surface  of  the  table,  the 
table  is  supported  by  three  legs  only. 

Let  ABGD  be  the  top  of  the  table,  the  sides  AB  and  AD 
being  2a  and  26  respectively.    See  fig.  31. 

Let  the  natural  length  of  each  leg  be  c,  and  let  P  be  the 
position  of  the  resultant  weight;  the  co-ordinates  of  P,  referred 
to  AB  and  AD  as  axes,  being  x  and  y. 

Let  Pj  Pj,  P,  P^  be  the  pressures  at  the  angular  points, 
and  let  z^  z^  z^  z^  be  the  altered  lengths  of  the  legs. 

Then 

^^^  =  XP,    or  «=c-XcP, 

and  so  forth,  also  neglecting  quantities  of  the  second  order 
we  shall  consider  the  pressures  at  the  points  ABGD  to  re- 
main vertical ; 

.-.  P^4-P,  +  P3  +  P,=  TF (1), 

(P,  +  PJa;-(P,  +  P,)(2a-a:)=0 (2), 

(P,  +  PJy-(P3  +  P,)(26-y)=0 (3), 

and  since  the  base  and  top  of  the  table  remain  rigid,  the 
height  of  the  intersection  of  its  diagonals  is 

H^a  +  ^J,  or  i  (a,  4- 2,); 

.-.    2!,+ 2,  =  21  +  ^8; 

.-.  P.  +  P,  =  P.  +  P3 (4). 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  43 

By  elimination  between  these  four  equations,  we  get 

»       4      Wb        J' 
with  similar  values  for  the  other  pressures. 

If  P,  =  0,  the  weight  must  lie  in  the  line 

being  a  line  parallel  to  BI),  and  bisecting  AB  and  AD. 

Hence,  when  the  weight  lies  in  one  of  four  straight  lines 
parallel  to  the  diagonals  of  the  table,  the  table  is  supported 
bj  three  legs  only. 

3.  Find  the  equations  of  equilibrium  of  a  perfectly  flexi- 
ble uniform  inextensible  string  when  acted  on  by  any  given 
forces. 

If  a  small  rough  heavy  bead  be  strung  upon  such  a  string, 
and  the  string  be  suspended  from  two  points  and  acted  on 
by  gravity  only,  write  down  the  equations  for  determining 
within  what  portion  of  the  string  it  is  possible  for  the  bead 
to  rest. 

Let  AP  and  BP  be  the  two  catenaries  into  which  the 
string  is  divided  when  the  weight  rests  in  one  of  its  limiting 
positions  of  equilibrium  as  at  P.     See  fig.  32. 

Let  fi  be  the  coefficient  of  friction,  w  the  weight  of  the 
ring,  T  and  T'  the  tensions  in  the  two  portions  of  the  string, 
0  and  6+  <!>  the  inclinations  of  the  tangents  at  the  point 
P  to  the  horizontal. 

The  weight  cannot  affect  the  horizontal  tension,  and  there- 
fore the  parameter  c  must  be  the  same  in  both  catenaries. 

Our  equations  are  therefore 

T'  =  Tel'*, 

or     sec  (^  +  <^)  =  sec  ^e*^ (1), 

c{tan^  +  tan(^  +  <^)|  =  w (2), 

c  sec  a— c  sec  {0+<f>)  -  csecy3  +  c8ec^=  h (3), 

ctana  — ctan(^  +  ^)4-ctan)S  — ctan^=  I  (4), 


44  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

h  and  I  being  the  difference  in  height  of  A  and  B,  and  the 
length  of  the  string  respectively,  and  a  and  /Q  the  inclinations 
to  the  horizon  at  the  points  B  and  A  respectively ;  we  have 
also  a  fifth  geometrical  equation  indicating  that  the  horizontal 
distance  between  A  and  B  is  given,  and  involving  no  ad- 
ditional unknown  quantity.  These  five  equations  determine 
0y  <p,  a,  ^,  and  c,  and  then  BP  and  AP  are  known. 

iv.  A  particle  is  attached  by  a  rod  without  »mass,  to  the 
extremity  of  another  rod,  n  times  as  long,  which  revolves  in  a 
given  manner  about  the  other  extremity,  the  whole  motion 
taking  place  in  a  horizontal  plane.  If  6  be  the  inclination  of 
the  rods,  o)  the  angular  velocity  of  the  second  rod  at  the  time 
t,  prove  that 

<Pd     da)        fdo)        y.       2  •    /i\      ^ 
dt"      at        \dt  J 

If  a  be  the  length  of  the  rod  without  weight,  na  that  of  the 
rod  whose  angular  velocity  is  w  at  the  time  <, 

The  angular  velocity  of  the  particle  about  the  point  of 
junction 

d9 
=  T^  +  ^- 

The  acceleration  of  the  point  of  junction  is 

dco 
'"''-di 
perpendicular  to  the  rod  na  and  naa>^  towards  the  fixed  point. 

The  relative  acceleration  of  the  particle  perpendicular  to 
the  rod  a 

(d^     d(D 
'"'[de'^dt 

therefore  since  the  whole  acceleration  in  that  direction  is  zero 
d^O     dto        (da        a  ,     2  '    /i\     n. 

V.  A  bead  is  capable  of  free  motion  on  a  fine  smooth 
wire  in  the  form  of  any  plane  curve,    and  is  acted  on  by 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  45 

given  forces ;    compare  the  pressure  on   tlie  wire  with   the 
weight  of  the  bead. 

If  the  wire  be  a  horizontal  circle,  radius  a,  and  the  bead 
be  acted  on  only  by  the  tension  of  an  elastic  string  the 
natural  length  of  which  is  a,  fixed  to  a  point  in  the  plane 
of  the  circle  at  distance  2a  from  its  centre,  find  the  con- 
dition that  the  bead  may  just  revolve  ;  and  prove  that  in 
this  case  the  pressures  at  the  extremities  of  the  diameter 
through  the  fixed  point  will  be  twice  and  four  times  the 
weight  of  the  bead  if  that  weight  be  such  as  to  stretch  the 
string  to  double  its  natural  length. 

Let  S  be  the  point  to  which  the  string  is  fixed,  C  the  cen- 
tre of  the  circle,  SA  CB  a  straight  line  meeting  the  circle  in 
A,  B.     See  fig.  33. 

If  W  be  the  weight  of  the  particle,  r  the  length  of  the 
string,  a  the  radius  of  the  circle, 

the  tension  =  W. , 

a 

and  its  accelerating  efiect  =  g . . 

If  V  be  the  velocity  of  the  particle  when  the  length  of  the 
string  is  r,  w,  v  the  velocities  at  B  and  A^ 


v^  —  u^  =  —  2g  I    dr ; 

.-.  vT-v'^g- '-  ; 


.".  u^=4:ag. 

u* 

Pressure  at  A  is  that  due  to  the  acceleration  — 

a 

=  4Tr. 

Pressure  on  J?  is  the  tension  of  the  string  at  B 

=  2W. 

9.     A   distant  circular  window  is   viewed    by   a  short- 
sighted man  through  his  eye-glass,  the  axis  of  which  passes 


46  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

through  the  centre  of  the  window  and  is  perpendicular  to  its 
plane.  Prove  that  the  image  of  the  window  formed  by- 
primary  focal  lines  will  be  spherical,  provided  the  window  be 
filled  with  concentric  rings  of  stained  glass,  and  the  refractive 
index  of  the  colour  throughout  any  ring  be 

(/z-l)(2/t+l)    r^ 

fi  being  the  index  of  the  central  colour,  r  the  radius  of  the 
ring  in  question,  and  d  the  distance  of  the  window  from 
the  lens. 

When  a  small  pencil  of  parallel  rays  passes  centrically  and 
with  small  obliquity  {j>)  through  a  lens,  the  distance  of  the 
primary  focal  line  from  the  centre  of  the  lens  is 

where  j=  {fi-l)  (^-- -^  . 

In  the  case  supposed,  let  f^  be  the  focal  length  for  the 
direct  ray  and  x  the  refractive  index  for  rays  which  are  in- 
cident at  the  angle  <^ ;  therefore  to  satisfy  the  required  con- 
dition we  must  have  the  following  relation  between  <j>  and  x, 

••i-ii  +  2ij'''-7-;rrT' 
.         .•.x-i=/x-i-(M-i)f-^).«', 

putting  /Lt  for  x  in  the  coefficient  of  the  small  quantity  ^*,  and 

/"*  .  . 

substituting  -^  as  the  obvious  equivalent  of  that  quantity. 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  47 

11.  Find  the  parallax  in  right  ascension  of  a  heavenly 
boclj,  in  terras  of  the  latitude  of  the  place  of  observation,  and 
the  hour  angle  and  declination  of  the  body,  assuming  the 
distance  of  the  body  from  the  Earth  to  be  so  great  that  the 
sine  and  circular  measure  of  the  parallax  may  be  considered 
equal. 

Shew  that  the  locus  of  all  the  bodies,  which  on  this 
assumption  have  their  parallaxes  in  right  ascension  for  a 
given  place  and  time  equal  to  a  given  quantity,  is  a  right 
circular  cylinder  touching  the  plane  of  the  meridian  of  the 
place  along  the  axis  of  the  heavens. 

The  parallax  in  R.  A.  for  bodies  satisfying  the  condition 
mentioned  in  the  question  is 

a   cos  Z  sin  A 

r '      cos  h      ' 

a  being  the  Earth's  radius,  r  the  distance  of  the  body,  I  the 
latitude  of  the  place,  h  the  hour  angle,  and  h  the  declination 
of  the  body. 

If  this  be  equal  to  a  given  quantity  m, 

a   cos  I  sin  h 


cos  8 


=  m 


J      2^     a  cos  I        .    ■,         5, 

or  r  cos  o  = .  r  sm  A  cos  o. 

m 

Refer  to  the  plane  of  the  equator  as  that  of  xy,  the  axis 
of  y  being  perpendicular  to  the  meridian  ; 

,       ,     a  cos  / 
proving  the  proposition. 


(    48    ) 


Monday,  Jan.  16.    \\  to  4. 


Junior  Modeeatob.     Ai*abic  numbers. 
Junior  Examiner,     Roman  numbers. 


1.    Shew  how  to  expand  a'  in  a  series  of  ascending  powers 
of  x. 

Prove  that  the  series 

^  "^  172  "^  T7273  "^  1  .  2  .  3 .  4  "^  •  •  •  "  ^^• 

It  may  be  easily  proved  by  direct  multiplication  that  the 
series 


X- 


whence,  putting  a;  =  1,  we  have 
2'  3' 

An  expression  may  also  be  found  for  the  general  series 

2"  3" 

'^1.2"*"l.2.3'^ 

Since 

,.=i+,.+j£l+_i'L+ 


1^ — 4.  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND  RIDERS.  49 

expanding  each  term,  the  required  series  is  easily  seen  to  be 
the  coeflScient  of  f  in  the  expansion  of  e*'.  By  Herschel's 
Theorem  this  is  equal  to  e^^^.O".  Hence  the  required  expres- 
sion is 

vi.  Find  the  value  oi  p,  in  order  that  the  straight  line 
represented  by  the  equation  a;  cos^+y  sin^=p  may  touch 
the  ellipse 

8  2 

a       b 

Prove   that   the   locus   of  the   vertices  of  an  equilateral 

triangle  described  about  the  ellipse  -^  +  ^  =  1  is  given  by 

the  equation 

4  (JV+oy-a'J*)  =3  (a;«+/-a»-57. 

Let  X,  y  be  the  co-ordinates  of  one  of  the  vertices  of  an 
equilateral  triangle  described  about  the  ellipse,  6  the  incli- 
nation to  the  axis  of  y,  of  a  tangent  drawn  through  it.  We 
have  then,  for  the  determination  of  6,  the  equation 

a;  cos  ^  +  y  sin  ^  =  {a^cos^d  +  S^sin'^)*, 

which,  rationalized,  gives 

(y*-  b')  tan'^  +  2xy  tan  $  +  {a?-  a")  =  0. 

If  6^,  6^  be  the  two  values  of  0  given  by  this  equation,  we 
must  have,  in  order  that  the  two  tangents  represented  by  it 


TT 


may  be  inclined  at  an  angle  —  , 


TT 


that  is, 
Now 


tan(^,-^J=tanJ  =  V3, 


tan  6,  —  tan  6^    _ 


1  +tan^,.tan^. 


tan^,+  tan^,=  -^^,, 


50  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

2xyV     j^-a' 


^'•^-^^3; 


.     4a;y-4(a;'-a')(y-y)_ 

or     3(a^+y-a'^-&y  =  4(6V+ay-a''J*), 
a  relation  between  x  and  y,  which  gives  the  required  locus*. 

8.     Prove  that,  if  a  straight  line  be  drawn  from  the  origin 

to  cut  the  straight  line  — j—  =  '^- = at  right  angles, 

"  I  m  n 

its  equations  will  be 


X 


, y_ 


a  — It     h  —  mt     c  —  nt^ 

,  rt?  +  hm  +  en 

where  t  =  ^u— — 2~, — 2  • 

Let  the  given  line  be 

X  —  a  _y  —  h  _z  —  c  _ 

I  m  n  ' 

and  the  required  line 

X  _y  _z 

\     fi     v'  -^ 

Then,  since  these  must  intersect  and  also  be  at  right  angles, 
we  have 

a—lt_b  —  'mt_c  —  'nt   \ 

Vk  +  myi.  +  nv  =  0,  J 

*  It  will  be  observed  that  this  curve  consists  of  two  closed  i>ortion8,  one 
wholly  within  the  other.  The  outer  one  alone  satisfies  the  condition  of  the 
question.     The  ianer  is  the  locus  of  the  intersection  of  tangents,  inclined  to 

one  another  at  an  angle  -^  . 


1^—4.]  AND  EIDERS.  51 

,                                     ^     al+  bm  +  en 
whence  t  =  -« » §  , 

and  the  ratios  \  :  fi :  v  are  found. 

9.  If  a,  /S,  7  "be  the  distances  of  a  point  from  the  three 
faces  of  a  tetrahedron  which  meet  in  the  vertex,  prove  that 
the  equation  of  the  plane  passing  through  the  vertex,  and 
through  the  centres  of  the  circles  inscribed  in  and  circum- 
scribed about  the  base,  is 

(cos  B  —  cos  C)  PjCl  +  (cos  G  —  cos  A)  p^^ 

+  (cos  A  —  cos  B)  'p^  =  0, 

where  A,  B,  C  are  the  angles  of  the  base,  and  p^,^^-,^^  the 
perpendiculars  from  the  vertex  on  the  sides  of  the  base. 

Let  the  equation  to  the  required  plane  be 

ia  +  if^  +  iVV  =  0. 

Let  r  =  radius  of  inscribed  circles  and  let  (a8),  (/8S),  (7S)  be 
the  angles  made  by  the  three  faces  0/87  with  the  third  face  3, 
tlien  a  =  r  sin  (aS) ,  /8  =  r  sin  (j88) ,  7  =  r  sin  (7S)  must  satisfy 
this  equation ; 

/.  L  sin  (aS)  +  if  sin  (/38)  +  iVsin  (78)  =  0. 

But  the  volume  of  the  pyramid  =  Jj?  sin  (78),  area  of  base  8, 
with  two  similar  expressions.  Therefore  substituting  for 
sin  (78),  8in(/38),  8in(aS),  we  get 

L     M    N     ^ 
p     p     p 

Again,  if  ^  =  radius  of  circumscribing  circle,  then 
a  =  B  cos  A  sin  (aS), 

and  two  similar  expressions  for  /S  and  7  must  satisfy  tlie 
equation ; 

Leon  A     McosB     NcoaC_ 

P  P  P 

E2 


52  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  EIDERS.       [Jan,  16. 

Hence  by  cross  multiplication  we  find 

L  ^  M  N 

(cos  B  —  cos  C)p     (cos  G  —  cos  A)  p      (cos  A  —  cos  B)  p" ' 

10.  Find  the  equation  of  the  sphere,  passing  through  a 
given  point  and  through  the  circle  in  which  the  polar  plane 
of  that  point  with  respect  to  a  given  sphere  cuts  that  sphere. 

Let  the  equation  to  the  given  sphere  be 

os'  +  f  +  z'  =  a!', 

and  the  co-ordinates  of  the  given  point  g,  h,  k;   then  the 
equation  to  the  plane  of  contact  is 

and  the  equation  to  every  sphere  passing  through  the  inter- 
section of  these  two  is  included  in 

a^  +  y"  +  z''  -  a"  -\  {ffx  +  hi/  +  kz  -a")  =  0. 

But  by  the  question,  this  goes  through  x=g,  y  =  h,  z=  k. 
Hence  by  substitution  \=  1,  and  the  required  sphere  is 

a?  +  y'  +  z^  =  gx  +  hi/  +  kz. 

11.  If  a  sphere  touch  an  ellipsoid  and  also  cut  it,  the 
common  section  cannot  be  a  plane  curve  unless  the  point  of 
contact  be  one  of  four  fixed  points  on  the  ellipsoid. 

When  two  surfaces  of  the  second  degree  intersect,  if  one 
intersection  be  a  plane  curve,  the  other  is  plane  also.  Hence; 
as  all  the  plane  sections  of  a  sphere  are  circles  if  a  sphere  cut 
an  ellipsoid  in  a  plane  curve,  both  that  curve  and  the  other 
intersection  must  be  circular  sections.  Hence  in  the  limit 
when  the  sphere  touches  the  ellipsoid,  it  must  touch  it  at  the 
four  umbilici  or  the  points  which  are  the  evanescent  circular 
sections. 


(    53    ) 


Tuesday,  Jan.  17.    9  to  12. 


Senior  Modkbatob.    Arabic  numbers. 
JONIOB  MoOEBATOB.    Boman  numbers. 


i.  Find  a  point  the  distances  of  which  from  three  given 
points,  not  in  the  same  straight  line,  are  proportional  to  p^ 
q,  and  r  respectively,  the  four  points  being  in  the  same  plane. 

Let  A,  B  and  G  be  the  three  points. 

Divide  AB  in  D  so  that  AD  :  DB  :'.  p  :  q,  and  in  AB  pro- 
duced take  a  point  E  such  that 

AE ',  BE '.: p '.  q) 

upon  BE,  as  diameter,  describe  a  circle. 

Every  point  upon  this  circle  has  its  distances  from  A  and  B 
proportional  to^  and  q  respectively. 

Describe  a  similar  circle  relative  to  A  and  C. 

The  points  of  intersection  of  these  circles,  when  intersection 
is  possible,  satisfy  the  required  condition. 

2.  If  rP,  TQ  be  two  tangents  drawn  from  any  point 
T  to  touch  a  conic  in  P  and  Q^  and  if  S  and  H  be  the 
foci,  then 

SF.SQ~HF.BQ' 


64  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

The  construction  of  the  figure  being  indicated  by  the  ques- 
tion, we  have,  see  fig.  34, 

SP_  sin  STP     SQ_  sin  STQ 
ST     sin  SPT'    ST~  sin  SQT' 
SP.SQ     sin  STP.  sin  STQ 


Similarly 


•      ST'    ~  sin  SPT.  sin  SQT' 

HP.  HQ  _  sin  HTP.  sin  HTQ 
HT'     ~  sin  HPT.  sin  HQT' 


Now  these  angles  STP,  HTQ  are  known  to  be  equal ;  and 
the  angles  SPT,  HPT  axe  supplements,  and  also  the  angles 
SQT,  HQT.  Hence  the  above  two  expressions  are  equal, 
and  hence 

SP.SQHP.HQ 

ST*      -       Jljr2      . 

If  the  conic  become  a  parabola,  these  expressions  become 
each  equal  to  unity. 

iii.  A  polygon  is  inscribed  in  an  ellipse  so  that  each  side 
subtends  the  same  angle  at  one  of  the  foci.  Prove  that,  if 
the  alternate  sides  be  produced  to  meet,  their  points  of  in- 
tersection will  lie  on  a  conic  section  having  the  same  focus 
and  directrix  as  the  original  ellipse,  and  that  the  chords 
joining  the  consecutive  points  of  intersection  all  subtend  the 
same  constant  angle  at  the  focus  as  the  sides  of  the  original 
polygon. 

The  polar  equation  of  a  chord  of  an  ellipse,  the  focus  being 
the  pole  and  the  line  to  the  nearer  vertex  the  prime  radius,  is  ' 

-  =  e cos  ^  +  sec  /3 cos  (a  — 6), 
r 

2^  being  the  angle  subtended  by  the  chord  at  the  focus,  and 
a  —  fi,  a  +  fi  the  angles  corresponding  to  its  extremities. 

If  this  be  taken  as  the  equation  of  one  of  the  produced 
sides  of  the  polygon  in  question,  then  the  side  which  mtersects 
it  has  for  its  equation 

-  =  c  cos  ^  +  sec  ^  cos  {a  +  4^  —  0); 

T 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  55 

therefore  at  the  point  of  intersection 

cos  (a  -  ^)  =  cos  (a  +  4/3  -  ^), 

^  =  a  +  2/3, 
a=^-2A 

-  =  e  cos  ^  +  sec  i8  cos  2/9, 
r 

I  I  e cos  0 


sec  /3  cos  20  '  r     sec  /3  cos  2y8 

the  equation  to  a  conic  section  having  the  same  focus  as  the 
ellipse,  but  latus  rectum  and  eccentricity  each  altered  in  the 
ratio  of  1  :  sec  /8  cos  2/3. 

Hence  the  directrix  is  the  same  as  before. 

Also  since 

^  =  a  +  2/9, 

it  follows  that  the  line  joining  the  focus  with  the  point  of  in- 
tersection of  any  two  alternate  sides  bisects  the  angle  subtended 
by  the  intermediate  side,  and  therefore  the  sides  of  the  new 
polygon  each  subtend  the  angle  2/3  at  the  focus. 

This  proposition  may  be  also  solved  in  an  obvious  manner 
by  the  method  of  reciprocal  polars. 

4.  Prove  that  the  equiangular  spiral  is  the  only  curve 
such  that  its  radius  of  curvature  is  proportional  to  the  re- 
ciprocal of  the  radius  of  curvature  at  the  corresponding  point 
of  the  reciprocal  polar. 

Let  PY  be  the  tangent  to  one  curve,  QZ  the  tangent  to  the 
corresponding  point  of  the  reciprocal  polar.  See  fig.  35. 
Let  OP=r,  OY=p,  and  OQ  =  r'OZ=p'.  Then/r  =  /c», 
pr  =  /c*,  where  k  is  some  constant.  Also  if  pp  be  the  two 
radii  of  curvature  at  P,  Q, 


p  =r 


jS) 


66  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.   17, 

Hence  by  the  question  — 3-  =  constant,  but  -  =  sin  OPY ; 

therefore  the  angle  OFY=  constant,  or  the  curve  is  the  equi- 
angular spiral. 

5.  If  two  plane  sections  of  a  right  cone  be  taken,  having 
the  same  directrix,  the  foci  corresponding  to  that  directrix  lie 
on  a  straight  line  which  passes  through  the  vertex. 

Let  ABC  be  the  given  cone ;  and  a  perpendicular  through 
L  to  the  plane  of  the  paper  the  given  latus  rectum.    Fig.  36. 

Draw  L  CB  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  cone,  and  de- 
scribe a  sphere  touching  the  cone  in  B  and  C;  draw  LP,  LQ 
tangents  to  the  sphere  in  the  plane  of  the  paper,  we  know 
that  P  and  Q  are  the  foci  of  the  two  sections. 

Now  PQ  is  the  polar  line  of  L,  and  BCL  the  polar  line  of 
A.  Because  the  pole  of  PQ  lies  on  BCL  theretore  the  pole 
of  PQ,  therefore  PQ,  passes  through  A. 

vi.  Find  the  equation  of  the  envelope  of  the  perpendiculars 
to  the  successive  focal  radii  of  a  parabola  drawn  through  the 
extremities  of  these  radii. 

Refer  to  polar  co-ordinates,  the  focus  S  being  the  pole  and 
AS  the  prime  radius. 

If  ^  Q  be  a  radius  vector  to  the  parabola  perpendicular  to 
which  any  line  is  drawn,  and  if  J^  ^  be  inclined  at  the  angle..' 
<f>  to  AS,  its  length  being p,  we  have 

p  =  osec*|, 

if  0  and  r  be  the  polar  co-ordinates  of  the  point  where  the 
line  perpendicular  to  ^^  is  intersected  by  its  consecutive, 
we  have 

r  =pBec{0  —  ^)  =a  sec" ^ sec  {$  —  <f)), 

or  -  =  cos"  ^  cos  [B  —  6), 

r  2 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  57 

and       0  =  —  cos  ^  sin  ^  cos  (^  —  </>)  +  cos'  ^  sin  {6  —  <f>) 
^  sin  {0  —  <f))=  sin  ^  cos  {0  —  (f>); 
(«-3f)  =  0;    .-.^^l.e; 


=  cos  -^  sm 


sin 


^-<^  =  1^; 


the  equation  required. 


a  .6 

r  =  a  sec  - , 
o 


vii.  If  two  concentric  rectangular  hyperbolas  have  a  com- 
mon tangent,  the  lines  joining  their  points  of  intersection  to 
their  respective  points  of  contact  with  the  common  tangent 
will  subtend  equal  angles  at  their  common  centre. 

Let  0  be  the  common  centre. 

Let  OX  and  0  F  be  the  asymptotes  of  one  hyperbola, 

OX'  ...   OY' the  other. 

Let  XOX'  =  2a,  and  let  the  line  OC  which  bisects  this 
angle  be  taken  as  the  prime  radius. 

Let  r  cos  {d  —  ^)  =  b  be  the  equation  of  the  common  tan- 
gent, b  being  the  perpendicular  upon  it  from  the  centre,  and 
/S  the  angle  between  this  perpendicular  and  the  prime  radius. 

Then  if  P  and  P'  be  the  respective  points  of  contact  of  this 
tangent  with  the  hyperbolas,  it  follows  from  the  geometry  of 
the  hyperbola  that 

C0P  =  -{2a  +  fi), 

and  COP'=     (2a -yS). 

Now  the  equations  of  the  hyperbolas  are 
r*  cos  2  (^  +  a)  =  a\ 
r*  cos  2  (^  -  a)  =  a*y 


58  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

and  combining  tliese  with  r  cos  [d  —  ^)  =  b,  or  the  equation  of 
the  common  tangent,  we  obtain 

OP=^cos2(a+^)=a', 
OP'cos'2{a  +  ^)  =  b'; 

therefore  cos  2  (a  +  /S)  =  -? , 

a 

and  similarly  cos  2  (a  —  /9)  =  — , . 


a 


Also  if  0^  be  the  value  of  0  corresponding  to  Q^  the  point 
of  intersection  of  the  two  hyperbolas,  we  obtain 

cos  2  {0^  +  g)  _  cos  2  (^,  -  a) , 
a  a^ 

therefore  ^^^Ij^  =  ^,  =  52ii(^ , 

cos  2  (^,  -  a)      a/     cos  2  (a  +  /9) ' 

whence  we  obtain       tan  20^  =  —  tan  2/3), 

and  hence  P0Q  =  2ri  =  P' OQ. 

viii.  If  P  be  a  point  on  a  geodesic  line  AP,  drawn  on  a 
conoidal  surface,  s  the  length  of  AP,  or,  N,  and  0  the  projec- 
tions of  s,  P,  and  the  axis  on  any  plane  perpendicular  to  the 
axis,  and  p  the  projection  of  ON  on  the  tangent  to  AP  at  P, 
then 

dp  _d<T 

da      ds ' 

Since  the  geodesic  line  on  any  surface  satisfies  the  condition 
that  its  oscillating  plane  at  any  point  contains  the  normal  to 
the  surface  at  that  point,  we  have  for  its  differential  equations 

d'x     dz  d*z  _ 
ds^      dx  ds*       ' 

d^y     dz  d^z  _ 
'd^'^djd?~' 

d'x        dSf     d^z  (    dz        dz\      ^ 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  59 

In  a  conoidal  surface  if  the  axis  coincide  with  the  axis 
of  «, 

dz        dz 

d^x        d^y     ^ 

""^  ds'\^ds^y  ds)-\ds)  ^\ds)' 

doc       duU 
But  2;  -7-  +^  ->-  =  the  quantity  denoted  by  j^  in  the  question, 

and 

(dc^\(dy\_(d^\\ 
\ds]  "^  \ds)  ~  \dsl ' 

dp  _  fdaV 

dp      da- 
da      ds  ' 

9.  A  string  is  placed  on  a  smooth  plane  curve  under  the 
action  of  a  central  force  F,  tending  to  a  point  in  the  same 
plane ;  prove  that,  if  the  curve  be  such  that  a  particle  could 
freely  describe  it  under  the  action  of  that  force,  the  pressure 
of  the  string  on  the  curve  referred  to  a  unit  of  length  will  be 

jPsin  <^     c 

where  ^  is  the  angle  which  the  radius  vector  from  the  centre 
of  force  makes  with  the  tangent,  p  is  the  radius  of  curvature, 
and  c  is  an  arbitrary  constant. 

If  the  curve  be  an  equiangular  spiral  with  the  centre  of 
force  in  the  pole,  and  if  one  end  of  the  string  rest  freely  on 
the  spiral  at  a  distance  a  from  the  pole,  then  the  pressure  is 
equal  to 

/A sin <^  /I       1\ 


60 


SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS 


[Jan. 17, 


Let  T  be  the  tension  at  any  point,  R  the  pressure  referred 
to  a  unit  of  area,  then  by  the  ordinary  equations  for  the  equi- 
librium of  a  string 


+  F  sin  <f>  =  M; 


.'.  B  =  F8hi(f}  + 


fF  cos  <f)ds 


(1). 


Let  V  =  velocity  of  the  particle  freely  describing  the  curve, 
then 

;^=-2i?C0S«^, 


—  =  F8m6: 
P 

'    0  -  -^^^^  ^     JFcos  <^  —  c 
2  p 


(2). 


Subtracting  (2)  from  (1), 


2  p 

—  ^  normal  force  +  - . 

The  quantity  c  depends  on  the  tightness  with  which  the 
string  is  tied.     If  one  end  be  free  it  is  to  be  determined  from' 
the  condition  that  jr=0  at  that  end. 

If  the  curve  be  an  equiangular  spiral,  ^  is  constant  and 

jP=^.     Also  from  (2) 

^     F»m<t>     T-c 

therefore  when  r  —  a,  and  p  sin  <^  =  r,  we  have 
_fi  sin  <f>     c  sin  <f> 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  61 

2r       \r      or  J 

10.  If  a  string,  the  particles  of  which  repel  each  other 
with  a  force  varying  as  tne  distance,  be  in  equilibrium  when 
fastened  to  two  fixed  points,  prove  that  the  tension  at  any 
point  varies  as  the  square  root  of  the  radius  of  curvature. 

The  law  of  attraction  being  as  the  distance,  the  attraction 
of  the  whole  arc  on  any  particle  is  the  same  as  if  the  whole 
mass  was  collected  at  its  centre  of  gravity.  Take  this  point 
for  origin,  and  let  T  be  the  tension  at  any  point  whose  radius 
vector  is  r,  let  p  be  the  perpendicular  on  the  tangent  and  p 
the  radius  vector.    Then  the  equations  of  equilibrium  will  be 

dT=-tirdr,\ 

"  p'""        2   ' 
1  dr 

'''-f^-^'dp^ 

1 

'^      p 

.'.  roc  -  oc  vp. 
p 

11.  If  any  uniform  arc  of  an  equiangular  spiral  attract  a 
particle,  placed  at  the  pole  with  a  force  varying  inversely  as 
the  square  of  the  distance,  prove  that  the  resultant  attraction 
acts  along  the  line  joining  the  pole  with  the  intersection  of 
the  tangents  at  the  extremities  of  the  arc. 

Prove  also  that,  if  any  other  given  curve  possess  this  same 

property,  the  law  of  attraction  must  be  F=  ^  ->-  >  where  ^  is 

the  perpendicular  drawn  from  the  attracted  particle  on  the 
tangent  at  the  point  of  which  the  radius  vector  is  r. 

It  may  be  easily  proved,  if  a  string  be  in  equilibrium  in 
the  form  of  an  equiangular  spiral  under  the  action  of  a  force 


62  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

in  the  pole,  that  the  force  must  vary  as  -jt-- — r«.     And  the 

^  ''         (dist.) 

resultant  repulsion  of  the  centre  of  force  on  the  string,  being 
in  equilibrium  with  the  tensions  at  the  extremities,  must  pass 
through  the  intersection  of  the  tangents  at  the  extremities  of 
the  arc.  Now  let  the  arc  become  a  rigid  wire  attracting  the 
pole,  then  all  the  forces  are  unaltered,  and  therefore  their 
resultant,  just  as  before,  acts  along  the  line  joining  the  pole 
with  the  intersection  of  the  tangents  at  the  extremities  of 
the  arc. 

In  the  same  way,  if  any  other  curve  possesses  this  pro- 
perty, the  law  of  attraction  must  be  such  that  a  string  may 
rest  in  equilibrium  under  a  centre  of  force  whose  law  of 
repulsion  is  the  same.  By  writing  down  the  equations  of 
equilibrium  it  is  easily  seen  that  this  must  be  the  law 

p'  dr  ' 

xii.  A  material  particle  is  acted  on  by  a  force  the  direc- 
tion of  which  always  meets  an  infinite  straight  line  AB  at 
right  angles,  and  the  intensity  of  which  is  inversely  propor- 
tional to  the  cube  of  the  distance  of  the  particle  from  the 
line.  The  particle  is  projected  with  the  velocity  from  infinity 
from  a  point  P  at  a  distance  a  from  the  nearest  point  0  of 
the  line  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  OF^  and  inclined  at 
the  angle  a  to  the  plane  AOP.  Prove  that  the  particle  is 
always  on  the  sphere  of  which  0  is  the  centre,  that  it  meets 
every  meridian  line  through  AB  at  the  angle  a,  and  that  it 
reaches  the  line  AB  in  the  time 


V/*  cos  a ' 
fi  being  the  absolute  force. 

Suppose  first  that  the  particle  is  constrained  to  move  in 
contact  with  the  smooth  surface  of  the  sphere  mentioned  in 
the  question.  Then  if  r  be  the  distance  of  the  particle  from 
the  attracting  line  at  any  instant,  and  </>  the  azimuth  of  the 
plane  containing  r,  we  have,  by  taking  moments  round  the 
axis, 

4^=a 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  63 

Also  if  V  be  the  corresponding  velocity  of  the  particle,  we 
have 

J  r  T  T 

Since  the  velocity  is  that  from  infinity  and  therefore  C"=0, 

dt      s/fi ' 

But  r-^  is  the  resolved  part  of  the  whole  velocity  per- 
pendicular to  the  meridian.  Hence  it  follows  that  the  path 
on  the  sphere  is  always  inclined  to  the  meridian  at  an  angle 

C 
whose  sine  is  -r- ;  therefore  if  6  be  the  angular  distance  of 

the  particle  from  the  pole  of  the  attracting  line, 


dd  Ju 

a  ,-  =  —  v  cos  a  = —  cos  a 

dt  r 

dt  ar  a^  sin  6 


dd         \Jfjb .  cos  a         Va*"  •  ^^^  ^ ' 

.-.  <=  ,  "'     [\xx,ede=  ,  ^'    . 

V/A  cos  a  j  Q  V /*  cos  <* 

Also  the  normal  pressure  =  difierence  betweeu  the  force 

veh}' 
resolved  along  the  radius  and  — '— 

°  a 

=  ^8in^--^  =  0, 
r  ar 

whence  it  follows  that  the  particle  describes  the  path  men- 
tioned in  the  question. 

13.  If  a  particle  slide  along  a  smooth  curve  which  tunis 
with  uniform  angular  velocity  g>  about  a  fixed  point  0,  then 
the  velocity  of  the  particle  relatively  to  the  moving  curve 
is  given  by  the  equation 


64  SENATE-HOUSE  PBOBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

v'  =  c'  +  a>V', 

where  r  is  the  distance  of  the  particle  from  the  point  0 ;  and 
the  pressure  on  the  curve  will  be  given  by  the  formula 

—  =  — h  (op  +  2g)v, 
m      p 

where  m  is  the  mass  of  the  particle,  and  p  the  perpendicular 
from  0  on  the  tangent. 

Take  ox  oy  axes  moving  with  the  curve,  and  let  R  be 
the  reaction  at  any  point.     Then  we  have  the  equations 

d^x        „        1  d  .     o.      R  di/       1 
df  ydt^  ^ '     mds  '      I 

d'y       ,        If?,          Rdx    I 
-j^—  eery  H 7-  (war)  = . 

If  CO  be  constant,  as  given  in  the  question,  these  equations 
become 

d'x       2   ^  (R  ,  ^     \dy 


where  v=  velocity  of  the  particle  relative  to  the  curve. 

From  these  equations  we  infer  that  the  motion  relative  t^ 
the  curve  is  the  same  as  if  the  curve  was  fixed,  and  a  re- 
pulsive force  ©V  acted  from  0.     Hence,  resolving  along  the 
tangent, 

dv_    ,    dr  ^ 
ds~        ds* 

.'.  v*  =  c  +  CO  v. 

R 
Also  the  pressure  will  be  —  +  2(»t;.    Resolving  along  the 

normal,  we  get 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  65 

—  =  —  tor  sin  ©  —    — I-  2(ov    : 
p  ^      \m  /  ' 

H     V* 

.'. =  — h  ta'o  +  2a>v. 

in      p 

If  o)  be  not  constant,  the  equation  for  v  cannot  be  inte- 
grated, but  the  expression  for  E  is 

=-+(o'p  +  2(ov  +  -j-  .  V(»^-»*). 

m      p        ^  at        ^       ^  ' 

14.  A  string  is  laid  on  a  smooth  table  in  the  form  of  a 
catenary,  and  an  impulse  is  communicated  to  one  extremity 
in  the  direction  of  the  tangent,  prove  (1)  that  the  initial 
velocity  of  any  point,  resolved  parallel  to  the  directrix,  is 
proportional  to  the  inverse  square  of  the  distance  of  that 
point  from  the  directrix,  and  (2)  that  the  velocity  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  of  any  arc,  resolved  in  the  same  direction, 
is  proportionally  to  the  angle  between  the  tangents  at  ex- 
tremities of  the  arc  directly,  and  to  the  length  of  the  arc 
inversely. 

The  equation  to  determine  the  tension  at  any  point  is 

da*      p'~^' 

c'  +  s' 
or  since  in  the  catenary  p  = ,  this  becomes 

*LL ? T=0 

ds'      (c»  +  «")" 

One  integral  of  this  equation  we  know  must  be 

Hence,  according  to  rule,  assume 

substituting,  we  get 

d'u  2s    du 

d^^~^W~d8' 


()fi  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 


S 


u  =  A  tan"*  -  +  B, 


where  A  and  B  arc  arbitrary  constants.     Substituting  and 
reducing,  we  get 

T=i/{A^  +  B), 

where  <f)  is  the  angle  the  tangent  makes  with  the  directrix, 

so  that  tan  6  =  - . 
^     c 

The  velocity  resolved  in  any  direction  is  given  by 


1h 

d  ., 
■■~ds^- 

rcos<f)) 

d  I, 
~  ds\ 

r'-]=Ac 

d(f> 

ds 

Ac 
P 

Ac' 

Again,  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  any  arc  is 
the  same  as  if  all  the  forces  acted  directly  at  that  point 
parallel  to  their  original  directions.  Hence,  if  S  be  the  length 
of  any  arc,  TT'  the  tensions  at  the  extremities,  (jx}}'  the 
angles  those  tangents  make  with  the  directrix,  then  the 
required  velocity  of  the  centre  of  gravity  will  be  given  by 

S.v=  T '  cos  <f>'-T  COS  <f>, 

^CA{cf>' -<!>),  ^ 

whence  the  proposition  follows  at  once. 

XV.  A  right  circular  cone  floats  with  its  axis  horizontal 
in  a  fluid,  the  specific  gravity  of  which  is  double  that  of 
the  cone,  the  vertex  of  the  cone  being  attached  to  a  fixed 
point  in  the  surface  of  the  fluid.  Prove  that  for  stability 
of  equilibrium  the  semi-vertical  angle  of  the  cone  must  be 
less  than  60". 

If  A  be  the  area  of  the  plane  of  floatation,  h  the  length 
of  the  axis,  and  a  the  radius  of  the  base,  then  if  BO  be  the 
angle  through  which  the  cone  is  displaced  about  an  axis 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  67 

through  the  vertex,  perpendicular  to  the  vertical  plane  through 
the  centre  of  gravity  and  the  vertex ;  it  follows  from  Gul- 
dinus's  properties  that  the  moment  tending  to  turn  the  body 
in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  displacement  is  increased  by 

A^hBe.\h,    or —  Be, 

and  diminished  by 

TT  O 

( V  being  the  volume  of  fluid  displaced). 

Hence  the  test  of  stability  becomes 
a*     A* 


6  ^2  ' 

or  y  <  v3, 

tan  a  <  V3, 

a<60%- 

a  being 

the 

semi 

-vertical  angle  of  the 

cone. 

xvi.  A  ribbon  of  very  small  uniform  thickness  h  is 
coiled  up  tightly  into  a  cylindrical  form,  and  placed  with  its 
curved  surface  in  contact  with  a  perfectly  rough  plane  in- 
clined to  the  horizon  at  an  angle  a,  the  axis  of  the  cylinder 
being  parallel  to  the  intersection  of  the  plane  with  the 
horizon.     Prove  that  the  time  in  which  the  whole  will  be 

unrolled  is  very  approximately  —  ./(—r-^: — j  ,  where  d  is 

the  diameter  of  the  original  coil. 

We  shall  consider  the  section  of  the  coiled  up  portion  of 
ribbon  made  by  the  plane  of  motion  as  circular,  and  neglect 
the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gravity  perpendicular  to  the  in- 
clined plane.  The  velocity  given  by  these  assumptions  at 
any  instant  is  less  than  the  true  velocity,  and  the  time  thus 
arrived  at  for  the  uncoiling  of  the  whole  is  greater  than  the 
true  time,  but  the  error  is  evanescent  except  when  a  finite 
number  of  revolutions  remain  to  be  made,  and  the  time  of 

F2 


6S  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

unrolling  will  therefore  be  very  nearly  that  arrived  at  on 
these  assumptions,  and  cannot  be  greater  than  such  time. 

Let  r  be  the  radius  of  the  coil  at  the  time  <,  6  being  the 
angle  remaining  to  be  gone  through  ; 


3  ^d'B 

Now 

.      ^     B- 

d^B         47r^sina    1 
"   de~          3A       'B' 

fdB\^     Sttq  sin  a ,      /o 

0  being 

the  initial  value  of  B. 

Let  log  Qj  =  a^; 


d0\       .92  -2s2  fdx\ 


e-^. 


*  '  dx        V  \27r^  sin  a/ 

V  V27r^  sm  a/  j  o 

=  «V7r     //       3A      \ 
2  V  V27r<7  sin  a/  * 


But  f  =  ^a; 

2      27r    ' 


4  V  \5'^  s"^  ^ 


9—12.]  AND  KIDERS.  69 

17.  If  three  beads,  the  masses  of  which  are  tw,  m,  w", 
slide  along  the  sides  of  a  smooth  triangle  ABC,  and  attract 
each  other  with  forces  which  vary  as  the  distance,  find  the 
position  of  equilibrium.  Prove  also  that,  if  they  be  slightly 
disturbed,  the  displacement  of  each  will  be  given  by  a  series 
of  three  terms  of  the  form 

isin  (w^  +  X), 

where  L  and  \  are  arbitrary  constants,  and  the  values  of  n 
are  the  three  positive  roots  of  the  equation 

(n»-a)  (n'-/8)  (w''-7)-cosMwW(n'-a)  -cos«5w"w(n'-/3) 

—  cos'  Cmm  (w*  —  7)  —  2  cos  A  cos  B  cos  CvmCm  —  0, 

where  a,  /9,  7  represent 

m"  +  m',     m  +  w",     in  +  ?n, 

respectively. 

Let  ABC  be  the  triangle,  BEF  the  positions  of  the  three 
particles.  It  is  obvious  that  when  they  are  in  equilibrium, 
the  perpendiculars  to  the  three  sides  of  the  triangle  at  DEF, 
must  meet  in  the  centre  of  gravity  G  of  the  three  masses. 
Let  a,  /3,  7  be  the  perpendicular  distances  of  G  from  the 
three  sides.  Then  taking  moments  about  the  perpendicular 
a,  we  have 

7n'/3  sin  C  =  w"7  sin  B\ 

w'/8  _  w"7  _  ma 
' '     h         c         a  ' 

Thus  the  ratios  of  a,  /S,  7  are  found.     Draw  BG  bo  that 

sin^^G^     ,  X-    7      1  1        ^^      xT.  ^sin^C^     13 

-. — 7TW^=  known  ratio  -  and  draw  CG  so  that  -: — ttttt^  =  -  , 
sm  CBG  a  sm  BOG     a 

their  intersection  G  is  the  required  centre  of  gravity.  By 
drawing  the  three  perpendiculars  GD^  GE,  GFy  the  positions 
of  m,  ni,  m"  are  determined. 

To  find  the  time  of  a  small  oscillation. 


70  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

Let  05,  y,  2  be  the  displacements  of  m,  m,  m"  from  their 
positions  of  rest.  The  attraction  of  m  on  a  unit  of  mass  of 
m,  is  equivalent  to  m  ED  which  is  equivalent  to  m'E'  C  along 
E'  C,  and  m  CD'  along  CD' ,  where  E'  and  D'  are  supposed  to  be 
the  positions  of  mm  at  the  moment  under  consideration. 
Thus  the  whole  attraction  of  m'  on  a  unit  of  mass  of  m  when 
resolved  along  BG  is 

m'{CD-x)+m'  {EC- y)  cos  (7. 

By  treating  m"  in  the  same  way  we  get  the  equation 

d  X 

-7-;  +  (w'  +  m")  X  +  m'y  cos  C+m"z  cos  B  =  terms  independent 

o(x,y,z. 

d*x 
But  when  a;,  y,  z  all  vanish,  -p  =  0,  therefore  the  right- 
hand  side  of  this  equation  is  zero. 

We  have  also  the  similar  equations 

-A  +  (m"  +  m)y-\- m"z cos  A  +  mxcoa  C=Of 

d'z 

-j-a  +  {ni  +  m')  z  +  mx  cos  B  +  m'y  cos  ^  =  0. 

To  solve  these,  put  x  =  Levant,  y  =  Ms,\rint,  z  =  Nsm.nty 
and  we  get  -'' 

{m'  +  m"  -n^)L+  m'  cos  C .  M+  m"  cos  B.N=0, 

and  two  other  similar  equations.  Whence  by  cross-multi- 
plication the  ratios  of  L,  M,  N  are  found  to  be  as  the  three 
quantities 

mm"  cos  A  cos  C — m"  cos  B (m"  +  w  —  w*), 

m"m  cos  B  cos  C—  m"  gosA  {m  +  m"  —  n*), 

{m  +  m"  —  n')  (m"  +  »i  —  n*)  —  »i'»i  cos*  C. 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  71 

Substituting  in  the  last  equation  we  get 

(„«  _ a)  {n'  -  /8)  (7i'  - 7)  - cosM mm"  {n* - o) 

—  cos'  B  m'm  (n'  —  yS) 

—  cos* (7 w w'  (n*  —  7)  —  2 cos  A  cos B cos  G m m'm'  =  0, 

where  a,  yS,  7  stand  for  m'  +  m",  m"  +  m,  m  +  m'  respectively. 

xviii.  The  bore  of  a  gun-barrel  is  formed  by  the  motion 
of  an  ellipse  of  which  the  centre  is  in  the  axis  of  the  barrel, 
and  the  plane  is  perpendicular  to  that  axis,  the  centre  moving 
along  the  axis,  and  the  ellipse  revolving  in  its  own  plane 
with  an  angular  velocity  always  bearing  the  same  ratio  to 
the  linear  velocity  of  its  centre.  A  spheroidal  ball  fitting 
the  barrel  is  fired  from  the  gun.  If  V  be  the  velocity  with 
which  the  ball  would  have  emerged  from  the  barrel  had  there 
been  no  twist ;  prove  that  the  velocity  of  rotation  with  which 

it  actually  emerges  in  the  case  supposed  is  -j-p —     ,  g.^.  , 

the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  ellipse  corresponding  to  the 
whole  length  I  of  the  barrel  being  n,  and  k  being  the  radius  of 
gyration  of  the  ball  about  the  axis  coinciding  with  the  axis 
of  the  barrel,  and  the  gun  being  supposed  to  be  immovable. 

The  ball  passes  along  the  barrel  under  the  action  of  a  force 
which  is  a  function  of  the  distance  from  the  breech.  If  then 
we  assume  that  there  is  no  friction  between  the  ball  and  the 
barrel,  the  vis  viva  must  be  the  same  whether  or  not  there 
be  a  twist.  If  therefore  to  and  v  be  the  velocities  of  rotation 
and  translation  at  emergence  in  the  case  supposed,  and  V  the 
velocity  with  no  twist,  we  have 

_,  CO      27m  I 

But  ~  =  -i—>       •*•*'=  7; — ^l 


•■•"'(*'+iJ^)  =  '"> 


2TrnV 
^{I'  +  ^Tt'ii'k*)' 


72  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

xix.  An  elastic  ring  of  length  I,  mass  m,  and  elasticity  E 
is  placed  over  the  vertex  of  a  smooth  cone,  the  semi-vertical 
angle  of  which  is  a,  and  stretched  upon  it  to  any  size.  Sup- 
posing it  then  set  free,  prove  that  the  time  before  it  leaves 
the  cone  is 

1      //ml\ 

the  action  of  gravity  being  neglected. 

Let  A  be  the  vertex  of  the  cone,  0  the  centre  of  the  ring 
at  any  instant ;  let  AO  =  x,  and  a  be  the  value  of  x  when 
the  string  is  unstretched.     Fig.  37. 

Then  an  element  of  the  ring  whose  unstretched  length  is 

T 

ds  and  stretched  length  da.  is  acted  on  by  a  force  -— .  da 

*'  "^  a:  tan  a 

along  OP,  and  a  force  Rda  along  the  normal  to  the  cone. 

cc  ^"  a 

Now  T=E. ,  therefore  if  a  be  the  mass  of  a  unit  of 

a 

length  of  the  unstretched  string,  we  have,  resolving  along 

and  perpendicular  to  AP, 

H^^j^i — ~)  = 1 .d<T.Bma (1), 

'^     dr  Vcos  a/         x  tan  a  ^ 

Bd<r= — .cosa (2): 

X  tan  a 

d'x        E  x—a    d<T        .  > 

/.  -j^  = . .-7-.  cos' a. 

dr         fi      ax       as 

But  by  similar  figures  -j-  =  -t 

d^x  .  Ecoa*af         v     ^ 

therefore  time  before  the  ring  regains  its  natural  length  is 

_ !!"     /[    ^'    ^ 
~2VUcos»a; 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  73 

_1      /ffiA'n^a*\ 
"2VV   ^   ) 


cosec  a 


cosec  a 


=V(^0 


cosec  a ; 


and  it  appears  from  equation  (2)  that  B  =  0  when  T=  0,  that 
is,  when  x  =  a  or  the  string  has  regained  its  natural  length. 

Therefore  the  ring  leaves  the  cone  in  the  time 


wc 


„ ,  cosec  a. 


(    74    ) 


Tuesday,  Jan.  17.    \\  to  4. 


Seniob  Examutbb.     Arabic  numbers. 
Junior  Exauinbb.     Eoman  numbers. 

2.  If  jpg-  be  the  image  of  PQ^  placed  perpendicular  to  the 
axis  QCq^  of  a  lens  or  mirror  CB,,  QBq  the  course  of  a  ray 
from  Q  to  q,  shew  that  PQ  -.  pqv.  RqC  :  RQC. 

Hence  prove  that,  with  all  combinations  of  lenses  for  eye- 
pieces, the  magnifying  power  of  a  telescope,  arranged  for 
parallel  or  diverging  emergent  pencils,  is  the  ratio  of  the 
diameter  of  the  object-glass  or  mirror  to  that  of  its  image 
formed  on  emergence  from  the  eye-piece. 

If  a  be  the  breadth  of  the  object-glass  or  mirror, 

a^  that  of  its  first  image, 

flj,  ttg ...  a^j  those  of  the  2nd  ...  n—i\    images, 

h  those  of  the  last, 

e  the  angle  made  with  the  axis  by  the  axis  of  a  pencil 
incident  centrically  on  the  object-glass  or  mirror, 

Vii  Vi"-Vn  t^iG  angles  made  by  the  axis  after  refraction 
or  reflection  at  the  successive  lenses  or  mirrors,  we  have,  by 
the  proposition, 

^  =  1« 


1^4.]  SENATE-HOUSE  PEOBLEMS  AND  EIDERS.  75 

g«-t_   Vn_.  * 

.*.  Y^  =  —  =  magnifying  power. 

5.  Prove  that  the  locus  of  a  point,  through  which  one  of 
the  principal  axes  is  in  a  given  direction,  is  a  rectangular 
hyperbola  in  the  plane  of  which  the  centre  of  gravity  lies,  and 
of  which  one  of  the  asymptotes  is  in  the  given  direction ; 
tmless  the  given  direction  be  that  of  one  of  the  principal  axes 
through  the  centre  of  gravity. 

Let  the  origin  be  the  centre  of  gravity  and  the  axis  of  x 
the  given  direction. 

(f ,  7],  ^)  any  position  of  the  point  P, 

{x,  y,  z)  that  of  any  particle. 

Since  the  line  parallel  to  Ox  through  P  is  a  principal  axis, 

tm  {x  -  ^)  (i/ -  rj)  =  0, 

and  Xm  {x  —  ^){z—^=0; 

and  since     2  {mx)  =  0,  %  {my)  =  0,  and  S  [mz)  =  0, 

^_t{'nucy) 

yy_%{'mXZ) 

If  the  given  direction  be  that  of  one  of  the  principal  axes 
through  the  centre  of  gravity,  the  point  P  lies  in  the  plane 
of  yz  or  in  Ox. 

In  other  cases  the  locus  is  a  rectangular  hyperbola,  one  of 
whose  asymptotes  is  in  the  given  direction,  and  the  plane  of 
which  has  for  its  equation 

V     ^     K     ^ 

X[mxy)      %  {mxz) ' 


(     76    ) 


Wednesday,  Jan.  18.    9  to  12. 


Skniob  Modebatob. 

1.  A  PARABOLA  touches  one  side  of  a  triangle  in  its 
middle  point  and  the  other  two  sides  produced.  Prove  that 
the  perpendiculars  drawn  from  the  angles  of  the  triangle  upon 
any  tangent  to  the  parabola  are  in  harmonical  progression. 

Let  ABC  (see  fig.  38)  be  the  triangle,  and  DFE  the  para- 
bola touching  the  side  BC  in  its  middle  point  F,  and  the 
other  two  sides  produced  in  B  and  E  respectively. 

Then  it  follows  from  the  geometry  of  the  parabola  that  AD 
and  AE  are  bisected  in  B  and  C. 

Hence  if  the  sides  of  the  triangle  opposite  B  and  C  be  5 
and  c  respectively,  the  equation  to  the  parabola  referred  to 
AE  and  AB  as  axes  is 

^/(^^^/(l)  =  ■. 

and  the  equation  to  the  tangent  at  any  point  x  y  is 

The  perpendiculars  upon  this  tangent  from  the  points  A^ 
B,  C,  the  co-ordinates  of  which  are  0,0,  0,c  and  6,0  respec- 
tively, are  therefore  proportional  to 


'■iV(^)'  ^V(^)' 


9—12.]  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.  77 

and  2  2  2  W  jhif')  -  ^  (ex')] 

/cxY      nhy\         -    ^{by')->sj{cx')       ^' 

i-v^y;  vUv 

whence  the  proposition  is  proved. 

There  is  another  method  of  proving  this  proposition. 

By  tangential  co-ordinates  if  a^y  be  the  perpendicular  from 
ABC  upon  the  tangent  to  an  inscribed  conic  section,  then 

I     m     n     ^ 

Z,  m,  and  n  being  any  constants,  and  the  condition  that  this 
conic  be  a  parabola  is  l-\-in  +  n  =  0.  (Salmon,  Higher  Plane 
Curves,  p.  8,  Art.  7.) 

If  then  ?=m  =  l,  and  n  =  — 2  we  shall  have  an  inscribed 
parabola,  and  since  in  this  case 

1      12 

the  perpendiculars  from  the  angles  upon  any  tangent  are  in 
harmonical  progression.  Also  the  form  of  the  tangential 
equation  shews  that  the  parabola  bisects  one  side  internally 
and  the  other  two  sides  externally  in  its  points  of  contact  witn 
these  sides. 

2.  Find  the  length  of  the  longest  straight  line  which  can 
be  drawn  in  the  interval  between  two  similar,  similarly 
situated  and  concentric  ellipsoids ;  and,  if  a  line  shorter  than 
the  line  so  determined  be  moved  about  in  the  interval,  prove 
that  its  point  of  contact  with  the  interior  ellipsoid  can  never 
lie  within  the  cone  represented  by  the  equation 

*'  y*  1  *'  _  A 

a'[a*(\-m^-7^]  '*'  h'[V{l-m^-r']  ^  c'[c\l-",n*)-i*]  "  "' 


78  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

a,  b,  c  being  the  semi-axes  of  the  outer  ellipsoid,  m  the  ratio 
of  the  linear  magnitudes  of  the  inner  and  outer  ellipsoid,  and 
2r  the  length  of  the  line  in  question,  which  is  assumed  greater 
than  26  V(l -»»*). 

What  is  the  meaning  of  the  boundary  so  determined  when 
2r  is  less  than  2b  \/(l  —  fn^)  aud  greater  than  20^(1  —  "0  ^ 

The  longest  line  must  be  a  tangent  to  the  inner  ellipsoid. 

Let  any  tangent  be  drawn  to  this  ellipsoid,  and  let  r  be  the 
parallel  central  radius  of  the  outer  ellipsoid,  and  let  a  diameter 
of  length  2a'  be  drawn  to  the  outer  ellipsoid  passing  through 
the  point  of  contact  of  the  line  in  question.  The  segments  of 
this  diameter  made  by  the  point  of  contact  are  a  (1  —  m)  and 
a  (1  +  w),  and  therefore  if  x  be  the  semi- length  of  the  touch- 
ing line 

a;'  =  -^  a'  (1  -  w)  a'  (1  +  w)  =  r'  ( 1  -  wi») ; 

therefore  any  tangent  to  the  inner  ellipsoid  =  2r  ^f  {I  —  m') ^ 
where  r  is  the  parallel  central  radius  to  the  outer  ellipsoid, 
and  therefore  the  longest  tangent  or  the  line  sought 

=  2aV(l-m'). 

Again,  if  a  central  section  be  made  of  the  outer  ellipsoid 
by  a  plane  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal  to  which  are 
/,  m,  n,  the  equation  for  determining  the  semi-axes  of  this  sec- 
tion is 

_ra'  m'b'         nV   _^  ,. 

a«_p«+^,«_p«  +  ?3^«-^ ^^^      - 

p  being  one  of  these  semi-axes,  if  then  we  take  p  such  that 

r  =  />V(l-w'), 

with  the  restriction  p  >  b,  we  shall  determine  the  limiting  re- 
lation between  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal  to  a  plane 
touching  the  inner  ellipsoid  consistent  with  the  major  axes  of 
the  section  of  the  outer  ellipsoid  made  by  this  plane  not  being 
less  than  2r,  and  therefore  the  cone  formed  by  lines  drawn  to 
the  points  of  contact  of  such  planes  will  form  a  boundaiy 
within  which  no  point  of  contact  can  be  situated. 


9-12.] 

AND   RIDERS. 

If  X,  y,  z 

be  a  point  on  such 

a  cone 

X 

y  _ 

..(2), 

eliminating 

between  (2) 

and 

9 

(1),  and 

remembering 

that 

''"l-m"' 
we  obtain 

a»  [a*  (1  -  m')  -r^\^  b^  [V  (1  -  m^)  -  r«} 

If  2r  be  <  2b  V(l  —  w')  and  >  2c  \/(l  —  wi*)>  the  cone  de- 
termines a  boundary  within  which  if  the  point  of  contact  be 
situated  the  line  cannot  reach  the  outer  ellipsoid  in  both 
extremities,  for  within  this  cone  the  minor  axes  of  the  sections 
made  by  planes  of  contact  will  be  less  than  2r. 

3.  If,  in  a  rigid  body  moving  in  any  manner  about  a 
fixed  point,  a  series  of  points  be  taken  along  any  straight 
line  in  the  body,  and  through  these  points  straight  lines  be 
drawn  in  the  direction  of  the  instantaneous  motion  of  the 
points,  prove  that  the  locus  of  these  straight  lines  is  an  hy- 
perbolic paraboloid. 

Let  AB\)&  the  line  along  which  the  points  are  taken  at  any 
instant,  and  let  A'B'  be  consecutive  positions  of  the  line  AB 
after  a  very  small  interval  of  time  dt. 

Since  the  lines  the  locus  of  which  is  required  are  drawn 
through  the  several  points  of  AB  in  the  direction  of  the 
respective  instantaneous  motions  of  these  points,  each  line 
must  in  the  limit  pass  through  A'B'  as  A'B'  is  brought  indefi- 
nitely near  to  AB.  Each  line  also  must  be  parallel  to  the 
plane  to  which  the  instantaneous  axis  is  perpendicular. 

The  locus  in  question  is  therefore  that  traced  out  by  a  line 
moving  so  as  to  be  always  parallel  to  a  fixed  plane  and 
always  to  pass  through  two  straight  lines. 

This  locus  is  the  hyperbolic  paraboloid. 


80  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

4.  If/(x,  y,  z)  =0  be  the  equation  to  a  surface,  and  r  be 
a  straight  line  drawn  through  the  point  x,  y,  z  of  which  the 
magnitude  and  direction  are  any  given  functions  of  oj,  y,  z, 
state  what  is  the  relation  between  the  original  surface  and 

that  whose  equation  is  n  '^''/{x,  y,  z)  =  0,  supposing  that  in 
the  latter  equation  x,  y,  and  z  have  been  expressed  in  terms 
of  r  and  any  two  other  variables  independent  of  r,  and  that 
n  is  a  given  numerical  quantity,  and  prove  that  if  the  two 
surfaces  coincide  for  all  values  of  w,  the  line  r  must  lie 
altogether  in  either  of  them. 

Apply  this  to  find  the  partial  differential  equations  of 
conical  and  conoidal  surfaces  respectively  when  referred  to 
any  system  of  rectangular  axes. 

£ 

Generally  the  operation  a  ^f{x)  is  equivalent  to  writing 
ax  for  X  in  f{x).  See  Carmichael's  Calc.  Op.  ch.  in.  sec.  1. 
If  then  mf{x,  y,  z)  we  replace  the  variables  x,  y,  z  by  three 
others,  r,  s  and  <,  and  then  perform  the  operation 

n'-fir,  s,  t), 
this  is  equivalent  to  writing  nr  for  r  in  the  expression 

f{r,  8,  t). 
Hence  the  surface  determined  by  the  equation 

is  such  that  any  line  drawn  according  to  the  same  law 
as  (r)  is  drawn  in  the  surface 

f{r,  s,  t)  =  0, 

is  n  times  as  large  as  in  this  latter  surface. 

If  these  two  surfaces  be  identical  for  all  values  of  n,  it 
would  clearly  follow  that  the  line  drawn  according  to  this 
law  must  lie  in  either  of  them,  since  by  keeping  s  and  t 
constant,  but  varying  r  in  any  manner,  we  still  remain  on 
either  surface. 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  81 

If  a,  P,  7  be  the  co-ordinates  of  the  vertex  of  a  conical 
surface,  and  r  the  length  of  the  generating  line  to  any  point 
X,  y,  z  on  the  cone,  we  have 

and  since  by  what  has  just  been  proved,  if /(a;,  y,  a)  =0  be 
the  equation  to  a  conical  surface,  this  is  identical  with  the 
surface 

«''V(^,y,2)=0 
for  all  values  of  (n),  it  follows  that 

Bat  r|=(.-„)|^  +  (y-y3)^  +  (.-7)|. 

Hence  by  substitution  we  get  the  partial  differential  equa- 
tions of  conical  surfaces,  or 

(«-<.)|+(y-«f+(-7)f  =  0. 

Again,  in  conoidal  surfaces.  If  a,  /9,  7  be  any  point  on  the 
axis,  /,  7n,  n  the  direction-cosines  of  the  axis,  and  r  the  length 
of  the  portion  of  a  generating  line  drawn  from  the  point 
x,y,z  to  the  axis ;  then 

-{l{x-a.)  +  m{i/-^)+n{z-y) }'; 
and  since  by  reasoning  similar  to  the  above 

'•^(«>y»2!)=0, 
and 

'•;^=  [(^-a)  -l[l{x-a)  +  m  {y -^) +n{z-y)]]j^ 

+  [(!/- ^-m{l{x-a)  +  m{y-fi)  +  n{z-y)}]-^ 

+  [{^-y)-n[l{x-a)+m{y-fi)+n{z-y)]]-^, 


82  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

we  get,  putting  p  for  I  {x —a) +  m  {1/ —  ^)  +  n  (z  —  7), 

5.  From  a  flexible  envelope  in  the  form  of  an  oblate 
spheroid,  of  which  the  eccentricity  of  the  generating  ellipse 
is  e,  the  part  between  two  meridians,  the  planes  of  which  are 
inclined  to  each  other  at  the  angle  27r  (1  —  e),  is  cut  away 
and  the  edges  are  then  sewed  together;  prove  that  the 
meridian  curve  of  the  new  envelope  will  be  the  curve  of 
sines. 

Let  B0  be  the  angle  between  two  consecutive  meridians 
in  the  original  envelope.  Let  1/  be  the  distance  of  any 
point  P  in  one  of  these  meridians  from  the  axis  of  revolution, 
and  8  the  arc  measured  up  to  P  from  some  fixed  j)oint  on 
this  meridian. 

In  the  new  envelope  it  is  clear  that  if  B6'  be  the  new 

value  of  Bd,  then  BO'  =  —  .     Hence  if  y'  be  the  new  value 

of  y,  1/'  =  ey  and  s  is  unaltered.  When  these  conditions  are 
satisfied  the  element  at  P  has  the  same  value  in  both  en- 
velopes, since 

et/  .  —  ds-=y  dO  ds, 

and  the  old  envelope  may  be  developed  into  the  new  en- 
velope. 

Now  in  the  meridian  curve  of  the  oblate  spheroid 


\dy) 


<dyJ        b'-f 

ds^  _  y-cV 

Hence,  putting  ey  for  ?/,  we  have  in  the  new  meridian 
curve 


U)  ~ 


^y)  -t'b*-f 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  83 

and  therefore  ^_j  =_,^_-,  ; 

.'.  x  =  b  V(l  —  e^)  sin"*  -^  , 

which  proves  the  proposition. 

6.  If  an  uniform  inextensihle  and  fle^cible  string  be 
stretched  over  a  smooth  surface  of  revolution,  prove  that 
the  following  equations  hold : 


l(^4:)+'^'-=<'' ■■('). 


where  ds  is  the  element  of  the  string  at  any  point,  dx 
and  di/  are  coiTesponding  elements  of  the  arc  of  the  circle 
tln-Qugh  that  point  perpendicular  to  the  meridian,  and  of  the 
meridian  respectively,  X  and  Y  are  the  resolved  parts  of  the 
impressed  forces  along  these  directions,  and  r  is  the  distance 
from  the  axis,  the  mass  of  an  unit  of  length  of  the  string 
being  taken  as  unity.  Hence  prove  that,  if  such  a  string 
be  acted  upon  by  a  force  at  all  points  perpendicular  to  the 
axis  of  revolution,  and  inversely  proportional  to  the  square 
of  the  distance  from  that  axis,  the  string  will,  if  properly 
sus^jended,  cut  every  meridian  in  the  same  angle. 

In  the  figure  (fig.  39),  let  PQ  be  an  element  ds  of  tlie 
string,  PN  and  MQ  being  the  elements  dx  and  dy. 

Draw  tangents  PT  and  QT  to  the  meridians  AP  and  AQ, 
meeting  the  axis  produced  in  0,  and  let  a  be  the  elementary 
angle  between  them. 

Resolve  the  forces  acting  upon  the  element  PQ  of  the 
string  in  the  directions  PN  and  PO,  by  whicli  means  the 
reaction  of  the  smooth  surface  does  not  enter  into  the  equa- 
tions of  equilibrium. 

02 


84  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

The  resolved  part  of  the  tension  at  P  in  direction  NP  is 

T  ^  and  in  direction  OP  is  T^. 
as  as 

The  resolved  part  of  the  tension  at  Q  in  direction  PN  is 

as  \      as  J  as 

and  in  direction  PO  it  is 

also  the  resolved  part  of  the  impressed  force  on  the  element 
PQ  in  direction  PN=  Xds,  in  direction  PO  it  is  Yds. 

II»-  l(^l)-.T^I  +  ^  =  « (•)■ 

i(T^)  +  ^-_T'^.+  Y=0 (2). 


ds  \     dsj      ds     ds 

,  dx         dx 

also  „=_  = 

-••i 

Substituting,  we  obtain 


ds  \     ds)      r  \dsj  dy 
whence,  since 

\ds)~^     \ds 
we  obtain 


T 


T 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  85 

IKf)-^S+^^=« (^). 

with  the  law  of  force  assumed  in  the  latter  part  of  the  ques- 
tion 

d^c  dti 

multiplying  (1)  by  ^  j  (2)  l>7  ^ ,  and  adding,  we  get 

as      r    as  r 

If  the  string  be  so  suspended  that  (7=0, 

r=^,     or  Tr=:fjL; 


dec 
and  therefore  from  equation  (1)  ~r-  =  constant,   proving  the 

proposition  in  the  question.      N.B.    Equation  (1)  might  be 
lound  at  once  by  taking  moments  about  the  axis. 

7.  A  string  is  wound  round  a  vertical  cylinder  of  radius 
a  in  the  form  of  a  given  helix,  the  inclination  to  the  horizon 
being  i.  The  upper  end  is  attached  to  a  fixed  point  in  the 
cylinder,  and  the  lower,  a  portion  of  the  string  of  length 
I  sec  «  having  been  unwound,  has  a  material  particle  attached 
to  it  which  is  also  in  contact  with  a  rough  horizontal  plane, 
the  coefficient  of  friction  being  fi.  Supposing  a  liorizontal 
velocity  V  perpendicular  to  the  free  portion  of  the  string 
to  be  applied  to  the  particle  so  as  to  tend  to  wind  the 
string  on  the  cylinder,  determine  the  motion ;  and  prove  that 
the  particle  will  leave  the  plane  after  the  projection  of  the 
unwound  portion  of  string  upon  the  plane  haa  described  the 
angle  of  which  the  circular  measure  is 


log 


ga 


2fi tan  t     °  2fjiV*  tan* t  —  2fiffl  tan  t+ga' 


86  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

In  this  case,  fig.  40,  the  string  coiled  round  the  cylinder 
remains  the  same  helix  throughout  the  motion,  and  the 
particle  in  contact  with  the  horizontal  plane  describes  the 
involute  of  the  circular  base. 

Let  PQ  be  the  projection  of  the  unwrapped  string  at  any- 
time t,  P  being  the  particle  of  mass  unity,  suppose.  Let 
6  be  the  angle  through  which  PQ  has  removed  from  the 
commencement  of  motion,  and  let  v  be  the  velocity  of  P, 
the  tension  of  the  string  being  T  and  pressure  on  the  plane  E. 

Resolving  vertically, 

E=g—  T sin  i; 

horizontally  and  tangentially, 

horizontally  and  normally, 

-  =  Tcoat\  PQ  =  p; 

dv  tiv' , 

.*.  V  -7-=  —  aq  +  - — tan  i, 
as  "^       p 

dv         v^  ^      . 
•  or  v-j —  ft  —  tan  i  =  —  fj^. 

But  p  =  l-a0,  and  ds=  {I  —  aO)  dO ; 

ti       dv  "v^     ^      ' 


••  l-ad'dd     ^l-ad 

.'.  -j^  —  2/jb  tan i.v^  =  —  2fiff  il—ad) ; 
ad 

tan  t         2fi  tsur  i 

7«  =  (7  +  -^  "^ 

tan  I     2/i.tau't* 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  87 

when  the  particle  leaves  the  plane 

g{l-ae) 


V  = 


g^tan  i-9  _-  _ 


tani 
1         ^9      _      ^        L 


(7-2^tan^-     2/.tanS--  y^-gUoU+'^S.  ^oi^i 


e  =  —^—..\oi 


ag 


2/i  tan  i '     °  2fj,  tan''  *  F'"*  —  2figl  tan  i  +  ag  * 

8.  A  particle  is  acted  on  by  two  centres  of  force  residing 
in  the  same  point,  one  attractive,  the  other  repulsive,  and 
varying  inversely  as  the  square  and  cube  of  the  distance 
respectively.  Two  consecutive  equal  apsidal  distances  are 
drawn  and  the  portion  of  the  plane  of  motion  included  be- 
tween them  is  rolled  into  a  right  circular  cone.  Prove  that 
the  trajectory  described  under  the  circumstances  mentioned 
above  becomes  a  plane  curve  on  the  surface  of  the  cone,  and 
that  it  will  be  an  ellipse,  parabola,  or  hyperbola,  according 
as  the  velocity  in  the  trajectory  was  less  than,  equal  to,  or 
greater  than  that  from  infinity. 

The  diflferential  equation  of  the  trajectory  on  the  plane  is 

^  +  u(l+-%]  =  ^, (1), 


hV    h' 

fi  and  /x'  being  the  absolute  intensities  of  the  attractive  and 
repulsive  forces  respectively. 

Its  polar  equation  is  therefore 

u  =  ;^,  +  Aco3{ne  +  B)  (2). 

Ifn'=l  +  ^;, 

The  angle  between  two  consecutive  equal  apsidal  distances 

27J- 

is  —  ,  and  therefore  the  equation  to  the  projection  of  the 

trajectory  on  the  cone  made  on  the  plane  perpendicular  to  the 
cone's  axis  is 

n     nh 


8$  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

or  w  =  -^  +  nA  cos  {(f>  +  B); 

since  «=co8ec  a  where  a  is  the  semi- vertical  angle  of  the 
cone,  and  therefore  the  cosine  of  the  angle  between  each  gene- 
rating line  and  the  base  of  the  cone  is  -  . 
°  n 

This  being  the  equation  to  a  conic  section  it  follows  that  the 
trajectory  on  the  cone  must  be  a  plane  curve,  since  none  but 
a  plane  curve  on  the  surface  of  tlie  cone  can  be  projected  into 
a  conic  section  on  the  plane  perpendicular  to  the  axis.  Also 
the  projection,  and  therefore  the  original  curve,  is  an  ellipse, 
parabola,  or  hyperbola,  according  as 


Now  by  (1) 
and  by  (2) 


nh 


v'=h'\  (^^y  +  u'\  =  2fiu  -  fi'u'  +  C, 


=  AV  +  w*AM»sin«(«^  +  j5) 

=  n'h'A^  -  (n'  -  1)  h'u'  -h  2fiu  -  4r, 
^  n  n 

=  wViM'  -  fi'u'  +  2fiu  -  ^, . 

Equating  these  values  of  v',  we  obtain 

It,  h'A Tr%  =  ^» 

n  h 


Hence  A*  <  =  >  -^  ,  according  as 

n  n 

(7<  =  >0, 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  89 

or  according  as  the  velocity  in  the  original  trajectory  was  less 
than,  equal  to,  or  greater  than  that  from  infinity. 

9.  A  particle  is  describing  an  orbit  round  a  centre  of 
force  which  is  any  function  of  the  distance,  and  is  acted  upon 
by  a  disturbing  force  which  is  always  perpendicular  to  the 
plane  of  the  instantaneous  orbit  and  inversely  proportional 
to  the  distance  of  the  body  from  the  original  centre  of  force. 
Prove  that  the  plane  of  the  instantaneous  orbit  revolves  uni- 
formly round  its  instantaneous  axis. 

Refer  the  motion  of  the  particle  to  the  following  three 
moveable  axes,  viz : 

The  radius  vector  to  the  particle. 

The  tangent  to  the  particle's  path, 

and  The  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  instantaneous 

orbit. 

Let  dd  be  the  elementary  angle  described  by  the  radius 
vector  in  the  plane  of  the  orbit  in  the  time  dt,  and  let  d<^  be 
the  elementary  angle  through  which  the  normal  to  the  instan- 
taneous plane  has  revolved  in  the  same  time. 

The  velocities  in  the  above  three  directions  are  respectively 

du  dd 

di'     ''It'       ' 

dr  . 
also  in  the  time  dt,  the  direction  in  which  —  is  measured  haa 

dO 
moved  towards  the  direction  in  which  r  -y-  is  measured  through 

the  angle  ~r-  dt ,  and  the  direction  in  which  r  -7-  is  measured 
°     at  at 

dr  . 
has  moved  from  the  direction  in  which  -.    is  measured  through 

the  same  angle  and  towards  the  normal  to  the  instantaneous 

plane  through  the  angle  ~^dt , 


90  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jon.  18, 

If  then  F  be  the  central  force  and  N  the  disturbing  force, 


^_     fde 
de     ^ 


m-- «. 


i4(4^'' (^). 

'f-f=^ (^)- 

But  iVr=  ^  ,  and  from  (2)  r»  ^  =  A ; 
r  '  ^  '      dt        '  . 

.'.  -^  =  T-  is  constant. 

10.  A  die  in  the  form  of  a  parallelopiped  the  edges  of 
which  are  2a,  2J,  and  2c,  is  loaded  in  such  a  manner  that  the 
centre  of  gravity  remains  coincident  with  the  centre  of  figure, 
but  the  principal  moments  of  inertia  about  the  centre  of  gra- 
vity become  equal ;  if  it  then  fall  from  any  height  and  with- 
out rotation  upon  a  horizontal  plane  composed  of  adhesive 
material  so  that  no  point  which  has  once  come  in  contact  with 
the  plane  can  separate  from  it,  prove  that  the  chance  of  one 
of  the  faces  bounded  by  the  edges  2&,  2c  coming  uppermost  is 

2-  .  _.  be 

—  sm 


^  V{(«''+6'0(a'+c*)r 


Since  the  principal  moments  of  inertia  about  the  centre  of 
gravity  of  the  die  are  equal  and  there  is  no  initial  rotation, 
the  die  will  by  the  impact  of  one  of  its  corners  upon  the 
horizontal  plane  acquire  a  velocity  of  rotation  about  an  axis 
perpendicular  to  the  vertical  plane  through  the  comer  and 
the  centre  of  gravity.  This  will  continue  until  an  edge 
through  the  comer  meets  the  plane.  When  this  takes  place, 
since  by  the  adhesiveness  of  the  plane  no  point  can  separate 
from  it,  the  die  must  begin  to  rotate  round  this  edge  until  a 
face  meets  the  plane,  and  on  this  face  the  die  will  rest.  Now 
it  follows  from  the  foregoing  that  the  face  on  which  the  die 
will  rest  is  that  which  was  met  by  the  vertical  through  the 


9—12.]  AND   KIDERS.  91 

centre  of  gravity  when  the  die  first  began  to  descend.  To 
find  therefore  tlie  chance  of  the  face  2b,  2c,  lying  uppermost 
we  must  construct  the  pyramid,  having  for  vertex  the  centre 
of  the  die  and  for  base  the  face  2b,  2c;  and  producing  its 
inclined  faces  to  the  surface  of  the  sphere  of  radius  unity 
described  about  the  centre  of  the  die,  we  must  find  the  area 
of  the  spherical  quadrilateral  whose  comers  are  A,  B,  C,  D, 
the  points  in  whicli  the  lines  of  intersection  of  the  inclined 
fiices  meet  the  spherical  surface.  Now  the  angles  of  this 
spherical  quadrilateral  are  equal,  and  therefore  by  dividing 
it  into  two  spherical  triangles  we  obtain  for  its  area 

AA  -  27r, 


(- 


TT 

or    ::_    2 


where  A  is  the  mutual  inclination  of  the  inclined  faces  of  the 
pyramid. 

Now  taking  the  line  through  the  centre  of  the  die  perpen- 
dicular to  the  face  2b,  2c,  for  axis  of  x,  we  see  that  the  equa- 
tions to  the  inclined  faces  are 

hx  —  az  =  0, 

cx  —  ay  =  0, 

respectively ;  and  therefore  the  cosine  of  the  angle  between 
them  is 

-  V(a'  +  h')   (a*  +  c')  ' 

and  taking  the  negative  sign,  since  the  angle  sought  is  obtuse, 
we  have 

-4  =  7r  —  cos      ,-    -  : 

^{a*  +  b')  (a»  +  c*) 

and  therefore  the  area  sought  is 

.  (tt  _!  be  ) 

4-^— —  cos  '  -  -  h  , 

or     4  sin      , =r , 

V(a*  +  6»)  (a'  +  c')/ 

the  whole  surface  of  the  sphere  =  47r. 


92  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

Hence  the  chance  of  either  of  the  required   faces  lying 
uppermost  is 

2    .  _,  be 

—  sin 


11.  A  uniform  sphere  is  placed  in  contact  with  the  exterior 
surface  of  a  perfectly  rough  cone.  Its  centre  is  acted  on  by 
a  force,  the  direction  of  which  always  meets  the  axis  of  the 
cone  at  right  angles,  and  the  intensity  of  which  varies  in- 
versely as  the  cube  of  the  distance  from  that  axis.  Prove 
that,  if  the  sphere  be  properly  started,  the  path  described  by 
its  centre  will  meet  every  generating  line  of  the  cone  on  which 
it  lies  in  the  same  angle. 

The  centre  of  the  sphere  is  always  situated  on  a  cone  co- 
axial with  and  similar  to  the  original  cone,  the  vertex  of 
which  is  situated  in  the  produced  axis  of  the  original  cone 
and  at  a  distance  below  the  vertex  of  this  cone  equal  to 
a  cosec  a  [a  being  the  radius  of  the  sphere).  Take  this  point 
as  origin  and  refer  the  position  of  the  sphere's  centre  to  the 
polar  co-ordinates  r,  <f>,  where  ^  is  the  angle  at  which  the 
plane  containing  the  line  r  and  the  axis  is  inclined  to  a  cer- 
tain fixed  plane.  Let  F  be  the  impressed  force  on  the  sphere's 
centre  resolved  along  this  line.  It  is  clear  that  this  is  the 
only  part  of  the  impressed  force  which  is  not  counteracted 

by  the  reaction  of  the  cone,  and  that  it  =  — g . 

Let  X  and  Y  be  the  forces  of  friction  along  and  perperL- 
dicular  to  a  generating  line,  we  at  once  obtain  these  equations 
for  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  the  sphere,  assuming  its  mass 
to  be  unity, 

§-,sin.«(f)'=^-^ W. 

s(''™4t)=^' (^)- 

Also  for  the  motion  of  the  sphere  about  its  centre  let  m^,  co^, «, 
be  the  instantaneous  angular  velocities  about  the  three  prin- 
cipal axes  normal  to  the  cone,  parallel  to  the  direction  of  r, 


9—12.]  AND   RIDEKS.  93 

and  perpendicular  to  this  direction  on  the  surface  of  the  cone 
respectively. 

Now  a)j  approaches  o>j  with  the  angular  velocity  -^  cos  a, 

d6   . 
*"«  '"»  "i-^^^"' 

«),  recedes  from  Wj  with  angular  velocity  ~-  cos  a,  and 

from  Wj  with  the  angular  velocity  -^  sin  a. 

Hence  if  A  be  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  sphere  round 
a  diameter, 

^w-^^'f '"'"=•' t^)' 

^t-^'''f^'-=-^'' w- 

A  ~Y^  +  Aa).-—  sin  a  +  ^cd,  -^  cos  a  =  Xa  ...  (5). 
dt  dt  ^  dt  ^  ' 

Also  ^+"®«  =  ^ (^)' 

ram  a-£  — aw2  =  0 (7). 

From  (4)  and  (7) 

A   d  I     .      d<f>\      A  dr  d<f>  .       _      „ 
a  '  dt\  dt )      a'  dt'  dt  ' 

which  combined  with  (2)  gives  F=  0,  and 

r^8ina§=a; 

<?<^_      C 
dt  "'r'sina' 


94  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

therefore  from  (3) 

d(o^       C  dr     ^        ^  C 

-jr  +  -J-  -77  cot  a  =  0,     or  w,  =  —  cot  a  +  (7  . 
at       r  a  at  ^     ra 

C 
Let  C  =  0,  then  <»,  =  —  cot  a : 

^     ra 

,    ,  rs'mad^      C  ^        ,. 

and  also  ©,  = 7-  =  —   irom  (7). 

'         a      at      ra  ^  ' 

But  the  equation  of  vis  viva  gives  us 

(1)'+  '^  ^'■'' "  (f )  +  ^  (< + < + -/) = -  2  /  ^. .  * + C". 

Substituting  for  co^  and  Wjj  and  remembering  that 

and  that  r'  sm'  a  ( ^  j  =  -y , 

we  obtain 

If  now  the  circumstances  of  projection  be  such  that  C"  =-0 
as  well  as  C,  we  obtain 

dr     1  .       dd) 

But  -y  and  r  sin  a  -^  are  proportional  to  the  velocities  of 

the  sphere's  centre,  parallel  and  perpendicular  respectively  to 
the  generating  line,  drawn  to  its  centre  on  the  cone  in  which 
its  centre  is  always  situated ;  hence  the  proposition  is  proved. 

12.  A  small  rigid  vertical  cylinder,  containing  air,  is 
rigidly  closed  at  tlie  bottom,  and  covered  at  the  top  by  a  disk 
of  very  small  weight  which  fits  it  air-tight.     Supposing  the 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  95 

air  in  the  cylinder  to  be  set  in  vibration,  prove  that  the  period 

27J- 

of  a  vibration  is  —  ,  «i  being  a  root  of  the  equation 

ml     kBYI 

m  tan  —  = ; 

a        fia 

where  I  is  the  length  of  the  tube,  a  the  velocity  of  sound  in 
air,  /x  the  mass,  k  the  area  of  the  disk,  p  cc  p  (1  +  ^s)  the  re- 
lation between  the  pressure  and  density  when  the  latter  is 
suddenly  changed  from  p  to  p  (1  +  s),  and  11  the  pressure  of 
the  air  on  the  cylinder  before  motion  commences. 

When  the  disk  is  first  of  all  placed  in  the  cylinder  it  sinks 
through  a  space  which  is  very  small  in  consequence  of  the 
small  weight  of  the  disk,  and  comes  to  rest  when  the  pressure 
n  of  the  air  in  the  cylinder  satisfies  the  condition 

K 

P  being  the  pressure  of  the  external  air. 

The  diiFerential  equation  of  the  disturbance  is 

^_    ,d^ 
df'""  da?' 

For  which  we  may  assume  the  integral 

^  =  ^  sin  m  {at  +  x)  +  A'  sin  m  {at  —  x). 

Now  measuring  x  from  the  bottom  of  the  cylinder  we  must 
have  the  following  relations : 

(1)     When  a:  =  0 -,^  =  0    for    all   values  of  t,  whence  we 
readily  obtain  A  +  A'  =  0. 
[2]     When  x  =  l, 

because  the  condensation  s  at  any  point  is  —  -,^  ; 


96  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

.'.  —  fi  ^IwV  {sin  m  {at+l)  —  sin  m  {at  —  I)} 

=  —  U^KAm  (cos  m{at  +  I)+  cos  m  {at  -T)], 

2  cos  mat  sin  W6  = 2  2  cos  mat  cos  w6, 

7     W/e. 
or  wi  tan  »it  =  — «  : 

therefore  the  time  of  a  vibration  is 

— ,  where  m  satisfies  the  equation 
ma 

m  tan  wt  = j- , 

or  writins:  m  for  ma,  and  therefore  —  for  m,  this  time  be- 
°  a 

27r 
comes  — ,    where  m  satisfies  the  equation 
m 

ml     k/311 

mtan  — = . 

a       fia 

13.  A  circular  drumhead  of  uniform  thickness  is  stretched 
with  a  tension  of  uniform  magnitude  at  all  points  in  its  cir- 
cumference, and  is  then  set  in  vibration  by  a  small  disturbance 
commencing  at  the  centre.  Prove  (1)  that  if  ^  be  the  trans- 
versal disturbance  at  the  time  <  of  a  point  the  initial  distance 
of  which  from  the  centre  was  r,  then 

and  (2)  that  the  general  primitive  of  this  differential  equa- 
tion is 

z=\   (^  (a<  +  r  cos B)  de  +  j'yfr  {at  +  r cos  0)  log  (r sin*^)  dO, 
Jo  J  a 


9—12.]  AND  RIDEKS.  97 

(j>  and  yfr  being  arbitrary  functions,  and  a  a  constant  depend- 
ing upon  the  tension  and  constitution  of  the  drumhead. 

The  disturbance  will  be  arranged  symmetrically  about  the 
centre,  and  we  may  consider  the  motion  of  an  elementary 
annulus,  the  undisturbed  radius  of  which  was  r,  and  its 
breadth  dr. 

Let  T  be  the  tension  of  the  drumhead,  and  fi  the  mass  of  an 
unit  of  area. 

The  mass  of  the  annulus  just  referred  to  is  therefore 

/i27rr  dr. 

The  tension  along  the  inner  circumference  resolved  ver- 
tically is 

(neglecting  the  longitudinal  displacements)  and  that  along 
the  outer  circumference  is 

dr     dr  \  drj 

Hence  our  equation  of  disturbance  becomes 

f.2'^dr.^  =  ^^{2'^T^^dr; 

d^_T    d  f   dz\ 
•*•  ''  de~  fi'dr  V  dr)  ' 
T  being  constant  throughout  the  drumhead ; 

.    dy_Tndz     d^ 
'  '   df      fM  \r  dr     dr* 

To  solve  the  equation 

d^z  _   ,ndz     d^\ 
df'""  \rd?'^  drV' 

Assume  z=  \   ^  (ai  +  r cos 6)  dd ; 

dz      f' 
.'.  -J-  =  \   ^'  {at  +  r  cos  6)  cos  0  dd ; 


98  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

and  ^  =  «•/  '<#>"  («<  +  »•  cos  6)  de ; 
...  ^  _  a«  ^  =  a'  f  V'  («<  +  r  cos  ^  (1  -  cos'^)  rf^ 

Civ  Cv*  J   Q 

=  o*  ['<^"  (a<  +  r  cos  6)  8m^0dd 

Jo 

=  ^^  r(sin e<f>'  {at  +  r cos ^)} 

+  -  [V  (a<  +r  cos  ^  cos  ^(7^ 

=  0+-- 
because  sin  ^  =  0  at  both  limits. 
Again  assume 

z=l  -^  {at +  r  cos  6)  log  (r  sin'  &)  dO, 

■/ 0 

^  =  f  V  (a<  +  »•  cos  6)  log  (r  sin'  &)  cos  ^t/^ 
+  -  {'-^  {at  +  r  cos  &)  d0, 

^^  =/  V"  («<  +  »•  cos  ^)  log  (r  sin'  ^)  cos'  ^rf^ 

+  -  i  '^'  (a<  +  r  cos  6)  cos  ^(7^ 

-  -a  I  V^  (a<  +  r  cos  ^)  <f^, 

**  •'o 

also 

T^  =  a'  I  -(/r  (a«  +  r  cos  0)  log  (r  sin'  0)  d0 ; 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  99 

.-.  ^  ~  a'  -^  =  aM   ^"  {at  +  r  cos  0)  log  (r  sin'  0)  sin'  0 

-2-  r^'  {at  +  r cos ^)  cos  0d0 

+  -J   ->^  (a<  +  r  cos  ff)  d0 
'"'  •'o 

a'  f' 
= I   i/r'  (a<  4-  r  cos  ^)  log  (r  sin*^)  sin  0 

a*  C 
+  -  I   '«^'  (a< + r  cos  ^)  log  (r  sin'^)  cos  ^<?^ 

a'  f 
+  2-      -i/r' (a<  +  r  cos  ^)  cos  ^J^ 

'    J  0 

a'  r' 

-  2  -  /    ^fr'  {at  +  r  cos  ^)  cos  <7^ 
**  •'o 

and  since  the  first  term  vanishes  this  expression  reduces 
itself  to 

-  1   -i/r'  (a<  +  r  cos  6fy  log  (r  sin'^)  cos  0d0 

*"   •'0 


+ 

and  therefore  to 


dz 
'  Jr' 


Hence  both  these  values  of  z  satisfy  the  differential  equation, 
which  is  therefore  also  satisfied  bj  their  sum,  i.  e.  by  the 
expression  given  in  the  question,  and  since  this  expression 
involves  two  arbitrary  functions  it  is  tlie  general  primitive  of 
the  differential  equation. 


h2 


(     100    ) 


Wednesday,  Jan.  18.    1^  to  4. 


Sbniob  Exauiker.       Roman  numbers. 
JOKIOB  ExAMiMEB.       Arabic  numbers. 


4.  Find  the  position  of  the  point,  the  sum  of  the  squares 
on  the  distances  ot  which  from  the  three  sides  of  a  triangle  is 
the  least  possible ;  and  prove  that  the  angles,  which  the  sides 
respectively  subtend  at  this  point,  exceed  the  supplements  of 
those  which  they  subtend  at  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the 
triangle  by  the  respective  angles  of  the  triangle. 

Let  a,  ^8,  7  be  the  distances  of  the  point  required  from  the 
three  sides  of  the  triangle,  a,  J,  c  the  lengths  of  those  sides, 
K  the  area  of  the  triangle.     Then  we  have  to  make 

r'=  a*^  +  /S"^  4-  7*,  a  maximum, 

a,  /3,  7  being  subject  to  the  relation 

aa  +  J/3  +  07  =  2Z". 

Hence,  by  the  method  of  indeterminate  multipliers, 

a      b      c' 

The  position  of  the  point  is  thus  determined.  Now,  fig.  41, 
let  AJWhe  the  triangle,  F  the  required  point,  G  the  centre 
of  gi-avity  of  the  triangle.     Then 

sin  FA  F  _y  _c 
^7AC~^~b' 


1^—4.]         SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.  101 

and 

sin  QAB_2ire2L  of  triangle  GAB    GA.AG     AG  _h 
sin  GA  G  ~  area  of  triangle  GA  G  '  GA.AB  ~  ~AB  ~  c  ' 

whence, 

sin  PAB  :  sin  P^O  ::  sin  GAG  :  sin  GAB, 

and  PAB  +  PAG=  GAG+  GAB; 

.-.  PAB  =  GAG,  PAG  =  GAB; 
similarly, 

PBG=  GBA,  PBA  =  GBG,  PGA  =  GGB,  PGB=  GCA. 
Hence  PGB=G-GGB, 

similarly,  PBG=B-GBG; 

.'.  PCB+PBG=B+G-{GGB-i-GBG) 
^B+G-TT  +  BGG 
=  BGG-A; 

.-.  ir-BPG=BGG-A, 
or  BPG  =  'ir-BGG+A, 

similarly,  GPA  =  tt  -  GGA  +  B, 

APB  =  7r-AGB+G. 

Hence  the  angles  which  the  sides  respectively  subtend  at  P 
exceed  the  supplements  of  those  which  they  respectively  sub- 
tend at  G,  by  A,  B,  G,  respectively. 

vi.    Trace  the  curves  represented  by  the  equations 

{a^-Aa')y*-12a'x{a-i/)=0 (1), 

sin  y  —  m  sin  a;  =  0 (2) . 

In  (1)  explain  the  circumstance  that  the  asymptotes  parallel 
to  the  axis  of  y  appear  to  contradict  the  statement  of  (v).  In 
(2)  distinguish  between  the  cases  in  which  w>  =  or <  1. 


102  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

First.     The  equation 

(jc»  -  4a*)  y»  -  12a*  a;  (a  -  ^)  =s  0 
may  be  written  in  the  form 

{a?  +  3aa;  -  Aa')i/'-Zax  (y -  2a)'  =  0, 
or                   {x  +  4a)  {x—a)i^—  Sax  {y  —  2a)*  =  0, 
when  X  is  positive,  it  cannot  be  <  a, 
and  when  a;  is  negative,    >4a. 

When  a;  =  0,  y  =  0, 

x  =  a,  y  =  2a,  two  values, 

a;  =  2a,  y=«>>  or  <»> 

x  =  —  2a,  y  =Qo  ,  or  a, 

a;  =  —  4a,  y  =  2a,  two  values, 

near  the  origin  y' +  3aa;  =  0. 

The  curve  touches  a;  =  a,  and  —  4a. 

The  axis  of  x  and  a;'  —  4a*  =  0  are  asymptotes. 

The  curve  lies  both  above  and  below  the  axis  of  a;  at  an 
infinite  distance. 

The  form  of  the  curve  is  as  in  fig.  (42). 

The  asymptote  x  =  2a  is  met  in  two  points  at  an  infinite 
distance  by  the  branches  to  which  it  is  itself  an  asymptote^ 
and  one  more  point  where  it  meets  the  other  parallel 
asymptote.     Similarly  for  the  asymptote  x  =  —  2a. 

Secondli/, 

ami/  =  mBmx.     Let  m <  1  and  =  sin 7. 

For  every  value  of  a;,  if  y  =  ^,  the  equation  will  be  satis- 
fied by 

2n7r  +  y8,  and  (2n+  1)  7r-/8, 

x  =  0,  y  =  0, 

X  increases,  y  increases, 


1^ — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  103 


IT 


X  increases,  y  diminishes, 

a;  =  TT,  y  =  0, 

and  the  shape  is  the  same  on  the  opposite  side  from  a;  =  tt 
to  a;  =  27r,  when  it  recurs,  and  similarly  for  x  negative. 

The  shape  is  the  same,  see  fig.  43,  on  the  lines 

^  =  0,    y  =  ±27r,    y=  +  47r,... 

and  inverted  on 

y  =  +  7r,    y  =  +  37r.... 

If  w  >  1,  the  equation  is  the  same  interchanging  x  and  y, 
and  therefore  the  figure  is  the  same,  as  if  the  above  were 
turned  through  90'. 

K  m  =  1,  y  =  2mr  +  x,  or  (2n  +  1)  tt  —  a;.     See  fig.  44. 

10.  One  circle  rolls  within  another ;  apply  the  above  for- 
mula to  find  the  area  of  the  curve  traced  out  by  a  given  point 
within  the  rolling  circle. 

Let  C  be  the  centre  of  the  fixed,  0  of  the  moving  circle, 
P  their  point  of  contact  at  any  time,  fig.  45,  V  the  point 
which  traces  out  the  required  curve ;  let  0  F"  produced  meet 
the  circumference  of  the  moving  circle  in  Q,  and  let  A  be 
the  point  of  the  fixed  circle  with  which  Q  originally  coin- 
cided.   Let   GP=a,   OP=b,  PCA^d,  so  that  FOQ  =  ^0, 

0 

let  0  V=  c,  and  let  x,  y  be  the  co-ordinates  of  V.     Then 
a;  =  (a  -  J)  cos  ^  +  c  cos     ,     ^, 

y  =  [a  —  h)  9>\xi  6  —  c  sin  —7—  6 ; 

.-.  xdy  -  ydx  =  {a-  hydd  -  c'  (^)'  dd 

.       ,.  a- 2b  -  ,^     (a  -b)*  a-  2b  -  ,^ 

+  {a-b)c  cos — T —  dad  -  - — r— ^  c  cos  — , —  add, 


104  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

and,  integrating  this  between  the  limits  0  and  27r,  we  get  for 
tlie  area  of  the  curve, 

(a  _  J)' ^1  _  _j  2^  _  __ i,  sm -J- 2,. 

13.  Define  a  developable  surface ;  and,  from  your  definition, 
deduce  the  partial  differential  equation  of  such  surfaces. 

Find  the  equation  of  the  developable  surface  generated  by 
the  plane  which  moves  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  always  in 
contact  with  the  surfaces 

^s  +  ja  +  ^2-1, 

x'  /  z' 

a—r      0  —  r      c  —  r 

Let  Ix  +  niJ/  +  nz  =  l (1) 

be  the  equation  of  a  plane  touching  the  ellipsoid 

^.+2^. +1=1. 

We  then  have  to  find  the  locus  of  the  ultimate  intersections 
of  (1),  subject  to  the  conditions 

?a'+»nV  +  nV=l  (2), 

P    +m'    +n'    =0 (3).      . 

[The  equation  (3)  is  impossible,  but  the  form  of  the  equation 
of  the  required  surface  may  nevertheless  be  found.  A  similar 
method,  moreover,  may  be  applied  to  find  the  developable 
surface  circumscribed  about  any  two  concentric  and  similarly 
situated  surfaces  of  the  second  degree.] 

Multiply  (2)  by  X,  (3)  by  //.,  and  add  to  (1)  and  differentiate, 
and  we  get 

x+  Xla'  +  fil  =  0 (4), 

1/  +\mb'+fji.m=0 (5), 

z  +\nc'  +  fin=-0 (6), 


1^—4.]  A\D   RIDERS.  105 

(4)Z+(5)?»+  (6)  n  gives 

1  +  X  =  0. 

Hence  x—la*  +  fil  =  Of 

X 


.'.    l  =  - 


a  —  fi 

z 


Similarly  m  =  f^ —  ,      n  = 


Hence  (1)  becomes 

^  -li*  ^ 


x"  y"  s' 


a*  —  fi     b*  —  fi     c^  —  fi 

And  (3)  gives 

(a>^/x)'+(J'-M)'^(c--M)" 

The  latter  of  these  equations  is  the  differential  of  the  former, 
hence  the  required  result  will  be  the  same  as  that  of  elimi- 
nating fi  between  the  equation 

{fM-a:'){fi-b^{f,-c')+x'{fi-b'){jM-c') 

+  y'  (ji  -c')  (ji-a")  +  z'  i^L-a')  (jM-b^)  =0 (7), 

and  that  obtained  by  differentiating  it. 

Now,  writing  (7)  under  the  form 

its  differential  is 

3/jJ'-2Pfi+  Q  =  0. 

The  result  of  the  elimination  of  fi  between  these  is 
4  (F'-SQ)  iO'-SPM)  =  {OR-PQ)\ 

^       The  equation  of  the  required  surface  is  therefore  given,  by 
putting  in  the  foregoing, 

R  =  a'6V  -  J'cV  -  (fay  -  a*b'z\ 
The  required  surface  is,  therefore,  of  the  eighth  degree. 


106  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.      [Jan.  18. 

14.     Explain  what  is  meant  hy  A'.O"';   and  prove  that, 
if/(e')  be  expanded   in   a  series  proceeding  by  ascending 

powers  of  t.  the  coeflScient  of  f  h"^ —  . 

*  1.2 m 

Prove  that,  if  m  be  less  than  r, 
{l  +  log(l+A)}\0'"  =  r  (r-1)  (r-2)  ...  {r-m+  1). 

By  the  theorem  enunciated  in  the  former  pert  of  the  question, 

{l  +  log(l  +  A)|^o"' 

1.2  ...  w 
will  be  the  coefficient  of  T  in  (1  +  loge')',  that  is,  in  (1  + 1)'. 

Hence 

{l4-log(l-4-A)}''0'"^r(r-l)...(r-m  +  l)^ 
1.2...m  ~  1.2... 7»  ' 

.-.  {l+log(l  +  A)|'0'"  =  r(r-l)...(r-.m4-l). 


(    107    ) 


Thursday,  Jan,  19.    9  to  12. 


JCHIOB  MODSBATOB. 

1.  If  at  the  extremities  P,  Q  of  any  \:7f(i  diameters  CP, 
(7^  of  an  ellipse,  two  tangents  i^,  Qq^  be  drawn  cutting  each 
other  in  T  and  the  diameters  produced  in  p  and  g-,  then  the 
areas  of  the  triangles  TQp^  TPq  are  equal. 

Project  the  ellipse,  orthogonally,  into  its  auxiliary  circle ; 
then  the  areas  of  any  two  triangles  TQp,  TPq,  fig.  46,  in 
the  primitive  are  in  the  ratio  of  their  projections.  But  in  the 
auxiliary  circle  these  areas  are  equal  by  symmetry.  Hence 
also  they  are  equal  in  the  primitive  ellipse. 

2.  If  a  straight  line  CN  be  drawn  from  the  centre  to 
bisect  that  chord  of  the  circle  of  curvature  at  any  point  P  of 
an  ellipse  which  is  common  to  the  ellipse  and  circle,  and  if  it 
be  produced  to  cut  the  ellipse  in  Q  and  the  tangent  in  T, 
prove  that  CP=  CQ,  and  that  each  is  a  mean  proportional 
between  CN  and  CT, 

If  two  diameters  be  drawn  in  any  ellipse,  making  equal 
angles  with  the  major  axis,  then  their  conjugates  will  also 
make  equal  angles  with  the  same  axis.  This  is  obvious  from 
the  consideration  that  the  conjugate  of  any  diameter  is  parallel 
to  the  tangents  at  the  extremities  of  that  diameter. 

Now  CP,  fig.  47,  by  construction  is  the  conjugate  of  the 
diameter  parallel  to  PT,  and  CQ  the  conjugate  of  that  parallel 
to  Pr,    Also,  by  a  known  proposition  in  Conies,  PjT  and  PV 


108  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.l9, 

make  equal  angles  with  the  major  axis.  Therefore  CP,  CQ 
make  equal  angles  with  the  axis  and  are  consequently 
equal. 

Also  by  Goodwin's  Conies,  CN.  CT=  CCt- 

3.  If  a,  J,  c  be  the  sides  of  a  triangle,  and  r  the  radius 
of  the  inscribed  circle,  then  the  distances  of  the  radical 
centre  of  the  three  escribed  circles  from  the  sides  of  the 
triangle  will  be  respectively 

5+c        c+a        a+i 
''"2^'  ''^T'  '*~2r' 

Let  ABC  be  the  triangle,  fig.  48,  and  let  the  side  AB 
touch  the  two  escribed  circles  in  B  and  E,  Now,  by  defi- 
nition, the  radical  axis  of  the  two  circles  bisects  the  common 
tangent  BE,  and  is  perpendicular  to  the  straight  line  joining 
the  centres  of  the  circles.  Also  it  is  evident  that  the  straight 
line  joining  the  centres  passes  through  C  and  bisects  the 
angle  exterior  to  A  CB.  Again,  it  is  proved  in  most  treatises 
on  Trigonometry,  that  BA  =  BE,  so  that  the  middle  points 
of  BE  and  of  the  side  AB  are  the  same.  Therefore  the 
radical  axis  bisects  the  side  AB  and  is  parallel  to  the  bisector 
of  the  angle  A  CB. 

If  a  =  0,  y9  =  0,  7=0  be  the  equations  to  the  sides  of  the 
triangle,  the  equation  to  any  straight  line  parallel  to  the 
bisector  of  the  angle  C  is 

a  —  ^  =  constant, 

but  since  this  passes  through  the   middle  point  of  AB,  it 

c  c 

must  be  satisfied  by  a  =  -sxnB,  fi=-  sin  a. 

Hence  the  equation  to  the  radical  axis  is 

a  —  ^  =  -  (sin -B  — sin -4). 

Similarly,  another  radical  axis  will  be 

/9  —  7=  -  (sin  (7— sin  B), 


9--12.]  AND  RIDERS.  109 

But  aa  +  J|9  +  C7  =  2A, 

where  A  is  the  area  of  the  triangle.  Solving  these  equations 
to  determine  /9,  remembering  that 

.      ac  sin  B 
we  get 

and  the  values  of  7  and  a  may  be  written  down  from  sym- 
metry. 

Cor.  If  the  radical  centre  coincides  with  the  centre  of 
the  inscribed  circle,  the  triangle  must  be  equilateral. 

4.  Two  equal  heavy  particles  are  connected  by  a  string 
which  passes  thi-ough  a  small  smooth  ring.  Prove  that  the 
equation  to  the  plane  vertical  curve  on  which  the  particles 
will  rest  in  all  positions  is 

rc08^  =  a  +  -\/r  (r)  — i/r  (?  — r), 

where  9  is  the  angle  the  radius  vector  makes  with  the  vertical, 
I  is  the  length  of  the  string,  -v/r  an  arbitrary  function,  and  a  an 
arbitrary  constant. 

Take  the  smooth  fixed  ring  as  origin,  and  the  axis  of  a? 
vertical.  Let  x,  r,  x',  r  be  the  co-ordinates  of  the  two 
particles.     Then  by  virtual  velocities  we  have 

dx  +  dx  =  0  ; 


also 


.*.  x  +  x'  =  c,\ 
r  +  r  =1.) 


Let  x=<f){r)  be  the  equation  to  the  curve,  then  x  =^  (r^, 
and  we  have  the  functional  equation 

<f>{r)+<l>(l-r)=c. 

Solving  this  in  the  manner  exhibited  in  Ilerschel's  ex- 
amples, we  get 

<t>  {r)  =  a  +  ^lr  {r)  +  yjr  [l  -  r). 


110  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

5.  If  four  equal  particles,  attracting  each  other  with  forces 
which  vary  as  the  distance,  slide  along  the  arc  of  a  smooth 
ellipse,  they  cannot  generally  be  in  equilibrium  unless  placed  at 
the  extremities  of  the  axes ;  but  if  a  fifth  equal  particle  be  fixed 
at  any  point  and  attract  the  other  four  according  to  the  same 
law,  there  will  be  equilibrium  if  the  distances  of  the  four 
particles  from  the  semi-axis  major  be  the  roots  of  the 
equation 

where  p  and  q  are  the  distances  of  the  fifth  particle  from  the 
axis  minor  and  axis  major  respectively. 

If  the  four  particles  be  placed  on  an  arc  of  an  ellipse  in 
equilibrium,  the  resultant  attraction  on  any  particle  must 
be  normal  to  the  curve.  Hence,  by  Todhunter's  Statics, 
Art.  220,  the  four  normals  at  the  four  particles  must  meet  in 
their  centre  of  gravity. 

Let  X,  y  be  the  co-ordinates  of  any  particle,  then  the 
equation  to  the  normal  is 

y-y=-^  (»''-«) (!)• 

Let  Ilk  be  the  co-ordinates  of  the  point  in  which  the  four 
normals  meet,  then 

h-y  =  ^{h-x) (2), 

also  i]Vil'=l    (3). 

a  I       b 

Eliminating  x  we  get 

(a«  -  hjy'  +  2h'k  (a*  -1')^+  (JV  +  a'A'  -  (a*  -  hj]  by 
-26*^♦(a'-t')3^-5•^'  =  0 (4), 

Since  k  is  the  ordinate  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  k  is  one- 
fourth  of  the  sum  of  the  roots  of  this  equation ; 

••  ** (a'-b') ^^'- 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  Ill 

This  equation  can  only  be  satisfied  by 

a'-J»  =  0,    or  a'  +  7&*=0, 

or  by  ^  =  0.     Taking  the  latter  supposition,  the  equation  (4) 
reduces  to 


hence  two  of  the  particles  must  be  situated  at  the  extremities 
of  the  major  axis.  To  find  the  positions  of  the  other  two, 
write  for  y^,  its  value  obtained  from  (3),  and  we  get 

but  since  h  is  the  abscissa  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  we  have 

A  =  - :  hence  this  equation  can  only  be  satisfied,  first  by 

a;  =  0,  and  then  the  four  particles  are  at  the  extremities  of 

the  two  axes:   secondly  by  e=  — ,   and  in  this  particular 

ellipse  there  will  be  equilibrium  if  two  of  the  particles  are  at 
the  extremities  of  the  major  axis,  and  the  other  two  are  at 
the  extremities  of  any  ordinate. 

The  case  a'  +  7  J'  =  0  is  impossible.     In  the  case  a*  =  6',  the 
ellipse  becomes  a  circle,  and  equation  (4)  reduces  to 


3^  = 


*"  +  <''(lj' 


But  since  h  and  h  in  this  case  must  both  vanish  because 
all  the  normals  pass  through  the  centre,  this  expression  may 
have  any  value.  Hence  there  will  be  equilibrium  in  a  circle 
if  the  four  particles  are  at  the  extremities  of  any  two 
diameters. 

If  we  have  five  particles,  it  is  necessary  that  the  point 
{hk)  should  coincide  with  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  five 
masses.     Hence  equation  (4)  becomes 


112 


SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS 


\Jan.  19, 


bk  = 

Wk 
a*- 6"^  +  ^' 

and  similarly 

bh  = 

2a'A 

substituting  these  in  equations  (2)  and  (3)  we  get 

the  required  result. 

6.  A  heavy  string  is  placed  in  equilibrium  on  a  smootli 
sphere ;  prove  that,  if  6  be  the  length  of  the  spherical  arc 
drawn  from  the  highest  point  of  the  sphere  perpendicular  to 
tlie  great  circle  touching  the  string  at  any  point  P,  then 

sin^  = 


where  z  is  the  perpendicular  from  P  on  any  horizontal  plane, 
and  a,  b  are  constants. 

Shew  that  the  form  of  the  string  can  be  a  circle  only  when 
its  plane  is  vertical  or  horizontal. 

Let  z  be  the  highest  point  of  the  sphere,  fig.  49,  AB  the 
string,  and  PQN  the  great  circle  toucning  it  along  the  ele- 
ment PQ. 

Let  T  be  the  tension  at  P,  then  resolving  the  forces  on  tlie 
element  PQ  along  its  arc,  we  get 

dT=gdz', 

.-.   T=gz  +  c. 

Again,  take  moments  about  the  vertical  through  z.  Re- 
solving T  perpendicular  to  the  axis,  we  get  Tsin  zPN,  and 
the  moment  is  therefore 


hence 


T  sin  zPN .  sin  zP^T  sin  6, 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  113 


sin  a  = 


z  +  b' 
where  a  and  b  are  arbitrary. 

The  curve  of  the  string  could  not  be  a  circle,  for  the  alti- 
tude of  the  centre  of  gravity  must  be  a  maximum  or  minimum. 
Now  unless  the  plane  of  the  circle  be  vertical  or  horizontal, 
a  slight  motion,  without  change  of  form,  will  clearly  elevate 
or  depress  the  centre. 

7.  If  three  particles  of  masses  m,  m,  m"  attracting  each 
other  start  from  rest,  shew  that  if  at  any  instant  parallels  to 
their  directions  of  motion  be  drawn  so  as  to  form  a  triangle 
the  momenta  of  the  several  particles  are  as  the  sides  of  that 
triangle. 

Let  V,  V,  vi"  be  the  velocities  of  the  particles.  Since  the 
three  particles  start  from  rest,  the  area  conserved  round  any 
point  is  zero.  Now  the  area  conserved  by  any  particle  of 
mass  w  moving  with  velocity  v  is  mvj),  where  p  is  the  length 
of  the  perpendicular  from  the  origin  on  the  direction  of  motion. 
Hence 

mv  .p-\-mv.p-\-mv.p  =0. 

Therefore  if  three  forces  represented  by  mv,  m'v\  m"v" 
were  to  act  along  the  directions  of  motion,  the  sum  of  their 
moments  about  every  point  would  be  zero.  Therefore  these 
forces  are  in  equilibrium,  and  if  a  triangle  be  constructed  by 
drawing  lines  parallel  to  their  directions,  the  forces  will  be 
proportional  to  the  sides  of  that  triangle. 

Hence  also  the  three  directions  of  motion  being  produced 
meet  always  in  one  point  0. 

Let  Fy  Fy  F"  be  the  resultant  forces  on  the  three  particles 
each  due  to  the  attraction  of  the  other  two.  Then,  these 
being  the  resultants,  two  and  two,  of  all  the  internal  forces 
of  the  system,  must  balance  each  other.  Therefore  the  three 
forces  F,  F',  F'  meet  in  a  point  0',  and  are  proportional  to 
the  sides  of  a  triangle  formed  by  drawing  parallels  to  the 
straight  lines  joining  0'  to  the  particles. 

I 


114  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Ja«.19, 

The  points  0,  0'  are  not  in  general  the  same,  nor  are  they 
fixed  in  space.  If  the  law  of  attraction  be  directly  as  the 
distance,  they  both  coincide  with  the  centre  of  gravity  of 
the  system. 

8.  If  from  any  point  on  a  surface  a  number  of  geodesic 
lines  be  drawn  in  all  directions,  shew  (1)  that  those  which 
have  the  greatest  and  least  curvature  of  torsion  bisect  the 
angles  between  the  principal  sections,  and  (2)  that  the  radius 
of  torsion  of  any  line,  making  an  angle  6  with  a  principal  sec- 
tion, is  given  by  the  equation 


R     \p,    pj 


sin  6  cos  0. 


where  p^ ,  p^  are  the  radii  of  curvature  of  the  principal  sec- 
tions. 

Take  the  given  point  as  origin  0,  and  the  normal  as  the 
axis  of  z,  and  let  the  equation  to  the  surface  be 

22  =  <^  {x,  y) 

Let  OP  be  any  geodesic  line  and  ON  the  projection  of  OP 
on  the  plane  of  xy. 

The  osculating  plane  of  any  geodesic  line  contains  the  nor- 
mal to  the  surface  on  which  it  is  drawn.  Hence  NOZ  is  the 
osculating  plane  at  0,  and  also  the  osculating  plane  at  P  con- 
tains the  normal  to  the  surface  at  P. 

Let  de  be  the  angle  between  two  consecutive  normal  planch 
to  the  curve,  du  the  angle  between  two  consecutive  oscillating 
planes.  Then  clearly  tlie  normal  OZ  is  turned  into  the  con- 
secutive normal  to  the  surface  at  P,  by  turning  it,  first  through 
the  angle  dc,  then  through  du ;  and  the  planes  of  these  angles 
are  at  right  angles. 

The  equation  to  the  normal  at  P  is 

^-x  ^-n-y  ^};-z 

ax  by         —  1   ' 

.••  cos  du .  cos  de  =  -77—- — ■,  ,  ,  . ^  „.  j 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  Ill 

-••  4  +  -»  =  «'  cos'  e  +  h'  sin'  0. 

But  by  Euler*'s  tlieorem  since  a  =  —  ,  b  =  —  , 

Pi  p. 

-  =  a  cos'  0  +  b  sin*  6 ; 
P 

therefore  substituting,  we  get 

~  =  {a  —  h)  sin  0  cos  ^ 

=  (—  —  —  ]  sin  ^  cos  0. 


\Pi     pJ 


This  is  a  maximum  or  minimum  when  0  =  t,  hence  the 

4 

tangents,  the  geodesic  lines  of  greatest  and  least  torsion,  bisect 

the  angles  between  the  principal  sections. 

If  B^  be  the  least  radius  of  torsion,  and  B  the  radius  of  a 
geodesic  line  making  an  angle  <j>  with  it,  then  the  above  ex- 
pression becomes 


cos  2^  * 
The  expression  for  B  may  also  be  put  into  the  form 

B~     2d0[pJ' 

9.  If  du  and  de  be  the  angles  of  torsion  and  contingence 
of  any  curve  of  double  curvature,  and  if  sin  (f>  be  the  ratio  of 
the  radius  of  circular  curvature  to  the  radius  of  spherical 
curvature,  prove  that  the  square  of  the  angle  of  contingence 
of  the  locus  of  the  centres  of  circular  curvature  is 

d<f>  +  duY  +  cos'  ^eT. 

Let  CC\  fig.  50,  be  an  element  of  the  locus  of  the  centres 
of  circular  curvature  corresponding  to  a  point  A  on  the  original 
curve.     This  element  ultimately  lies  in  the  normal  plane  at^, 

I  2 


116  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

let  it  make  an  angle  <f}  with  the  principal  normal  A  C  pro- 
duced. Now  any  element  CC  is  brought  into  the  position  of 
the  next  by  turning  it,  first,  through  an  angle  du  round  the 
tangent  AA'  to  the  curve,  secondly,  through  an  angle  de 
round  a  perpendicular  CO  at  C  to  the  osculating  plane  CAA'; 
the  element  has  thus  been  brought  into  the  consecutive  nor- 
mal plane  to  the  original  curve,  and  we  have  therefore, 
thirdly,  only  to  increase  (f>  by  2^. 

The  change  may  therefore  be  effected  by  turning  CC  in 
two  planes  at  right  angles  to  each  other  through  the  two 
angles  C  CP=du  +  d(\>,  and  PCQ  =  de  cos  ^. 

Therefore  if  d-^  be  the  angle  between  the  old  and  new 
positions  of  CC, 

cos  c?i/r  =  cos  {du  +  d^) .  cos  {de  cos  ^), 
or  d^\  =  {du  +  d<^y  +  ^T^  cos''  <^*. 

10.  A  particle  is  projected  with  velocity  V  along  an  in- 
finitely thin  ellipsoidal  shell  attracting  according  to  the  law  of 
nature;  prove  that  when  it  leaves  the  ellipsoid  the  perpen- 
dicular from  the  centre  on  the  tangent  plane  is 


7C-^)' 


where  R  is  the  radius-vector  parallel  to  the  initial  direction  of 
motion,  and  P  the  perpendicular  on  the  tangent,  /x  the  attra^* 
tion  of  a  mass  equivalent  to  a  unit  of  area  of  the  ellipsoid  at  a 
unit  of  distance. 

First  we  must  find  the  attraction  of  the  ellipsoidal  shell  on 
the  particle.  Let  P  be  the  position  of  the  particle  at  any 
instant,  take  a  point  Q  just  inside  the  shell,  and  situated  on 
the  normal  at  P.  Round  P  take  any  very  small  area  A  which 
may  be  ultimately  considered  as  plane.  Since  the  point  Pis 
on  the  ellipsoid,  its  distance  is  infinitely  small  compared  with 
the  linear  dimensions  of  the  area  A.  Hence  the  attraction  of 
A  on  P  or  ^  is  ultimately  the  same  as  that  of  an  infinite 
plane  on  a  point  at  a  finite  distance  from  it,  and  is  therefore 
normal  and  equal  to  27r/x.     The  attraction  of  the  whole  ellip- 


9—12.]  AND   EIDERS.  117 

soidal  shell  on  Q  is  zero,  hence  the  attraction  on  Q  of  the 
whole  shell  except  the  area  A  is  277/1..  But  it  is  evident  that 
the  whole  shell  less  the  area  A  exerts  equal  attractions  on  P 
and  Q,  because  the  distance  PQ  diminishes  without  limit 
compared  with  the  distance  of  P  from  the  nearest  point  of  the 
attractive  mass.  Therefore  the  attraction  of  the  whole  shell 
on  P  is  normal  and  equal  to  47r/Lt. 

Now  since  this  attraction  is  normal  to  the  path  of  the  parti- 
cle, its  velocity  will  be  always  the  same  and  equal  to  V;  and 
it  will  describe  a  geodesic  line  on  the  ellipsoid. 

The  pressure  on  the  ellipsoid  will  be  47r/x ,  where  p  is 

the  radius  of  curvature.  Hence  when  the  particle  leaves  the 
ellipsoid,  we  have 

47rit  =  — . 
P 

Now,  because  the  path  is  a  geodesic  line,  p  =  -5 ,  where  r 

is  the  radius  vector  of  the  ellipsoid  parallel  to  the  direction  of 
motion,  and  c^  is  a  constant  =  P^.  (See  Hymers'  Solid 
Geometry^  Problems  on  Sect.  x).     Hence  we  have 


V( 


V\PR\ 


If  p  be  the  perpendicular  from  the  centre  on  the  tangent 
plane  at  the  point  where  the  particle  leaves  the  ellipsoid,  we 
also  have 

^Vi — v^~)' 

Now  the  shell  has  been  supposed  bounded  by  similar  ellip- 
soids, hence  /x  is  really  variable  and  proportional  to  the  tiiick- 
ness  h  of  the  shell.  Let  fi  =  fi^h.  Also  by  similar  figures  this 
thickness  is  proportional  to^;  let  n  be  the  infinitely  small 
ratio  of  the  thickness  of  the  shell  at  the  extremity  of  any 
axis  to  that  semi-axis.  Then  h  =  np;  therefore  fi  =  ii^n.p, 
and  let  m  =  fi^n.  Tlien  substituting  in  the  above  expression, 
we  get 


118  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

11.  An  infinitely  thin  ellipsoidal  shell  attracting  accord- 
ing to  the  law  of  nature  is  bounded  by  two  similar  and  simi- 
larly situated  ellipsoids.  A  very  small  piece  is  cut  out  of 
the  shell  and  replaced  in  its  original  position.  Shew  that 
the  force  necessary  to  hold  the  piece  in  equilibrium  is  propor- 
tional to  the  square  of  the  thickness  of  the  shell. 

Let  dB  be  any  element  of  the  small  piece  of  area  B  cut 
out  of  the  ellipsoid.  Round  dB  describe  a  small  area  A 
which  may  be  ultimately  considered  plane  and  with  respect 
to  which  dB  is  infinitely  small.  Then  the  attraction  oi  A 
on  this  element  dB  of  itself  is  clearly  zero.  Let  /  be  the 
attraction  of  the  remainder  of  the  shell  on  a  unit  of  mass 
supposed  collected  at  dB.  Then,  since  the  shell  is  infinitely 
thin,  we  may  consider  y  to  be  the  same  throughout  the  thick- 
ness h  of  dB,  and  therefore  the  force  necessary  to  hold  dB  in 
equilibrium  is  /.  dB.  h.  But  we  have  proved  that/=  lirfi.h, 
hence  the  force  =  27rfMdB .  h^.  Hence  the  force  on  the  whole 
very  small  area  B  is  'iiriiB .  h'. 

12.  A  sphere  of  radius  a  is  suspended  from  a  fixed  point 
by  a  string  of  length  I  and  is  made  to  rotate  about  a  vertical 
axis  with  an  angular  velocity  w.  Prove  that,  if  the  string 
make  small  oscillations  about  its  mean  position,  the  motion 
of  the  centre  of  gravity  will  be  represented  by  a  scries  of 
terms  of  the  form 

Zcos  {Kt  +  M), 

where  the  several  values  of  k  are  the  roots  of  the  equation 

Let  G  be  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  sphere,  BGC  the 
diameter  to  the  extremity  of  which  the  string  is  tied.  Take 
the  fixed  extremity  of  the  string  as  the  origin,  and  fixed  axes 
in  space,  so  that  g  acts  parallel  to  the  positive  direction  of 
the  axis  of  z.     Let  Wj,  a^,  o),  be  the  angular  velocities  of  the 


9—12.]  AND  KIDERS.  119 

sphere  about  diameters  parallel  to  the  axes.  Let  P,  Q  be 
the  direction-cosines  oi  GC  and  F  Q'  of  the  string  referred  to 
the  axes  x  and  y. 

The  squares  of  small  quantities  being  neglected  according 
to  the  usual  rule,  it  is  also  obvious  that  the  tension  of  the 
string  will  be  the  weight  of  the  sphere. 

The  equations  of  motion  are  therefore 

d(o,  moment  of  forces 

rfr+'""'= A " 

^®2        ^,,    -^9  (P<        p\         I 

where  A  is  the  square  of  the  radius  of  gyration  of  the  sphere 

2 
about  a  diameter  =  -  a^. 
5 

Also  cDj  =  rate  at  which  GO  approaches 
Similarly 


'       d  .     _i  p.      dP 
..  =  -^^(cosP)  =  ^. 


dQ 


*  dt 


If  XT/  be  the  co-ordinates  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  we 
have 


d*x  „  ^ 

df=-^^'  I 
d'y 


Also  x  =  lF-\-aP,    y  =  lQ'  +  aQ. 

Substituting  for  x,  y,  u)^,  ©^  their  values  in  terms  of  P,  Q, 
P\  Q\  we  get 


12U 


SENATE-HOUSE  TROBLEilS 

de  ^     dt      A^^     ^  ^' 
,  d'P'       ^P  ^ 


[Jan,  ly, 


de 


de 


To  solve  these  put  P  =  Z  cos  {kI + M) ,  Q=M  sin  {kI + 3/ ) , 
P'  =  L'  cos  {Kt  +  M),  Q  =  M'  sin  (/c«  +  J/),  we  get 

L'{g-l^)=aieL, 
M'{g-l^)  =  a^M, 

M{"-i-K^-jM'  =  -nLK. 
Eliminating  the  ratios  of  L,  M,  L',  M\  we  get 

2 
when  we  put  ^  =-  a',  this  reduces  to  the  result  given  in  the 

o 

question. 

13.  A  string  is  in  equilibrium  in  the  form  of  a  circle  about 
a  centre  of  force  in  the  centre.  If  the  string  be  now  cut  at 
any  point  A,  prove  that  the  tension  at  any  point  P  is  instan- 


taneously changed  in  the  ratio  of  1  — 


cT  — • 


4.   £-(»-•) 


:  1,  where 


e'  +  6-' 

0  is  the  angle  subtended  at  tlie  centre  by  the  arc  AP. 

This  is  a  particular  case  of  a  more  general  proposition. 
Suppose  a  string  to  be  in  equilibrium  in  any  curve  in  one 
plane  under  the  action  of  any  forces.  Let  Pds,  Qda  be  the 
resolved  parts  of  these  along  the  tangent  and  normal  to  any 
element  ds.     In  order  to  refer  the  motion  to  moving  axes, 


9—12.]  ASD  SIDEKS.  121 

let  v,  F  be  the  relodties  of  the  element  along  the  tangent  and 
nonnaL     Then  the  equations  are 

(1), 


dm 
dt 

d^ 

dt^ 

■0*;^ 

(2), 

where  T  is  the  tension,  p  the  radius  of  carratme,  and  ^  die 
angle  the  tangent  makes  with  any  fixed  straight  line. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  motion  just  after  the  string  is  cot, 

wem.y  «j«ct  the  8q»«« of  muU qnantitk.,  hence  rf  and 

H^  may  be  neglected. 

The  geometrical  equations  are  to  be  found  from  the  con- 
dition that  any  element  PQ  =  ds  of  the  string  is  inextensible. 
The  tangmtaai  and  normal  velocities  of  P  and  Q  are  respec- 
tively «,  o  and  u+dm,  v+dc.  Hence  the  velocity  ciaepanr 
tioa  of  P  and  Q  aloB|^  the  tangent  is  dm  —  wd^,  which  must 
be  werOj  and  the  veloaty  of  lotatioa  of  Q round  Pis  dc-\-  ud^ 

which  most  be  d* .  ^ .     Henoe  we  hare  the  two  equations 

s-r« •• <')• 

s-rf '■*'■ 

Differentiating  (3)  we  get 

d*u      1  dv 
dsdt  ~pdi^ 

since  the  anuJl  tenn  r    jT    may  be  neglected  in  the  begin- 
nii^of  the 


122  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

Substituting  from  equations  (1)  and  (2) 

dP   oTT^Q    r, 

ds       ds^       p      p^ ' 

d^T_T^_dP     Q 
ds*      p^  ds       p' 

This  is  the  general  equation  to  determine  the  tension  of 
the  string  at  the  instant  after  the  string  is  cut. 

If  the  string  be  in  the  form  of  a  circle,  as  in  the  question, 
^  =  —  i*^  is  independent  of  s  and  5=0,  and  p  =  a  the  radius ; 

d^T     T  ^-F 
ds*      a*       a" 

Now  s  =  ad,  hence  we  get 

T=  Fa  +  A^  +  Be-''. 

To  determine  the  arbitrary  constants  we  observe  that  r=  0 
when  ^  =  0,  and  0  =  2Tr; 

But  just  before  the  string  was  cut  we  have 

T=Fa\ 

Hence  the  result  given  in  the  question  follows  at  once. 

If  the  string  be  a  catenary  under  the  action  of  gravity; 
we  have 


P=-g  ,,  i      g>    and    Q  =  - 


9<^ 


V(s'  +  c')    «^^    ^-     Vl^'  +  C) 
The  equation  becomes 
which  has  been  integrated  in  a  previous  question. 


,  dP     Q 

whence  -7-5  =  — 

as       p 


d'T     T_ 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  123 

If  the  string  be  in  the  form  of  an  equiangular  spiral  under 
the  action  of  a  central  repulsive  force  in  the  pole  varying 
inversely  as  the  cube  of  tne  distance,  the  resulting  equation 
can  be  easily  integrated. 

14.  An  inelastic  string  is  suspended  from  two  fixed  points 
so  that  it  hangs  in  the  form  of  a  catenary  of  which  the  para- 
meter is  c.  Suppose  it  to  make  small  oscillations  in  a  ver- 
tical plane,  prove  the  equation 

where  a  is  the  angle  the  tangent  at  any  point  makes  with  the 
horizon  when  the  string  is  at  rest,  and  a  +  ^  is  the  value  of 
the  same  angle  at  the  time  t. 

Shew  that  there  are  sufficient  data  to  determine  all  the 
arbitrary  functions. 

Let  M,  V  be  the  velocities  of  any  element  ds  of  the  string 
resolved  along  the  tangent  and  normal.  Then  the  general 
equations  of  motion  of  the  string  are 

du       d(f>  .    ,       ^,      dT 

dv        d<b  /        ,N      T'dd> 

where  T'  is  the  tension.     Now  the  tension  when  the  string 

is  at  rest  is  gy=  —  —  .  Let  T'—-^- yT.     Substitute  and 

^^      cos  a  cos  a 

remember  that  in  small  oscillations  we  may  neglect  the  squares 

of  the  small  quantities  m,  v,  ^,  we  get 

du                      ,  .  co»*  a  dT  ,. 

-  =  -gcosa.4,+-^-^ (1). 

dv         .         ,   ,                d(t>     cos"  a  ^  ,_. 

-^=gBma.<f>+gcoBa.^  +  -j-T (2). 


124  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

We  have  also  the  two  general  geometrical  equations 

du     V  _ 
ds      p       ' 
dv     u  _  d<f> 


ds 


dt' 


where  -  =  -j-  +  -^  is  the  reciprocal  of  the  radius  of  curvature. 
p     as      as  '^ 

Changing  the  independent  variable  and  neglecting  the  squares 

of  small  quantities  these  reduce  to 


d^u  c     d(b 


du' 


COS'*  a  dt 


.(3). 


Ti       1         1        rt  ,       .  ,  ,  ,„  p     du     dv     dj^4> 

!•  or  the  sake  oi   orevitj  put  uvfp    ^^^  '1}  ^   ~Ji  ^  ~7^  ^^' 

spectively. 

In  order  to  eliminate  T  from  equations  (1)  and  (2)  differen- 
tiate the  second,  we  get 

cPu  ,  d'd)     cos*  a  dT     2  cos  a  sin  a  rwi 


d'u        ,  fd^4>  ^  2(6^  _  2  cos  g  sin  g  ^ 


Eliminating  Tfrom  this  by  means  of  (2),  we  get 

fd^u        \       ^  ,  .       du'        ,  .  ,    d^6i 

cos  g  f  -j-i  +  w  j  +  2  (sm  g  -^ u  cos  a)  =  y  cos  g  -r\ 


+  2^  sm  g  cos  g  -—  +  2^<p 


(4). 


But  by  (3) 


j%  +  M  =  — —  (f>  ; 
aoL  cos  g  ^ 

du         ,  /"sing,,, 

.*.  sm  g  -J u  cos  a  =  c  / — r—  ©  , 

og  j  cos*  g  ^  ' 


*J— 12.j  AND   RIDEKS.  125 

substitute  these  in  (4),  we  get 

^     _»"  .  ft    Tsina  ,„       ,      _    d^<f>     ^   .  d(h     ^  ,, 

A  +  2c  / — 5-  9  =<7  (cos  a-T-^  +  2sina  cos  a -7^  +  26). 

cos  a  ^  j  cos'*  a  ^      "^  ^  d(i  da        ^' 

Differentiate  again,  we  have 

c     d6"     3c  sin  a  .„  »     /cPrf)      ,  dd>\ 

-f-+ 2— <^  =^cos'a    -T-5+4-/    ; 

cos  a   aa        cos  a  V^^i  da) 

,    «<f>       „       «      •       ,ti 
cos  a  ^—  +  3  cos  a  sm  ad)  ,  ,  ,  ,^ 

da  ^      ff  {^<f>      .d^\ 

integrating  both  sides,  we  have 

_£_     2^0  ) 

cos^a     cl^a^^^^"^   J' 

which  is  the  same  as  the  result  given  in  the  question. 

An  expression  for  the  tension  may  be  found  as  follows. 
Differentiating  (2)  and  adding  the  result  to  (1),  we  obviously 
get 

c      d'd}  d'cb     ^cos'a  dT     Tdco&'a 

cos  a  dtr      ^  da  c      da       c      da 

or  cos  a  -1 sma .  2  =  -  '  -  -         ' 


da  '         2  Vcos'a  clt''      c  d(^ ) 


.-.  cosa.r=  |/[4<^+/w}rfa; 

cV<'>       a 
2      cos  a      •'^ 


(    126    ) 


Thursday,  Jan.  19.     1^  to  4. 


Skniob  Modebatoe.    Koman  numbers. 
Junior  Modebatob.    Arabic  numbers. 

1.     Find  a  superior  limit  to  the  numerical  values  of  x 
consistent  with  the  convergency  of  the  series 


2  V       3  V  w" .  ic" 

3+ -+1:1 

(n  + 1)"^'.  a;" 


1.2      1.2.d  1.2...n 


Here  w«^,  = 


[_«+_ 


11' .  iC" 


tt_  w"  w  + 1      V    w 


a; 


=(-D- 


?<„=»  -r^  =  ?«„=»  f  1  +  ^1  a;  =  ex, 


?t«  \        n 


and  the  superior  limit  to  the  values  of  x  is  therefore  - . 

2.  If  the  sides  of  a  spherical  triangle  be  small  compared 
with  the  radius  of  the  sphere,  then  each  angle  of  tlie  spherical 
triangle  exceeds  by  one-third  of  the  spherical  excess  the  cor- 
responding angle  of  the  plane  triangle,  the  sides  of  which  are 
of  tiic  same  lengtli  as  the  sides  of  the  spherical  triangle. 

If  the  sides  of  a  right-angled  plane  triangle  of  given  area  be 
bent  so  as  to  form  a  spherical  triangle  on  a  given  sphere  of 
great  radius,  the  alteration  of  area  in  the  triangle  is  very 
nearly  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  hypothenuse. 


1|— 4.]         SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  EIDERS.  127 

It  is  proved  in  Todhunter's  Spherical  Trigonometry,  Art. 
109,  that  the  area  of  any  spherical  triangle  whose  sides 
are  a,'97  exceeds  that  of  the  plane  triangle  by  the  fraction 

„        of  the  latter,  where  r  is  the  radius  of  the  sphere. 

If  the  plane  triangle  be  right-angled  Oi^  +  0'=Y,  and  it  maybe 
proved  in  exactly  the  same  way,  that  the  alteration  in  area  is 

=  r^  of  the  plane  triangle.  This  expression  varies  as  y*,  be- 
cause by  the  question  the  area  of  the  plane  triangle  is 
constant. 

3.  Two  tangents  OA,  OB  are  drawn  to  a  conic,  and  are 
cut  in  P  and  <^  by  a  variable  tangent ;  prove  that  the  locus 
of  the  centres  of  all  circles  described  about  the  triangle  OFQ 
is  an  hyperbola. 

Taking  OA,  OB  as  axes,  let  the  equation  to  the  tangent 
PQ  be 


-+|-1=0.. 
a     p 

and  the  equation  to  the  conic 

(1), 

^-«(s+f-0* 

(2). 

Then  the  equation  to  the  circle  is 

x' + 1/^  +  2xy  cos  CO  =  ax  +  ^y 

Then  since  (1)  touches  (2)  the  roots  of  the  equation 

.(3). 

must  be  equal ; 

"  \a     a)\fi     b)      4/c       

To  determine  the  centre  of  (3),  we  have 

.(4). 

a+y  cosQ)  =  -  , 

a 

y  +  a;  cos  0)  =  -  . 

128  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

Substituting  in  (4)  the  equation  to  the  required  locus  ia 

{x  +  1/  cos  fo)  {y  +  X  cos  (o) 

_  2h  (x  +  y  cos  &))  +  2a  (;/  4-  x  C03  w)  —  ah 

\     Tb  ' 

4 

which  is  evidently  an  hyperbola. 

If  the  given  conic  be  a  parabola,  we  must  have  4/c  =  ah^ 
hence  we  get  for  the  locus 

x-\-y  cos  G)     y  -\-x  cos  «  _  1 
'~a  ^  h  *' 

which  is  a  straight  line.     This  is  evident,  a  priori,  for  it  is  a 
known  property  that  all  these  circles  pass  through  the  focus. 

iv.  If  w  be  a  function  of  three  independent  variables 
x,  y,  z,  which  are  connected  by  three  equations  with  three 
new  independent  variables  ^,  ?/,  ^,  shew  how  to  express  the 
partial  differential  coefficients  of  w,  to  the  first  and  second 
orders  respectively,  with  respect  to  x.  y,  z,  in  terms  of  the 
con'esponding  partial  differential  coefficients  with  respect  to 

Apply  this  method  to  prove  that,  if  at  a  certain  point  in  a 
surface  r  =  t  and  s  =  0  when  the  axes  of  x  and  y  are  taken 
parallel  to  a  particular  pair  of  lines,  at  right  angles  to  each 
other,  in  the  tangent  plane  at  that  point,  the  axis  of  z  being 
normal,  then  the  following  relations  will  hold  at  that  point 
whatever  be  the  direction  of  the  co-ordinate  axes  provided 
they  be  rectangular,  viz. 

r  s  t 

TT/?  ^M  ~  l+<?' ' 
where  p,  q,  r,  s,  t,  denote 

dz      dz      d*z       d'z       d'z 
di'   dj/'   dx''   d^'   dy" 
respectively. 

Let  tlie  equation  to  the  surface  referred  to  the  original 
axes,  whereof  tliat  of  z  is  normal  and  those  of  x  and  y  are 
at  right  angles  to  each  and  tangential,  be 

u  =  z-f{x,y)  =  0, 


1^—4.]  AND   RIDERS.  129 

let  ^,  T],  ^  be  the  new  axes,  and  let  the  relations  between  the 
old  and  new  variables  be 

du  du  du  du  dz  dz 

'    dx        dy 

d.    .,    ,     -  du       ,  du 

bimilarly  for  -7-  and  —rr, ; 

again, 

d^u  ,d^z      ^  d'^z  ^d^z         ,,        ^ 

d^z  _  <^*z  _  ,    d^z   _ 

oar     ay^  <mry 

-,..,,     f,  d'^u       ,  J'm 

Similarly  tor  ^  and  ^ , 

also 

d'xi  ,  d*z         yd'z       .    ,  T  N    <^«  r 

Similarly  for  ^^f^^^^^^' 

Hence  differentiating  the  equation 
du      da  d^  _ 
d^'^d^d^^'^' 

with  regard  to  f  and  substituting  we  obtain,  remembering 
that 

K 


130  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [JuJl.  19, 

Similarly,  we  should  find 

whence  the  proposition  is  proved. 

V.     If  the  differential  equations  of  the  first  order 

give  rise  to  the  same  differential  equation  of  the  second  order, 
shew  how  the  general  solution  of  an  equation  of  the  fonn 

.^{,(.,„|),t(.,..|)l  =  o, 

may  be  found  without  integration. 

Apply  this  or  any  other  method  to  the  discovery  of  the 
general  solution  of  the  equation 

Here  2a;y  — —  -  x^yp  =  a* ; 


l^ut 


x\x- -^j  =  c,     and  y  (y  -px)  =  Ik 


V 
give  rise  to  the  same  differential  equation  of  the  2nd  order. 

Now  p  =  -  (y  --]  =  -^  ; 

ic  V       yJ     X  -  c 


1^ 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  131 

ha?  +  cy'  =  he, 

hx^  +  T  2^'  =  «*• 

6.  Enunciate  and  explain  D'Alembert's  principle.  Apply 
it  to  determine  the  small  oscillations  in  space  of  a  uniform 
heavy  rod  of  length  2a,  suspended  from  a  fixed  point  by  an 
inextensible  string  of  length  I  fastened  to  one  extremity. 
Prove  that,  if  x  be  one  of  the  horizontal  co-ordinates  of  that 
extremity  of  the  rod  to  which  the  string  is  fastened, 

fc  =  u4  sin  (Wj<  +  a)  +  i5  sin  (n/  +  /9), 

where  n^,  n^  are  the  two  positive  roots  of  the  equation, 

aln*  -  (4a  +  3?)  gn^  +  3/  =  0, 

and  A,  B,  a,  /8,  are  arbitrary  constants. 

Take  0  the  point  of  suspension  of  the  string  for  origin,  and 
the  axis  of  z  vertically  downwards.  Let  p,  q,  p',  q'  be  the 
cosines  of  the  angles  made  by  the  string  and  rod  respectively 
with  the  axes  of  x  and  y,  and  let  u  be  the  distance  of  any  ele- 
ment du  of  the  rod  from  that  extremity  to  which  the  string  is 
attached.     Then  the  co-ordinates  of  this  element  will  be 

x  =  lp  +  up',^ 

y  =  lq  +  uq',\ (1). 

z=  I  +  u,  \ 

Then  the  equations  of  motion  will  be 

,^^«^  =  .Zi,       (2), 

dr  dr  m 


\ 


K  '1 


132 


SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS 


[Jan.  19, 


where  T  is  the  tension  of  the  string  and  m  the  mass  of  the 
rod.  By  D'Alembert's  principle,  the  equation  of  moments 
round  x  will  be 

which  becomes  by  (1) 

^  jfjd'q  ,      d'q'\      ^j  ,d^q      Sa' dV      „      ,,    .       ,, 
or  -2al{lJ  +  u^)-2la^-^—^--^  =  2aff{k  +  aq), 

which  by  equation  (2)  reduces  to 

92 


z^f+^^'=_ 


de'^l''~d( 

Therefore  the  four  equations  of  motion  are 

and  two  similar  equations  for  g',  g'. 

To  solve  these  put 

p=  A  sin  {nt  +  a),  q  =  Bsm  [nt  +  a), 
we  get 

In^A-if     an^B=gAA 

MA-\--an^B  =  gB'A 


n  — 


3 

4a^+3Z 
al 


and  the  values  of  n  are  found. 

vii.     A  rigid  bodv  is  rotating  about  an  axis  through  its 
centre  of  gravity  when  a  certain  point  of  the  body  becomes 


1^—4.]  AND  RIDERS.  133 

suddenly'fixed,  the  axis  being  simultaneously  set  free ;  find  the 
equations  of  the  new  instantaneous  axis  ;  and  prove  that,  if  it 
be  parallel  to  the  originally  fixed  axis,  the  point  must  lie  in 
the  line  represented  by  the  equations 

d^hc  +  l^my  +  <^nz  =  0, 

(j._e')|+(c'-a»)|4-(a'-5')^  =  0; 

the  principal  axes  through  the  centre  of  gravity  being  taken  as 
axes  of  co-ordinates,  a,  b,  c  the  radii  of  gyration  about  these 
lines,  and  I,  m,  n  the  direction-cosines  of  the  originally  fixed 
axis  referred  to  them. 

In  order  that  the  new  instantaneous  axis  may  be  parallel  to 
the  originally  fixed  axis  the  plane  passing  through  the  im- 
pulse at  the  fixed  point  and  the  centre  of  gravity  must  be 
diametral  to  the  originally  fixed  axis.  Hence  the  point 
must  lie  in  the  plane 

o*ic  4- J'wy  +  c'w2;  =  0 (1). 

Again,  in  order  that  rotation  round  the  original  axis 
through  the  centre  of  gravity  combined  with  a  velocity  of 
translation  parallel  to  the  blow  may  reduce  the  point  to  rest, 
the  line  joining  the  point  with  the  centre  of  gravity  must  co- 
incide with  the  projection  of  the  axis  upon  the  diametral 
plane;  let  X,  /*,  v  be  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal  to  the 
plane  passing  through  the  axis  and  the  normal  to  the  diametral 
plane,  then 

TK  +  mfi  +  wv  =  0, 

c^Vk  -f-  h^miJk  -H  <?nv  =  0, 

Ik  (c'  —  a*)  -I-  mfi  (c*  —  &*)  =  0,  and  so  on ; 

therefore  the  equation  to  the  plane  is 

(t«  _  c»)  ^  +  (c»  -  a»)  ^  +  (a'  -  J»)  -  =  0 (2); 

(1)  and  (2)  determine  the  line  in  which  the  point  must  be 
situated. 


134  SKNATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

ix.     Prove  tlie  following  relation  between  the  perturbations 
of  a  planet  in  longitude  and  radius  vector : 

h  being  twice  the  sectorial  area  described  in  a  unit  of  time  by 
the  undisturbed  planet  round  the  Sun ;  and  find  the  corre- 
sponding relation  whatever  be  the  law  of  force,  provided  it  be 
central  and  a  function  of  the  distance  only,  and  provided 
such  a  function  as  R  can  be  found. 

Let  F  be  the  central  force. 

Our  equations  of  motion  give  us 

whence,  proceeding  as  in  Airy's  Tracts,  we  get 

put  r  4-  Sr,  6  +  Zd,  for  r  and  6  respectively,  r  and  6  being  the 
functions  of  t  given  in  the  undisturbed  motion,  and  we  obtain 

dr    dhr      ,r,d'r      ^    d\Br      „   .    fdOV    ^  ,d0    dhO 

'dt'-dt+'^'de^^'-^r-^'^'^dJ-^'df-dT 

=  eFBr  +  AFBr  +  Ar^-^Br-6[^dt-^r'^^, 
dr  J     dt  dr 

which,  as  in  Airy's  Tracts,  is  easily  reduced  to 


dr 


dR 
dr' 


d 

dt\ 


\      dt         dt     J  dt     dt 


„  -_       ,    dF  ^       „  rd(R)  ,      ,    dR 
=  8FBr+Ar  -r-Br-6    —j-!  dt-ir-j^, 
dr  J     dt  dr 


■U — ^-l  ^ND   RIDERS.  135 

Put  h  for  r'  -j- ,  and  we  get 


+  3    -\-^dt  +  2r  -J AF8r  -  2r  ^-  SrV  . 

j     at  dr  dr      ) 


This  is  reduced  to  the  equation  in  the  question  when  F  is 
such  a  function  of  r  that 

10.  If  the  ohject-glass  of  a  telescope  be  covered  over  by 
a  diaphragm,  pierced  in  the  centre  by  a  small  hole,  the  form 
of  which  is  a  rectangle,  state  generally  the  nature  of  the 
spectra  formed  about  the  image  of  a  star  on  a  screen  placed  at 
the  focus. 

If  the  hole  be  circular  and  the  screen  be  pushed  towards 
the  lens,  prove  that,  when  the  light  is  homogeneous,  the  centre 
is  alternately  bright  and  dark.  Trace  also  the  order  of  the 
colours  seen  if  the  light  be  not  homogeneous. 

This  rider  is  obviously  the  same  as  the  problem  solved  by 

Airy  in  Art.  79  of  his  Iract  on  Light.     For  the  introduction 

of  the  lens  is  merely  making  the  incident  pencil  convergent 

instead  of  divergent,  that  is,  the  a  in  Airy's  investigation  is 

to  be  made  negative.     The   intensity   of   the   illumination 

will  be 

4\Vi»    .  ,/27ra-& 
rsm 


{a-hf 


J^ira-b  ^ 


The  interpretation  of  this  result  is  nearly  the  same  as  that 
given  by  Airy,  except  that  we  now  begin  at  the  central 
spot. 


136  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  RIDERS.      [JaJl.  19. 

When  b=a,  the  intensity  becomes  ttV;  when  b—a  =  ±  — g-, 

c 

the  sine  is  unity,  and  intensity  is  measured  by  Ac*;  when 

h  —  a  =  ±  — — ,  the  intensity  is  zero,  and  as  J  —  a  continues  to 

increase,  we  have  alternately  brightness  and  darkness. 

If  the  light  be  not  homogeneous,  we  have,  when  h  =  a,  a. 
white  spot,  and  as  J  ~  a  increases ;  the  violet  disappears  first, 
leaving  a  red  spot,  which  gives  place  to  the  other  colours  in 
order. 


(    137    ) 


Friday,  Jan.  20.    9  to  12. 


SxinOB  MoDKBATOB.     Romaa  numbers. 
Sbniob  Exahineb.       Arabic  numbers. 

1.  OA,  OB  are  common  tangents  to  two  conies  having  a 
common  focus  S,  CA,  CB  are  tangents  at  one  of  their  points 
of  intersection,  BD,  AE  tangents  intersecting  CA,  CB  in 
D,  E.     Prove  that  SDE  is  a  straight  line. 

Let  the  conies  be  reciprocated  into  two  circles  within  both 
of  wliich  S  lies.     Fig.  51. 

oa,  o5,  their  points  of  intersection,  correspond  to  OA,  OB; 
ca,  cb,  the  points  of  contact  of  a  common  tangent,  to  CA,  CB. 

The  straight  line  b  joining  cb  and  ob  meets  one  circle  in  hd, 

a    ca  ...  oa  the  other  in  ae, 

bd,  ae  correspond  to  BD,  AE, 
and  d,  e  which  join  Id,  ca  and  ae,  cb  to  D  and  E. 

It  is  required  to  shew  that  d,  e  are  parallel. 

The  angle  between  d  and  a  =  that  between  b  and  o  =  that 
between  a  and  e. 

ii.  Define  the  terra  potential  of  a  mass,  the  particles  of 
which  attract  according  to  tlie  law  of  nature ;  and  prove  that, 
if  a  body  moveable  about  a  fixed  axis  be  subject  to  the  ac- 
tion of  an  attracting  mass  of  which  the  potential  is  V,  then 


138  SENATE-HOUSE   PEOBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 


/// 


dV 

-jrz  dm  is  the  moment  which  must  be  impressed  upon  the 

body  about  that  axis  in  order  to  produce  equilibrium,  where 
6  is  the  inclination  of  the  plane  through  the  fixed  axis  and 
the  particle  of  which  the  mass  is  din  to  a  fixed  plane. 

A  uniform  straight  line,  the  particles  of  which  attract  ac- 
cording to  the  law  of  the  inverse  square,  acts  upon  a  rigid 
uniform  circular  arc  in  the  same  plane  with  the  line,  of  which 
the  radius  is  equal  to  the  line,  and  which  is  moveable  about 
an  axis  through  its  centre  perpendicular  to  its  plane,  the  axis 
being  coincident  with  one  extremity  of  the  line.  Prove  that 
the  moment  necessary  to  produce  equilibrium  when  the  bound- 
ing radii  are  inclined  at  the  angles  a  and  yS  to  the  line  pro- 
duced is  proportional  to 

sec  -  4-  1 
log— ;g— . 
sec  1+1 

Let  AB  be  the  straight  line,  P  a  point  at  a  distance  r 
from  AB,  Fig.  52, 

Q  a  point  in  the  line  at  dist.  x  from  B, 

P(^=  cc*  +  r'  +  Ixr  cos  6 ; 


ioVI(a;  + 


dx 

0  ^[{x  +  r  cos^plVihi^ 


_.      V2  V(l  4-  cos  g)  +  (1  +  cos  &) 
~  ^^  1+cos^ 

a  a  6 

2  cos- +  2  cos*-  1+cos-  Q 


=  log ^ ^ ^  =  log -^  =  log  (sec-  +  1 ) . 

2  cos*  -  cos  - 

2  *t 

Hence  since  in  this  case  dm  =  rdO,  the  moment  on 

crrdv  sec  1+1 

sec  —  +  1 


9— 12.J  AND    KIDEIJS.  139 

4.  If  an  elastic  string,  whose  natural  length  is  that  of  a 
uniform  rod,  be  attached  to  the  rod  at  both  ends  and  sus- 
pended by  the  middle  point,  prove  hy  means  of  Vis  Viva 
that  the  rod  will  sink  until  the  strings  are  inclined  to  the 
horizon  at  an  angle  $,  which  satisfies  the  equation 
a  Q 

cot'  -  -  cot  -  -  2w  =  0, 

where  the  tension  of  the  string,  when  stretched  to  double  its 
length,  is  n  times  the  weight. 

If  the  string  be  suspended  by  a  point,  not  in  the  middle, 
write  down  the  equation  of  Vis  Viva. 

C  is  the  point  of  suspension.     Fig.  53. 
ABC=  6  at  time  t. 
Let  AB  =  2a,  BC=  r  =  a  sin  0, 
m  the  mass  of  the  rod. 
The  moving  effect  of  the  tension  of  CB 

r  —  a 
=  rvrng . . 

By  Vis  Viva,  at  the  time  t, 

f  T  ~~  d 

«M?*=  2mga tan  ^  —  4  \nmg dr 

=  ^Tfiga  tan  v  —  Inmg  .  -^ , 

since  v  =  0  when  ^  =  0,  and  r=a\ 

therefore  the  rod  comes  to  rest  when 

tan^-w(sec^-l)*=0, 

.    /,        /,  .4^ 

or  gm  B  cos  ^  —  4w  sm  —  =  0, 

6  6 

or  cot'  -  —  cot  -  —  2n  =  0. 

If  the  fixed  point  divide  tlie  string  into  the  portions  a  —  c^ 
a  +  c,  and  these  be  inclined  at  angles  6,  &  to  the  horizon,  and 


140  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 

he  of  length  r,  r  at  the  time  «,  ^  the  inclination  of  the  rod, 
the  equation  of  Vis  Viva  gives 

/dfrV        72/#V    c  {{^r-a-^cf      {r'-a-c)\ 

where  a  =  ^  (r  sin  ^  +  r'  sin  6') , 

and  2a  cos  <^  =  r  cos  6 -\-  r  cos  ^', 

2a  sin  ^  =  —  r  sin  d+r  cos  ^', 

which  with  two  more  dynamical  equations  are  sufficient  to 
determine  the  problem  of  the  motion. 

5.  If  an  oblate  spheroid  be  moveable  about  its  centre, 
and  B  be  the  inclination  of  its  equator  to  a  fixed  plane,  i/r  the 
inclination  of  the  line  of  intersection  of  its  equator  with  this 
plane  to  a  fixed  line  in  the  plane,  A  and  C  the  respective 
moments  of  inertia  about  the  axis  of  figure  and  a  line  in  the 
equator  respectively,  L  and  M  the  moments  of  impressed 
couples  about  the  line  of  intersection  of  the  equator  with  the 
fixed  plane,  and  a  line  in  the  equator  perpendicular  to  this 
latter  line  respectively,  to  the  angular  velocity  about  the  axis 
of  figure,  prove  that 

0^-0  f-^  j  sin  ^  cos  ^  4-  A(o  smd-^  =  i, 

ci  ('^4:,ine]  +  c^i^.  cos  e-Aa,^  =  M, 


dt\dt  J  dt    dt  dt 

hence  deduce  the  precessional  and  nutational  velocity  of  the 
Earth's  axis,  assuming  the  effect  of  the  Sun's  action  to  be  a 
couple  of  winch  the  moment  is  m  sin  A  cos  A  about  an  axis 
in  the  equator  90°  distant  from  the  Sun,  m  being  a  very  small 
quantity,  A  and  C  very  nearly  equal,  and  the  Sun's  motion 
in  declination  and  right  ascension  being  neglected. 

The  angular  velocities  about  the  axis  of  figure,  the  line  of 
nodes,  and  the  axis  in  the  equator  90°  distant  from  the  line  of 
nodes  respectively,  are 

d0  ,  dyft    .    ^ 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  141 

and  the  line  of  nodes  recedes  from  the  axis  of  figure  with  the 
angular  velocity  -j-  sin  6,  and  approaches  the  perpendicular 
to  the  line  of  nodes  in  the  equator  with  the  angular  velocity 
-T-  cos  6.  Similarly  the  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  nodes  in 
the  equator  approaches  the  axis  with  the  angular  velocity  -j- , 

and  recedes  from  the  line  of  nodes  with  the  velocity  -—  cos  6. 

Hence  by  the  formulae  for  accelerations  of  angular  momenta 
referred  to  moving  axes, 

=  acceleration  of  momentum  round  the  line  of  nodes, 

^dt\-i''''^)^I'''^'^dt-Tt'^'' 

=  acceleration  of  momentum  round  the  axis  perpendicular 
to  the  line  of  nodes, 

whence  the  equations  in  the  question. 

In  the  case  of  the  Sun's  action  upon  the  Earth 

X  =  m  sin  A  cos  A  sin  a, 

M=  —  m  sin  A  cos  A  cos  a, 

and  the  squares  of  the  very  small  quantities  -—  and  -j-  are 
to  be  neglected  as  well  as  the  differencee  between  A  and  C. 

Hence  the  equations  become 

d^d  .    ^  d-^     m    .     .         .     . 

-rf-^  +  (o.9m0  —  =-77  sm  A  cos  A  sm  a, 
d(^  dt       C  * 

d    (  .    ^d-^lA         dd         m    .     .  . 

^, .   sni  ^  -p-   —  Q)  -J-  =  —  -T7  sm  A  cos  A  cos  a, 

dt   \         dt)         dt         C 


142  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 

differentiate  the  first  and  subtract  the  second  multiplied  by  o), 
remembering  that  A  and  a  are  to  be  considered  constant,  and 
we  have 

d'O       .dd     m 

-To  +o>  -jT  =  Ty  ®  sm  A  cos  A  cos  a, 

dr  at       C  ' 

d'     fde\        ^dd     m 


Similarly, 


dO      m     .     . 

.  -r  =  — 7y  sm  A  cos  A  cos  a. 
dt      0)6 

.    ^d-dr       m      .     .  .     . 

ama  -~-=  — ^  sin  A  cos  A  sm  a, 
dt       a>C 


neglecting  the  arbitrary  parts  of  the  respective  integrals. 

6.  If  a  solid  of  revolution  be  immersed  in  a  heavy  homoge- 
neous fluid  with  its  axis  vertical,  prove  that,  when  the  total 
normal  pressure  on  the  surface  is  a  minimum,  its  form  must 
be  such  that  the  numerical  value  of  the  diameter  of  curvature 
of  the  meridian  at  any  point  is  a  harmonic  mean  between  the 
segments  of  the  normal  to  the  surface  at  that  point  intercepted 
between  the  point  and  the  surface  of  the  fluid  and  between 
the  point  and  the  axis,  respectively. 

In  this  case  Jxi/ds  is  to  be  a  minimum. 

Hence  we  must  substitute  icy  for  fi  in  the  formula, 

1  1  fdu,  dii 

-  = /-cosa  +  -7- 

p  fM  \dx  dy 

giving  us 

1      cos  a     cos  ^ 


(l^^^«+f  ^°^^)' 


+ 
p         X  y 

2  1  1 


2/3     a;  sec  a     y  sec  fi  ' 
proving  the  proposition. 

viii.  Explain  the  phenomenon  of  external  conical  refrac- 
tion where  a  small  pencil  of  light  passes  through  a  biaxal 
crystal ;  and  describe  an  experiment  by  Aviiich  this  pheno- 
menon may  be  manifested. 


9—12.]  AND   RIDERS.  143 

If  the  crystal  be  bounded  by  planes  perpendicular  to  the 
line  bisecting  the  acute  angles  between  the  optic  axes,  write 
down  equations  Avhence  the  equation  of  the  cone  of  emerging 
rays  may  be  obtained. 

Let  Z,  m,  n  be  the  direction-cosines  of  the  perpendicular 
to  any  wave-front  incident  upon  the  second  surface  of  the 
crystal ;  the  axes  of  reference  being  the  axes  of  elasticity ; 
let  X,  fi,  V  be  the  direction-cosines  of  the  perpendicular  to  the 
corresponding  wave-front  after  emergence.  Then  \,  fi,  v  are 
tlie  direction-cosines  to  the  corresponding  emergent  ray,  and 
if  the  point  of  the  second  surface  at  which  the  light  emerges 
be  taken  as  origin,  the  equation  of  the  cone  will  be  deter- 
mined by  eliminating  \  /*,  v  between  the  equations 

X-fi-p ^^^' 

and  an  equation  between  X,  fi,  v  which  remains  to  be  found. 

(1)  The  emergent  ray,  the  normal  at  the  point  of  emer- 
gence and  the  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the  incident  wave, 
lie  in  the  same  plane,  whence 

^  =  ^ (B). 

V      n 

(2)  The  sines  of  the  angles  of  emergence  and  incidence 
are  to  each  other  as  w  :  v,  u  being  taken  for  the  velocity  of 
light  in  air,  and  v  for  the  velocity  with  which  the  wave-front 
under  consideration  was  propagated  through  the  crystal, 
whence 

'-^='-^ (C). 

(3)  Also  the  value  of  v  in  terras  of  I,  m,  n  is  to  be  found  by 
substituting  the  values  corresponding  to  the  multiple  point  in 
the  equations  a  (page  18  of  Griffin's  tract  on  Double  Refrac- 
tion), whence  we  obtain  the  following  relations, 


v^  —  a'  _  -  ^^ 

S  8 

V  —c  _     vn 


(D). 


144  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.      [Jan.  20. 

Between  the  four  equations  of  B,  G,  and  D,  and  the  addi- 
tional equation 

we  may  eliminate  I,  m,  n,  and  v,  and  obtain  the  relation 
sought  between  X,  /x,  and  v. 

The  final  relation  between  x,  y,  and  z  gives  a  cone  of  the 
fourth  degree. 


(    145    ) 


Friday,  Jan.  20.     1^  to  4. 


JcmoB  MoDEBATOB.     Boman  numbers. 
JUNIOB  EXAHINKB.        Arabic  numbers. 

1.  If  a,  /3,  7  be  the  respective  distances  of  a  straight  line 
from  the  three  angular  points  of  a  triangle  ABC,  these  dis- 
tances being  reckoned  positive  or  negative  according  as  their 
directions  fall  within  the  angles  of  the  triangle  itself  or  their 
supplements,  investigate  the  following  relation, 

(a sin  Af+  (/3  sin  J5)*+  (7  sin  C)'-  2  cos  ^  sin  B  sin  Cfiy 

—  2  cos  -B  sin  (7  sin  A<ya  —  2  cos  Osin  -4  sin  Bafi 

=  4i?'sinM  sin'^^siu'C, 

where  R  is  the  radius  of  the  circumscribed  circle. 

Referring  to  fig.  54,  we  have 

AP=a,    BQ^-fi,     CR  =  -'i. 

Hence,  if  50  =  a,  CA==h,  AB  =  c,  &ndBAP=~-0, 
-47  =  a  +  iS  =  c  cos  f  Y  -  ^j » 
similarly  a  +  7  =  i  cos  f— +^)  ; 


143  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jail,  20, 

.'.  &  (a  +  /8)  +  c  (a  +  7)  =  2bc  cos  —  cos  0, 

J  (a  +  /3)  +  c  (a  +  7)  =  2lc  sin  —sin  Q. 

A         A 
^Multiply  these   by   sin  — ,  cos  — ,  respectively,   and   add 

squares,  then,  since  he  sin  A  =  — ^ , 

i'^(a4-ySr+cMa  +  7r-2Jccos^(a  +  /3)(a+7)=:^, 

or,  since  2bc  cos  A  —  }?-\-(?  —  <^, 

aV  + 1'/3*  +  cV  -  25c  cos  A.^'y-2ca  cos  B.  ya 

a'bV 


—  2ah  cos  C.  a^  = 
Now, 


4i^  • 
sin  A     sin  ^     sin  C       1 


a  b  c         2B' 

.:  (a  sin  Ay+  (yS  sin  By+  (7  sin  Cy  -  2  cos  ^  sin  i?sin  C.  ^y 
—  2  cos  jB  sin  Csin  -4  .  7a  —  2  cos  Csin  ^  sin  5 .  o^ 
=  4i2sin''^sin'^sin'C, 
the  required  result. 

2.  State  the  positive  and  negative  characteristics  of  d 
singular  solution  of  a  differential  equation ;  and  shew  how  it 
is  deduced  from  the  complete  primitive.  Shew  also  how  the 
singular  solution  of  a  differential  equation  of  the  first  order 
is  obtained  from  the  equation  itself. 

Obtain  the  singular  solution  of  the  equation  of  which 

y  cos*m  =  2  cos  (a;  —  2  m) 

is  the  complete  primitive ;  and  find  the  singular  solution  of 
the  equation 


1| — i.]  AND   RIDERS.  J4T 

(a)  y  coa^m  =  2  cos  {x  —  2m). 

This  may  be  put  into  the  form 

{y  —  cos  x)  cos  2m  —  sin  x  sin  2ni  =  ^ . 

Differentiating  with  respect  to  m,  we  get 

(y  —  cos  x)  sin  2m  +  sin  x  cos  2m  =  0, 
whence,  adding  squares  and  reducing, 

-y —  2v  COS  a;  +  1  =  0, 
4 

the  required  singular  solution. 

(/8)     This  may  be  written  under  the  form 

The  condition  for  a  singular  solution  is 
dp 

which,  in  this  case,  gives 

Z{x  +  yyp'-2{x'-f)p  =  Q, 
2    x  —  y 

Substituting  this  value  for  p  in  the   original   equation, 
we  get 

^iKx+y)      9  VaJ  +  y/ 

or     4(ic-^)''  =  27  (a;  +  3/)^ 
the  required  singular  solution. 

iii.  Prove  that,  in  any  curve  of  double  curvature,  the 
locus  of  the  centres  of  spherical  curvature  is  the  edge  of  n - 
gression  of  the  envelope  of  the  normal  planes.  Prove  also 
that  this  locus  cannot  be  an  evolute. 

The  normal  plane  to  the  locus  of  the  centres  of  circular 
curvature  bisects  the  radius  of  spherical  curvature. 


148  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [/an.  20, 

If  two  consecutive  normal  planes  be  drawn  to  a  curve,  their 
intersection  is  a  generator  of  th?  envelope  of  the  planes,  or,  as 
it  is  usually  called,  of  the  polar  surface.  The  envelope  of 
these  generators  is  known  to  be  the  edge  of  regression,  tliat 
is,  any  two  consecutive  generators  intersect  on  the  edge  of 
regression. 

The  intersection  of  two  consecutive  normal  planes  is  a 
straight  line  through  the  centre  of  circular  curvature,  and  it 
is  clearly  such  that  if  any  point  be  taken  on  it,  that  point  is 
equally  distant  from  three  consecutive  points  on  the  curve. 
Therefore  the  intersection  of  two  consecutive  generators  is 
equally  distant  from  four  consecutive  points  on  the  curve, 
i.  e.  it  is  the  centre  of  spherical  curvature. 

Hence  the  proposition  follows. 

It  is  also  clear  that  the  edge  of  regression  cannot  be  an 
evolute,  because  its  tangents,  which  are  the  generators  of  the 
above  polar  surface,  do  not  pass  through  the  original  curve. 

Let  A,  A',  A"  be  three  consecutive  points  on  a  curve,  and 
let  the  plane  of  the  paper  be  the  normal  plane  at  A',  Let  CO 
be  the  intersection  of  the  normal  planes  at  A,  A';  CO  the 
intersection  of  those  at  A',  A".  Let  the  plane  that  passes 
through  the  three  points  A,  A\  A"  cut  CO,  C  0  in  C  and  C. 
Then  C,  C  are  ultimately  two  consecutive  centres  of  circular 
curvature,  and  0  is  the  corresponding  centre  of  spherical 
curvature.    Fig.  55. 

Now  A' CO,  A' CO,  are  two  right  angles  in  one  plane,  and 
therefore  a  circle  described  on  A' 0  as  diameter  will  pass 
through  0  and  C.  And  CC  is  ultimately  a  tangent  to  the 
circle,  hence  a  normal  to  CC  bisects  A'O  the  diameter.  But 
CC  is  also  ultimately  a  tangent  to  the  locus  of  C,  whence 
the  normal  plane  to  the  locus  of  C  bisects  A'O  the  radius  of 
spherical  curvature. 

4.  Determine  the  class  of  cui^ves  which  possess  the  pro- 
perty that  the  locus  of  the  extremity  of  the  polar  subtangent 
of  any  one  is  similar  to  the  curve  itself. 

Shew  that  r^e"*  =  a  is  the  equation  of  such  a  curve. 


U — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  149 

It  may  be  shewn  that,  if  -  =f{6)  be  the  equation  of  a 
given  curve,  that  of  the  locus  of  the  extremity  of  its  polar 
subtangent  is  -  =/'  ( ^  —  9 )  • 


Now,  if  /OT=^ 


/■Kf)  = 


» '"-!)+'  .(.-f) 


6 


a 


=hH^-iy 


,./(o 


Hence,  the  equation  of  the  locus  of  the  extremities  of  the 
polar  subtangents  of  the  curve  r^e"^  =  a,  is 


\        2      m/ 


l^.-('-^i)  =  la, 


representing  a  curve  of  similar  form  to  the  given  one,  but 
with  its  dimensions  varied  in  the  ratio  e  :  m,  and  turned 

through  an  angle  g  ~  ~  • 

V.  If  a  homogeneous  sphere  roll  on  a  perfectly  rough 
plane  under  the  action  of  any  forces  whatever,  of  which  the 
resultant  passes  through  the  centre  of  the  sphere,  the  motion 
of  the  centre  of  gravity  will  be  the  same  as  if  the  plane  were 
smooth  and  all  the  forces  were  reduced  in  a  certam  constant 
ratio ;  and  the  plane  is  the  only  surface  which  possesses  this 
property. 

.  Take  the  plane  as  the  plane  of  xi/,  and  take  axes  fixed  in 
space.  Let  w,,  o),,  0)3  be  the  angular  velocities  about  diameters 
parallel  to  the  axes.  Let  v^,  v^,  v,  be  the  velocities  of  the 
centre,  X,  Y,  Z  the  impressed  forces,  and  F^  G  the  frictions 
resolved  parallel  to  the  axes.  Let  a  —  radius  of  the  sphere. 
Then  the  equations  of  motion  will  be 


150 


SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS 


[Jan.  20, 


idea  „ 

^  dt       ^' 


(1) 


dt 


=  x+i?; 


=  r+G^, 


(2) 


and  since  the  point  of  contact  is  at  rest  we  have  the  geo- 
metrical equations 


V,  —  awj  =  0,  "1 
r„  +  awj  :i=  0.  J 


(3) 


By  differentiating  (3)  and  substituting  from  (2)  we  have 


~     d'  dt  ' 

r,         1^  dvy 
a    at 


Hence  the  equations  of  motion  of  the  centre  are 
dv,  _     a* 


X, 


dt      a'  +  A^ 

These  are  the  very  equations  we  should  have  had  if  the 

plane  had  been  smooth  and  forces  had  been  reduced  in  the 

a' 
ratio  -= — 5, 

a  +/C 

A  rough  plane  is  tlie  only  surface  which  possesses   the 
property  enunciated  in  the  question. 


li-4.] 


AND   RIDERS. 


151 


Let  I,  m,  n  be  the  direction-cosines  of  the  normal  at  any 
point  of  a  surface,  X',  Y',  Z'  the  resolved  parts  of  the  friction, 
and  v^,  i\,  V,  of  the  velocities  of  the  centre  of  gravity  parallel 
to  the  axes.     Then  by  the  question 

Also  the  equations  of  motion  are 

^  -j-^  =  {mZ'—n F')a, 

K^^={nX'  -lZ')a, 

and  the  geometrical  equations  are 

v^  =  {a>,m  -  o>„n)  a,    j 

V,  =  {(oj,  -  (ojn)  a ; 

K^  dm.  dv.        7  dv. 

•    —  — ;  =  nm.  — =  —  at  —^ 


X  at  at 


dt 


dn     ,,  » 

-  ^  a  {Ua^  +  mWy-^-rm^ ; 

dn  ,j      ^  ,        \         ^'"« 


"  dt 
where  /i  is  a  constant,  also 


dl  n      ,  ,        V         dm^ 

-^  {Ita^  +  mtOy  +  na),)  =  fi -^  , 

dm ,,  .  da>y 

dt  ^    '  ■*■  ^^"^  +  »»«.)=  /^  ^  > 


152  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 

Multiply  these  hy  q)„  cd^,  &>„  and  add,  we  get,  since 

where  D,  is  the  resultant  of  the  angular  velocities  tw^,  tw,,,  <»,. 
Now  Iv^  +  mVy  +  wu,  =  0 ; 

dl         dm         dn 

^  J  dl        dm         dn 

by  cross-multiplication,  we  get 
..  j^  =  F{v„n-v,m) 

=  Pa'{(i)^-l  {1(0^  +  mwy  +  nwi)] 

.'.  =  Ql  say ; 

dl     ^,      dm      ^         dn      ^ 

•••jr^^'  ^=^'"'  Tr^^ 

whence  it  easily  follows  that  Z,  m,  n  are  constants. 

vii.  If  the  Earth  be  completely  covered  by  a  sea  of  small 
depth,  prove  that  the  depth  in  latitude  I  is  very  nearly  equal 
to  i/(l— esin^Z)  wliere  //  is  the  depth  at  the  equator,  and 
e  the  ellipticity  of  the  Earth. 

The  surface  of  the  Earth  and  the  surface  of  the  water  rest- 
ing on  the  Earth  will  both  be  surfaces  of  equilibrium,  and 
therefore  will  be  similar  spheroids.  Draw  two  parallel  tan- 
gent planes  to  thfe  Earth  and  to  the  surface  of  the  sea,  the 


1| — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  153 

distance  li  between  these  planes  is  the  depth  of  the  sea  at  the 
point  at  which  the  tangent  planes  were  drawn.  Let  p  be  the 
perpendicular  from  the  centre  on  either  of  these  planes,  then 

by  similar  figures,  the  ratio  -  is  constant.     Let  I  be  the  lati- 
tude of  the  place,  a,  h  the  semi-axes  of  the  spheroid,  then 
/  =  a''cos7+J'8in7 
=  a'(l-2e8in»Z); 
.'.  p  =  a{l  —  e sin'^) ; 

where  H  is  some  constant.  But  putting  ?  =  0,  we  get  h  =  H; 
therefore  H  is  the  depth  of  the  sea  at  the  equator. 

ix.  The  base  of  an  infinite  cylinder  is  the  space  contained 
between  an  equilateral  hyperbola  and  its  asymptotes.  A 
plane  is  drawn  perpendicular  to  the  base,  and  cutting  it  in 
a  straight  line  parallel  to  an  asymptote,  and  the  portion  of 
the  cylinder  between  this  plane  and  its  parallel  asymptote  is 
filled  with  homogeneous  fluid,  under  the  action  of  no  im- 
pressed forces.  The  plane  being  suddenly  removed,  deter- 
mine the  motion  ;  and  prove  that  the  free  surface  of  the  fluid 
will  remain  plane,  and  advance  with  a  uniform  velocity 
proportional  to  »Jisr,  where  ct  is  the  pressure  at  an  infinite 
distance,  which  is  supposed  to  remain  constant  tliroughout 
the  motion. 

Since  the  fluid  starts  from  rest,  the  function  <^  exists,  and 

we  have 

d'<f>  d'6  ^ 
— —  +  =  0. 
dx^      dy^ 

Transforming  to  polar  co-ordinates 

dr\  dr]^  rdS"' 

To  solve  this,  assume 

0  =  ylr"€"^; 


154  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 

or  generally  (j)  can  he  expressed  in  a  series  whose  general 
term  is 

<^=  (^r"  +  -sj  cosn^ (1). 

The  number  of  terms  to  be  taken  and  the  values  of  n 
clearly  depend  on  the  geometrical  conditions  of  the  bounding 
surfaces. 

Now  we  know  that  the  curve  ^  =  constant  cuts  all  the 
lines  of  motion  at  right  angles,  hence  this  curve  must  also 
cut  at  right  angles  the  sides  of  the  containing  vessel.  Let 
r'$'  be  the  co-ordinates  of  any  point  of  the  hyperbola  or 
of  its  asymptotes,  then  we  must  have 

The  hyperbola  and  Its  asymptotes  may  be  included  in  the 
single  equation  r'*  sin  1&  =  2a*,  where  a  has  the  two  values 
a  =  a  and  a  =  0. 

Hence  -r^,  =  —rcot20. 

Again,  from  the  value  of  <f>  we  have 

Hence  equation  (2)  becomes 

X  (^r"-  ^  cosn^  .  tan  2^  =  S  (^r-+  ^  sinw^  ...  (3). 

This  equation  will  evidently  be  satisfied  if  we  take  n  =  2 
and  B  =  0,  hence  we  have 

</)  =  ^r*cos2^ (4). 


1^ 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  155 

This  value  of  <^  determines  the  motion,  and  we  shall  know- 
that  it  is  the  true  value  if  the  other  conditions  of  the  pro- 
blem are  satisfied.  These  conditions  are  that  the  fluid  starts 
from  rest,  and  that  along  the  free  surface  to  be  determined 
from  equation  (4)  the  pressure  should  equal  zero. 

First,  to  determine  the  motion  from  (4) ;  we  have 

hence  the  velocity  of  any  particle  distant  r  from  the  centre 
is  2Ar ;  and  all  the  particles  move  along  hyperbolas  having 
the  axes  for  asymptotes.  Take  any  particle  whose  co- 
ordinates are  x^,  y^  at  time  ^  =  0,  its  co-ordinates  at  any 
other  time  are 


AOt 


X—  XJ£ 


y=y^^ 


hence,  if  two  particles  have  the  same  abscissae  at  the  time 
f=0,  they  always  have  the  same  abscissae,  and  therefore  the 
free  boundary  of  the  fluid  being  originally  a  straight  line, 
it  will  be  always  a  straight  line. 

Secondly,  to  determine  the  pressure  at  any  point ;  we  have 

^-=^-1'-! (^)- 

Let  ^,  7}  be  the  co-ordinates  of  any  point  in  the  free  surface 
of  the  fluid ;  then 

tl  A 


or 


H'^-^'^M'^'-wh'- 


This  by  hypothesis  is  a  straight  line  parallel  to  the  axis  of  rj ; 


156  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS   AND   RIDERS.      [Jan.  20. 

where  A^  is  an  arbitrary  constant ; 

The  pressure  at  infinity  ia  p  =  xr,  and  throughout  tlie  fluid 
we  have 

p=  G-4.A^j? (6); 

.-.  tzr  =  (7, 
hence  along  the  free  surface,  equating  the  two  values  of  C, 

=  fo  +  V<»«> 

where  f^  is  the  abscissa  of  the  free  surface  at  the  time  <  =  0. 
Hence  the  boundary  moves  uniformly  with  a  velocity  V®. 


SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  AND  RIDERS 

FOR  THE  YEAR  EIGHTEEN  HUNDRED  AND  SIXTY. 


MODEBATOBS  : 

Henbt  William  Watson,  M.A.  Trinity  College. 
Edwaed  John  Rooth,  M.A.  St  Peter's  College. 

EXAUINEBS  : 
Pkboival  Fbost,  M.A.  St  John's  College. 
NOBMAN  MACLEOD  Febbebs,  M.A.  Gonville  and  Caius  College. 


Tuesday,  January  3.     9  to  12. 

In  the  amsioers  to  tlie  first  six  questions  the  symbol  —  muM  not  be 
used.  The  only  ahhreviation  admitted  for  tlie  square  described 
on  AB  is  sq.  on  AB,  and  for  the  rectangle  contained  by  AB  and 
CD,  the  rect.  AB,  CD. 

1.  Define  parallel  straight  lines. 

Parallelograms  upon  the  same  base,  and  between  the  same 
parallels,  are  equal  to  one  another. 

If  a  straight  line  DME  be  drawn  through  the  middle  point  M 
of  the  base  BC  of  a  triangle  ABC,  so  as  to  cut  ofi"  equal  parts  AD, 
AE  from  the  sides  AB,  AC,  produced  if  necessary  respectively, 
then  shall  BD  be  equal  to  CE. 

2.  Describe  a  square  that  shall  be  equal  to  a  given  rectilineal 
figura 

Shew  how  to  construct  a  rectangle  which  shall  be  equal  to  a 
given  square;  (1)  when  the  sxun,  and  (2)  when  the  difference  of 
two  adjacent  sides  is  given. 

3.  If,  from  any  point  without  a  circle,  two  straight  lines  be 
drawn,  one  of  which  cuts  the  circle,  and  the  other  touches  it,  the 
rectangle  contaiued  by  the  whole  line  which  cuts  the  circle,  and 


158  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  3, 

the  part  of  it  without  the  circle,  shall  be  equal  to  the  square  on 
the  line  which  touches  it. 

If  two  chords  AB,  AC  be  drawn  from  any  point  ^  of  a  circle, 
and  be  produced  to  J)  and  U,  so  that  the  rectangle  AC,  AE  is 
equal  to  the  rectangle  AB,  AD,  then,  if  C?  be  the  centre  of  the 
circle,  AO  i&  perpendicular  to  DE. 

iv.  Describe  an  isosceles  triangle,  having  each  of  the  angles  at 
the  base  double  of  the  third  angle. 

If  -4  be  the  vertex,  and  BD  the  base  of  the  constructed  triangle, 
D  being  one  of  the  points  of  intersection  of  the  two  circles  em- 
ployed in  the  construction,  and  E  the  other,  and  AE  be  drawn 
meeting  BD  produced  in  F,  prove  that  FAB  is  another  isosceles 
triangle  of  the  same  kind. 

V.  If  the  outward  angle  of  a  triangle,  made  by  producing  one 
of  its  sides,  be  divided  into  two  equal  angles  by  a  straight  line 
which  also  cuts  the  base  produced ;  the  segments  between  the 
dividing  line  and  the  extremities  of  the  base  have  the  same  ratio 
which  the  other  sides  of  the  triangle  have  to  one  another. 

If  the  two  sides,  containing  the  angle  through  which  the  bisect- 
ing line  is  drawn,  be  equal,  interpret  the  result  of  the  proposition. 

Prove,  from  this  proposition  and  the  preceding,  that  the  straight 
lines,  bisecting  one  angle  of  a  triangle  internally  and  the  other  two 
externally  pass  through  the  same  point. 

vi.  If  two  straight  lines  be  cut  by  parallel  planes,  they  shall 
be  cut  in  the  same  ratio. 

If  three  straight  lines,  which  do  not  all  lie  in  one  plane,  be  cut 
in  the  same  ratio  by  three  planes,  two  of  which  are  parallel,  shew  / 
that  the  third  will  be  parallel  to  the  other  two,  if  its  intersections 
with  the  three  straight  lines  are  not  all  in  one  straight  line. 

vii.  Define  a  parabola  ;  and  prove,  from  the  definition,  that  it 
cannot  be  cut  by  a  straight  line  in  more  than  two  points. 

Prove  that,  if  the  tangent  at  P  meet  the  directrix  in  D,  DSP 
is  a  right  angle. 

viii.  If  /*  be  a  point  in  an  ellipse  of  which  the  foci  are  «S^and  H, 
the  straight  line,  which  bisects  the  angle  between  SP  produced  and 
IIP,  meets  the  ellipse  in  no  point  but  P. 

P,  Q  are  points  in  two  confocal  ellipses,  at  which  the  line  join- 
ing the  common  foci  subtends  equal  angles ;  prove  that  the  tangents 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  159 

at  P,  Q  are  inclined  at  an  angle  which  is  equal  to  the  angle  sub- 
tended by  PQ  at  either  focus. 

ix.  Assundng  the  property  of  the  tangent  to  an  ellipse  enun- 
ciated in  8,  prove  that  *ST.  UZ=BC. 

If  a  circle,  passing  through  Y  and  Z,  touch  the  major  axis  in 
Q,  and  that  diameter  of  the  circle,  which  passes  through  Q^  meet 
the  tangent  in  P,  then  PQ  =  BG. 

10.  Prove  that,  if  in  any  ellipse  any  diameter  CD  be  drawn 
parallel  to  the  tangent  at  the  extremity  of  any  other  diameter  CP, 
then  CP  will  also  be  parallel  to  the  tangent  at  the  extremity  of  CD. 

If  PG,  the  normal  at  -P,  cut  the  major  axis  in  G,  and  if  DR^ 
PN  be  the  ordinates  of  D  and  P,  prove  that  the  triangles  PGN, 
DEC  are  similar;  and  thence  deduce  that  PG  bears  a  constant 
ratio  to  CD. 

11.  Define  an  asymptote  to  an  hyperbola;  and  prove  that,  if 
from  any  point  in  the  curve  straight  lines  be  drawn  parallel  to  and 
terminated  by  the  asymptotes,  their  rectangle  is  invariable. 

In  an  hyperbola,  supposing  the  two  asymptotes  and  one  point 
of  the  curve  to  be  given  in  position,  shew  how  to  construct  the 
curve ;  and  find  the  position  of  the  foci. 

12.  If  a  right  cone  be  cut  by  a  plane  which  is  not  parallel  to 
a  line  in  the  surface,  and  which  meets  only  one  sheet  of  the  cone, 
the  section  will  be  an  ellipse. 

Given  a  right  cone  and  a  point  within  it,  there  are  but  two 
sections  which  have  this  point  for  focus ;  and  the  planes  of  these 
sections  make  equal  angles  with  the  straight  line  joining  the  given 
point  and  the  vertex  of  the  cone. 


Tuesday,  January  3.     1^  to  4. 

1.  The  sum  of  £177  is  to  be  divided  among  15  men,  20  women, 
and  30  children,  in  such  a  manner  that  a  man  and  a  child  may 
together  receive  tis  much  as  two  women,  and  all  the  women  may 
together  receive  £60;  what  will  they  respectively  receive  1 

2.  A  wine  merchant  buys  12  dozen  of  port  at  84».  |)er  dozen, 
and  60  dozen  more  at  48«.  per  dozen ;  he  mixes  them,  and  sells  the 
mixture  at  72».  per  dozen;  what  profit  per'cent.  does  he  realize  on 
his  original  outlay  I 


1 60  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  3, 

3.  Assuming  that  a"  is  defined  by  the  equation  a",  a"  =  a"*" 
for  all  values  of  m  and  n,  and  that  a'  =  a,  interpret  the  expression 
o",  when  m  is  any  commensurable  quantity,  positive  or  negative. 
Extend  your  mode  of  interpretation,  so  as  to  assign  a  meaning  to 
such  a  symbol  as  a^'. 

4.  Solve  the  equations, 

x+2     x+3 

-3-^-2-='' <^^ 

2x  +  {x*-ay     2x-(x*-ay  _  3 
2x-{x'-ay^2x  +  (x*-ay~2 ^  '' 

x'  —  yz  =  a',  i/'-zx  =  b'',  s?-xy  =  <^ (3). 

5.  Explain  the  terms  permutation  and  combination;  and 
find  the  number  of  permutations  of  n  things  taken  r  together. 

If  ^P  represent  the  number  of  permutations  of  n  things  taken 
r  together,  and  a^,  a^,  a^---  be  the  successive  terms  of  a  descending 
arithmetical  progression,  of  which  the  common  difierence  is  d, 
prove  that 

P     P         P=   P 

6.  Prove  the  Binomial  Theorem  for  a  positive  integral  value 
of  the  index. 

Prove  that  2"-^2"-'  +  '^^— ^^  2"-»-  ...  +  (-  1)"=  1. 

vii.  Define  a  logarithm ;  and  prove  that  log„iV^=  ^og Jb .  log^iV; 
and,  given  that  log,^2  =  -30103,  find  log„50. 

viii.     Define  the  principal  trigonometrical  i-atios  ;  and  trace  the 

,  .      .         ,.  sin  (tt  cos  6)         /,        .      -. 

changes  m  sign  01        ;  -  .     .' ,  as  ^  vanes  from  0  to  tt. 
^  ^         cos  (tt  sin  d)  * 

ix.  Prove  the  formula  sin  {A  +  B)  =  sin  A  cos  B  +  cos  A  sin  j5, 
A  and  B  being  each  less  than  a  right  angle ;  and  assuming  its 
truth  when  the  values  of  A  and  B  are  unlimited,  deduce  the  ex- 
pression for  cos  {A  —  B). 

X.     Prove  that 

.     .      .    J,     ^  .    A+B       A-B 
sin  .4  +  sm  jd  =  2  sin  — _—  cos  — ^ — , 
^  2 

and    sinS  (ii  -  16")  =  4  cos  (.4  -  46")co8  (.4  +  15*)  sin (.4 -  15"), 


1^ — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  161 

and  find  sin  A  and  sin  B  from  the  equations 

a  sin^A  +  b  s,\n°B  =  c, 

a  sin  2A  —b  sin  2B  =  0. 

xL     Prove,  a  priori,  that  sin  A,  when  expressed  in  terms  of 

A 
sin  — ,  has  two  equal  values  of  opposite  signs ;  and  that  cos  A, 

A 
when  expressed  in  terms  of  cos  -^ ,  has  only  one  value ;  and  give  a 

geometrical  illustration- 

xiL     Prove  that,  when  Q  is  less  than  ^ ,  sin  B,  6,  and  tan  6  are 

in  order  of  magnitude,  and  that  they  vanish  in  a  ratio  of  equality. 

A  railway  passenger  seated  in  one  comer  of  the  carriage  looks 
out  of  the  windows  at  the  further  end  and  observes  that  a  star 
near  the  horizon  is  tx-aversing  these  windows  in  the  direction  of 
the  train's  motion  and  that  it  is  obscured  by  the  partition  between 
the  comer  window  on  his  own  side  of  the  carriage  and  the  middle 
window  while  the  ti'ain  is  moving  through  the  seventh  part  of  a 
mile.  Shew  that  the  train  is  on  a  curve  the  concavity  of  which  is 
directed  towards  the  star,  and  which,  if  it  be  circular,  has  a  I'adius 
of  nearly  three  miles ;  the  length  of  the  carriage  being  seven  feet 
and  the  breadth  of  the  partition  four  inches. 

xiii  If  a,  6,  and  B  be  given,  shew  under  what  circumstances 
there  will  be  two  triangles  satisiying  the  conditions  of  the  problem. 

Prove  that  the  circles  circumscribing  both  triangles  are  equal 
in  magnitude,  and  that  the  distance  between  their  centres  is 

^(i'cosec'^-a*). 


"Wednesday,  January  4.     9  to  12. 

1.  Enunciate  the  proposition  of  the  parallelogram  of  forces; 
and,  assuming  its  truth  for  the  magnitude,  prove  it  also  for  the 
direction,  of  the  resultant. 

2.  When  three  forces  acting  at  a  point  are  in  equilibrium,  each 
force  is  proportional  to  the  sine  of  the  angle  between  the  other  two. 

Two  equal  particles,  eawih  attracting  with  a  force  varying  di- 
rectly as  the  distance,  are  situated  at  the  opposite  extremities  of  a 
diameter  of  a  horizontal  circle,  on  whose  cii-cumference  a  small 

M 


162  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [/an.  4, 

smooth  ring  is  capable  of  sliding;  pi'ove  that  the  ring  will  be  kept 
at  rest  in  any  position  under  the  attraction  of  the  particles. 

3.  "When  three  forces,  acting  in  one  plane  on  a  i-igid  body 
produce  equilibrium,  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  either 
pair  about  any  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  the  third  is  zero. 

Two  equal  heavy  j)articles  are  situated  at  the  extremities  of  the 
latus  rectum  of  a  parabolic  arc  without  weight,  which  is  placed 
with  its  vertex  in  contact  with  that  of  an  equal  parabola,  whose 
axis  is  vertical  and  concavity  downwards ;  prove  that  the  parabolic 
arc  may  be  turned  through  any  angle  without  disturbing  its  equi- 
librium, provided  no  sliding  be  possible  between  the  curves. 

4.  Find  the  position  of  equilibrium  when  a  common  balance 
is  loaded  with  given  unequal  weights. 

If  the  tongue  of  the  balance  be  very  slightly  out  of  adjustment, 
prove  that  the  true  weight  of  a  body  is  the  arithmetic  mean  of  its 
apparent  weights,  when  weighed  in  the  opposite  scales. 

5.  Prove  that  every  rigid  body  has  one  and  only  one  centre 
of  gi'avity. 

In  the  figure  of  Euclid,  Book  i.  Prop.  47,  if  the  perimeters  of 
the  squares  be  regarded  as  physical  lines  uniform  throughout,  prove 
that  the  figure  will  balance  about  the  middle  point  of  the  hypo- 
thenuse  with  that  line  horizontal,  the  lines  of  construction  having 
no  weight. 

6.  Enunciate  the  principal  laws  of  statical  friction. 

A  uniform  heavy  rod,  having  one  extremity  attached  to  a  fixed 
point,  about  which  it  is  free  to  move  in  all  directions,  passes  over 
the  circumference  of  a  rough  ring  whose  centre  is  at  the  fixed  point 
and  whose  plane  is  inclined  at  a  given  angle  to  the  horizon ;  find 
the  limiting  position  of  equilibrium. 

vii.  Explain  how  uniform  velocity  and  uniform  acceleration  are 
measured. 

A  point,  moving  with  a  unifonn  acceleration,  describes  20  feet 
in  the  half-second  which  elapses  after  the  first  second  of  its  motion ; 
compare  its  acceleration  witli  that  of  a  falling  heavy  particle;  and 
give  its  numerical  measure,  taking  a  minute  as  the  unit  of  time, 
and  a  mile  as  that  of  space. 

viiL  Describe  any  experiment  by  which  it  is  shewn,  that  a  force 
acting  on  a  given  i)article,  produces  an  acceleration,  proportional 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  163 

to  the  statical  measure  of  the  force.     Hence  deduce  a  definition  of 
mass. 

ix.  A  heavy  particle  slides  down  a  smooth  inclined  plane  of 
given  height;  prove  that  the  time  of  its  descent  varies  as  the 
secant  of  the  inclination  of  the  plane  to  the  vertical. 

X.  Prove  that  the  path  of  a  projectile  in  a  vacuum  is  a  para- 
bola. 

A  heavy  particle  is  projected  from  a  given  point  with  a  given 
velocity  so  as  to  pass  through  another  given  point ;  prove  that,  in 
general,  there  will  be  two  parabolic  paths  which  the  particle  may 
describe;  and  give  a  geometrical  construction  to  determine  their 
foci.  Also  find  the  locus  of  the  second  point  in  order  that  there 
may  be  only  one  parabolic  path. 

xi.  Two  imperfectly  elastic  balls  of  given  masses,  moving  in 
the  same  directions  with  given  velocities,  impinge  directly  on  one 
another ;  determine  their  velocities  after  impact. 

A  series  of  perfectly  elastic  balls  are  arranged  in  the  same 
straight  line,  one  of  them  impinges  directly  on  the  next,  and  so 
on ;  prove  that,  if  their  masses  form  a  geometrical  progression  of 
which  the  common  ratio  is  2,  their  velocities  after  impact  will  form 
a  geometrical  progi'ession  of  which  the  common  ratio  is  |. 

xii.  Define  the  cycloid ;  and  prove  that,  if  a  particle  oscillate 
in  a  cycloid,  the  time  of  an  oscillation  will  be  independent  of  the 
arc  of  vibration. 


Wednesday,  January  4.     1|  to  4. 

1 .  Explain  what  is  meant  by  "  the  pressure  of  a  fluid  referred 
to  a  unit  of  area."  Prove  that  the  pressure  at  any  depth  z  below 
the  surface  of  a  homogeneous  fluid  of  density  p,  contained  in  a 
vessel  of  any  form,  may  be  found  from  the  formula  p  -  gpz  +  U, 
where  11  is  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere. 

A  uniform  tube  is  bent  into  the  form  of  a  parabola,  and  placed 
with  its  vertex  downwards  and  axis  vertical  :  supposing  any 
quantities  of  two  fluids  of  densities  p,  p  to  be  poured  into  it,  and 
r,  r  to  be  the  distances  of  the  two  free  surfaces  respectively,  from 
the  focus,  then  the  distance  of  the  common  surface  from  the  focus 

wiiibe^^^::^:^. 
p-p 

m2 


164  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  4, 

2.  The  whole  fluid  pressure  on  a  surface  immersed  in  a  fluid 
is  equal  to  the  weight  of  a  column  of  fluid,  having  for  base  the 
area  of  the  surface  immersed  and  for  height  the  depth  of  the  centre 
of  gravity  of  the  surface  below  the  surface  of  the  fluid.  In  what 
case  will  this  give  the  resultant  pressure  1 

A  parallelogram  is  immersed  in  a  fluid  with  one  side  in  the 
surface ;  shew  how  to  draw  a  line  from  one  extremity  of  this  side 
dividing  the  parallelogram  into  two  parts  on  which  the  pressui-es 
are  equal. 

3.  A  heavy  homogeneous  body  being  wholly  immersed  in  a 
fluid;  shew  how  to  find  the  magnitude  and  line  of  action  of  the 
force  required  to  keep  it  in  any  given  position. 

A  heavy  hollow  right  cone,  closed  by  a  base  without  weight,  is 
immersed  in  a  fluid,  find  the  force  that  will  sustain  it  with  its  axis 
horizontal. 

4.  State  the  law  that  connects  the  temperature,  density,  and 
elastic  force  of  any  gas. 

If  a  quantity  of  heavy  elastic  fluid  of  uniform  temperature  be 
placed  in  a  vessel,  prove  that,  if  it  be  divided  into  indefinitely  thin 
horizontal  strata  of  equal  thickness,  the  densities  of  the  strata  will 
be  in  geometrical  progression. 

A  given  weight  of  heavy  elastic  fluid  of  uniform  temperature  is 
confined  in  a  smooth  vertical  cylinder  by  a  piston  of  given  weight; 
shew  how  to  find  the  volume  of  the  fluid. 

5.  Describe  the  action  of  the  Fire-engine;  and  explain  the 
Tise  of  the  air  vessel. 

If  yi  be  the  area  of  the  section  of  each  pump,  I  the  length  of  tlie 
stroke,  n  the  number  of  strokes  per  minute,  £  the  area  of  the  hose, 
find  the  mean  velocity  with  which  the  water  rushes  out. 

6.  Explain  the  terms  specific  gravity  and  density ;  and  shew 
how  to  compare  the  specific  gravities  of  two  fluids  by  weighing  the 
same  body  in  each. 

Supposing  some  light  material,  whose  density  is  p,  to  be 
weighed  by  means  of  weights  of  density  p,  the  density  of  the 
atmosphere  when  the  barometer  stands  at  30  inches  being  unity ; 
shew  that,  if  the  mercury  in  the  barometer  fall  one  inch,  the  ma- 

terial  will  appear  to  be  altered  by  ; ^,„n, — sttt  of  its  former 

(p-l)(30p-29) 

■weight.     Will  it  appear  to  weigh  more  or  less  1 


1^ — 4.]  AND  RIDERS.  166 

vii.  A  small  convergent  pencil  of  light  is  incident  directly  on 
a  concave  spherical  mirror;  investigate  the  relation  between  the 
distances  of  the  conjugate  foci  from  the  surface. 

If  the  convergence  be  measured  by  the  angle  of  the  cone  of 
rays,  prove  that  the  convergence  of  the  reflected  is  greater  than 
that  of  the  incident  pencil  by  a  constant  quantity. 

viiL  Find  the  number  of  images  of  a  bright  point,  which  can 
be  formed  by  reflections  at  two  plane  miiTors  inclined  at  an  angle 
■which  is  contained  an  exact  number  of  times  in  two  right  angles. 

ix.  Find  the  deviation  of  a  ray  refracted  tkrough  a  prism  in 
a  plane  perpendicular  to  its  edge. 

A  bright  point  is  at  the  bottom  of  still  water,  and  an  eye  is 
vertically  above  it,  at  the  same  distance  from  the  surface ;  if  a 
small  isosceles  prism,  of  which  the  refi-active  angle  i  is  nearly  two 
right  angles,  be  interposed  so  as  to  have  its  base  in  contact  with 
the  water,  prove  that  the  angular  distance  between  the  images  of 

the  point  in  the  two  faces  is    ,     -  (tt  —  t),  /x',  fi  being  the  refractive 

indices  for  water  and  for  the  prism,  respectively. 

X.  Investigate  the  position  of  the  geometrical  focus  of  a  pencil 
of  i-ays  directly  refracted  through  a  concave  lens  of  focal  length/! 

Prove  that,  as  the  focus  of  an  incident  convergent  pencil  moves 
from  the  lens,  the  distance  between  the  conjugate  foci  always  in- 
creases, except  when  the  focus  of  incident  rays  passes  between  the 
distances  y  and  2/"  from  the  lens. 

xi  Describe  the  eye,  regarded  as  an  optical  instrument ;  illus- 
trating the  description  by  di-awing  pencils  from  any  point  of  an 
object  not  in  the  axis,  when  seen  (1)  distinctly  and  (2)  indistinctly. 

If  the  focal  length  of  a  convex  lens  be  3  inches,  and  the  shortest 
distance  of  distinct  vision  be  6  inches,  prove  that,  when  the  eye  is 
always  placed  so  as  to  see  distinctly  under  the  greatest  possible 
angle,  the  lens  magnifies  when  within  6  inches  of  the  object,  and 
diminishes  at  greater  distances. 

xii.  Trace  the  course  of  an  oblique  pencil  of  rays  from  a  star 
to  the  eye  through  the  common  Astronomical  Telescope;  and  cal- 
culate the  magnifying  power,  when  the  telescope  is  adjusted  for 
vision  by  rays  diverging  from  a  given  distance  from  the  eye-glass. 

If  the  object-glass  be  divided,  so  as  to  form  two  semicircular 
lenses,  and  these  be  displaced  along  the  line  of  division,  what  must 


1G6  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [JuJl.  4, 

be  the  displacement  of  the  centres  in  order  that  a  double  star  may 
appear  as  three  stars  t 


Thursday,  January  5.     9  to  12. 

L  Thrke  concentric  circles  are  drawn  in  the  same  plane. 
Draw  a  straight  line,  such  that  one  of  its  segments  between  the 
inner  and  outer  circumference  may  be  bisected  at  one  of  the  points 
in  which  the  line  meets  the  middle  circumference. 

ii.  A  quadrilateral  circximscribes  an  ellipse.  Prove  that  either 
pair  of  opposite  sides  subtends  supplementary  angles  at  either  focus. 

iii.  A  polygon  of  a  given  number  of  sides  circumscribes  an 
ellipse.  Prove  that,  when  its  area  is  a  minimum,  any  side  is  par- 
allel to  the  line  joining  the  points  of  contact  of  the  two  adjacent 
sides. 

4.  If  the  tangent  at  any  point  P  of  an  hyperbola  cut  an  asymp- 
tote in  Tf  and  if  SF  cut  the  same  asymptote  in  Q,  then  aS'^  =  QT. 

5.  Prove  that  the  sum  of  the  products  of  the  first  n  natural 
numbers  taken  two  and  two  together  is 

{n-l)n{n  +  l){Sn  +  2) 
24  • 

6.  The  centres  of  the  escribed  circles  of  a  triangle  must  lie 
without  the  circumscribing  circle,  and  cannot  be  equidistant  from 
it  unless  the  triangle  be  equilateral. 

vii.  If  perpendiculars  be  drawn  from  the  angles  of  an  equila- 
teral triangle  upon  any  tangent  to  the  inscribed  circle,  prove  that 
the  sum  of  the  reciprocals  of  those  perpendiculars  which  fall  upon 
the  same  side  of  the  tangent  is  equal  to  the  reciprocal  of  that  per- 
pendicular which  falls  upon  the  opposite  side. 

viii.  Four  equal  particles  are  mutually  repulsive,  the  law  of 
force  being  that  of  the  inverse  distance.  If  they  be  joined  together 
by  four  inextensible  strings  of  given  length  so  as  to  form  a  quadri- 
lateral, prove  that,  when  there  is  equilibrium,  the  four  particles 
lie  in  a  circle. 

9.  A  heavy  rod  is  placed  in  any  manner  resting  on  two  points 
of  a  rough  horizontal  curve,  and  a  string  attached  to  the  middle 
point  C  of  the  chord  is  pulled  in  any  direction  so  that  the  rod  is 
on  the  point  of  motion.     Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  intersection 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  167 

of  the  string  with  the  directions  of  the  frictions  at  the  points  of 
support  is  an  arc  of  a  circle  and  a  part  of  a  sti-aight  line. 

Find  also  how  the  force  must  be  applied  that  its  intersections 
with  the  frictions  may  trace  out  the  remainder  of  the  circle. 

X.  A.  rigid  wire  without  appreciable  mass  is  formed  into  an 
arc  of  an  equiangular  spiral  and  carries  a  small  heavy  particle  fixed 
in  its  pole.  If  the  convexity  of  the  wire  be  placed  in  contact  with 
a  perfectly  rough  horizontal  plane,  prove  that  the  point  of  contact 
with  the  plane  will  move  with  uniform  acceleration,  and  find  tliis 
acceleration. 

11.  If  two  parabolas  be  placed  with  their  axes  vertical,  vertices 
downwards,  and  foci  coincident,  prove  that  there  are  three  chords 
down  wliich  the  time  of  descent  of  a  particle  under  the  action  of 
gravity  from  one  curve  to  the  other  is  a  minimum,  and  that  one  of 
these  is  the  principal  diameter  and  the  other  two  make  an  angle  of 
60°  with  it  on  either  side. 

12.  If  a  particle  slide  along  a  chord  of  a  circle  under  the 
action  of  a  centre  of  force  varying  as  the  distance,  the  time  will 
be  the  same  for  all  chords  provided  they  terminate  at  either  ex- 
tremity of  the  diameter  through  the  centre  of  force. 

13.  A  hollow  cone  floats  with  its  vertex  downwards  in  a 
cylindrical  vessel  containing  watei\  Determine  the  equal  quan- 
tities of  water  that  may  be  poured  into  the  cone  and  into  the 
cylinder  that  the  position  of  the  cone  in  space  may  be  unaltered. 

xiv.  A  hemispherical  bowl  is  filled  to  the  brim  with  fluid,  and 
a  rod  specifically  heavier  than  the  fluid  rests  with  one  end  in  con- 
tact with  the  concave  surface  of  the  bowl  and  passes  over  the  rim 
of  the  bowl,  find  an  equation  for  determining  the  position  of  equi- 
librium. 

XV.  A  ray  of  light  passes  through  a  medium  of  which  the 
refractive  index  at  any  point  is  inversely  proportional  to  the  dis- 
tance of  that  point  from  a  cei*tain  plane.  Prove  that  the  path  of 
the  ray  is  a  circular  arc  of  which  the  centre  is  in  the  above- 
mentioned  plane. 

16.  A  small  bead  is  projected  with  any  velocity  along  a  cir- 
cular wire  under  the  action  of  a  force  varying  inversely  as  the 
fifth  power  of  the  distance  from  a  centre  of  force  situated  in  the 
circumference.     Prove  that  the  pressure  on  the  wire  is  constant. 

17.  A  bi-ight  spot  of  white  light  is  viewed  through  a  right 


168  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  5, 

cone  of  glass  the  vertex  of  which  is  pointed  directly  towards  the 
spot.  Describe  the  appearances  seen  ;  and  prove  that,  if  a  section 
of  the  locus  of  the  images  corresponding  to  different  values  of  the 
refractive  index  be  made  by  a  plane  through  the  axis  of  the  cone, 
it  will  be  a  rectangular  hyperbola. 

xviii.  An  elastic  string  passes  through  a  smooth  straight  tube 
whose  length  is  the  natural  length  of  the  string.  It  is  then  pulled 
out  equally  at  both  ends  until  its  length  is  increased  by  v2  times 
its  original  length.  Two  equal  perfectly  elastic  balls  are  attached 
to  the  extremities  and  projected  with  equal  velocities  at  right 
angles  to  the  string  and  so  as  to  impinge  upon  each  other.  Prove 
that  the  time  of  impact  is  independent  of  the  velocity  of  projection, 
and  that  after  impact  each  ball  will  move  in  a  straight  line,  as- 
suming that  the  tension  of  the  string  is  proportional  to  the  exten- 
sion throughout  the  motion. 

xix.  A  particle  is  projected  along  a  chord  of  an  ellipse  from 
any  point  in  the  curve,  and  when  it  again  meets  the  ellipse  has  a 
certain  impulse  towards  the  centre  of  the  ellipse  impressed  upon 
it,  causing  it  again  to  describe  a  chord,  and  so  on  for  any  number 
of  times.  Prove  that,  if  after  a  given  number  of  such  impulses, 
the  pai-ticle  pass  through  another  given  point  on  the  circumference 
of  the  curve,  the  polygonal  area  so  described  about  the  centre  is 
a  maximum,  when  the  successive  chords  are  described  in  equal 
times. 


Thursday,  January  5.     1  to  4. 

1.  Enukciate  and  prove  Newton's  second  Lemma.  /." 
Hence  prove  that  two  quantities  may  vanish  in  an  infinite 

ratio  to  one  another;  and  explain  accurately  what  is  meant  by 
this  phrase. 

2.  Enunciate  and  prove  Newton's  tenth  Lemma. 

If  the  curve  employed  in  the  proof  of  this  lemma  be  an  arc  of 
a  parabola,  the  axis  of  which  is  perpendicular  to  the  straight  line 
on  which  time  is  measured,  prove  that  the  accelerating  effect  of 
the  force  will  vary  as  the  distance  from  the  axis  of  the  parabola, 

3.  If  particles  describe  different  circles  with  uniform  velocity, 
their  accelerations  tend  to  the  centres  of  the  circles ;  and  are  to 
each  other  as  the  squares  of  arcs  described  in  the  same  time, 
divided  by  the  radii  of  the  circles. 


1 — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  169 

One  circle  rolls  uniformly  within  another  of  twice  its  radius  ; 
prove  that  the  resultant  acceleration  of  a  particle  situated  on  the 
circumference  of  the  rolling  circle  tends  to  the  centre  of  the  fixed 
circle,  and  varies  as  the  distance  from  that  centre. 

iv.  Prove  that  the  accelerating  effect  of  a  force,  under  the 
action  of  which  a  body  moves  in  a  central  orbit,  is  measured  by 

OR 
the  ultimate  value  of  2  -  ^  ,  QR  being  the  subtense,  parallel  to 

the  direction  of  the  force  at  P,  of  the  aitj  PQ  described  in  the 
timer. 

Deduce  the  equation  F*  =  ^F .  PV. 

Prove  that,  when  a  body  moves  along  a  smooth  tube  under 
the  action  of  any  force  tending  to  a  point  and  varying  as  the  dis- 
tance from  the  point,  the  difference  of  the  squares  of  the  velocities 
at  the  beginning  and  end  of  an  arc  varies  as  the  difference  of  the 
squares  of  the  distances  of  the  extremities  of  the  arc  from  the 
fixed  point. 

V.  Find  the  law  of  force  tending  to  the  centre  of  an  ellipse, 
under  the  action  of  which  a  body  can  describe  the  ellipse. 

A  body  is  revolving  in  an  ellipse  under  the  action  of  such  a 
force,  and  when  it  ari'ives  at  the  extremity  of  the  major  axis,  the 
force  ceases  to  act  until  the  body  has  moved  through  a  distance 
equal  to  the  semi-minor  axis,  it  then  acts  for  a  quainter  of  the 
periodic  time  in  the  ellipse ;  prove  that,  if  it  again  ceases  to  act 
for  the  same  time  as  before,  the  body  will  have  arrived  at  the  other 
extremity  of  the  major  axis. 

vi.  When  a  body  revolves  in  an  ellipse  under  the  action  of  a 
force  tending  to  the  focus,  find  the  velocity  at  any  point  of  its 
orbit,  and  the  [leriodic  time. 

If  on  arriving  at  the  extremity  of  the  minor  axis,  the  force 
has  its  law  changed,  so  that  it  varies  as  the  distance,  the  magni- 
tude at  that  point  remaining  the  same,  the  periodic  time  will  be 
unaltered,  and  the  sum  of  the  new  axes  is  to  their  difference  as 
the  sum  of  the  old  axes  to  the  distance  between  the  foci. 

vii.  Explain  the  changes  in  the  length  of  days  in  the  north 
temperate  zone,  during  the  passage  of  the  Earth  from  Libra  to 
Aries. 

Describe  the  position  of  the  Earth  in  its  orbit  to-day,  and  our 
position  on  it  at  three  o'clock  this  afternoon  with  reference  to  the 
ecliptic  and  the  position  of  the  Sun. 


170  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jaw.  5, 

viii.  Describe  the  apparent  path  of  the  Moon  with  reference  to 
the  Earth  and  the  Sun,  shewing  by  a  figure  the  direction  of  the 
curvature  of  its  absolute  path;  and  shew  how  many  Lunar  Eclipses 
can  occur  in  a  year. 

What  distance  of  the  Moon  would,  with  the  same  inclination 
of  the  orbit,  have  ensured  an  eclipse  at  every  opposition  1 

ix.  Explain  the  use  of  the  reading  microscope  in  the  mural 
circle ;  and  prove  that,  when  a  pair  of  microscopes  is  used,  the 
error  arising  from  want  of  perfect  coincidence  in  the  centres  of 
rotation  and  gi-aduation,  will  be  eliminated  if  the  axes  of  the  mi- 
croscopes be  coincident. 

Shew  how  a  double  observation  is  made  with  the  mural  circle. 

10.  Explain  the  origin  of  the  tides;  and  prove  that,  suppos- 
ing the  Earth  to  be  accurately  a  sphere  covered  with  water,  when 
it  is  high  water  at  a  given  point  on  the  surface  of  the  glf>be,  it  is 
also  high  water  at  the  antipodes  of  that  point.  Prove  that  the 
highest  spring  tides  will  take  place  at  the  time  of  an  eclipse. 

1 1 .  Define  a  tropical,  a  sidereal,  and  an  anomalistic  year ; 
stating  to  which  of  the  three  the  average  length  of  a  civil  year 
is  adjusted,  and  why. 

Explain  the  statement,  that  the  perihelion  of  the  Earth's  orbit 
completes  a  tropical  revolution  in  about  20,000  years,  and  a  side- 
real revolution  in  about  100,000. 

12.  Define  Parallax  ;  stating  how  the  position  of  a  heavenly 
body  is  afiected  by  it.  In  what  positions  of  a  star  are  its  right 
ascension  and  declination  respectively  unafiected  by  it?  State 
also  which  of  the  heavenly  bodies  is  most  affected  by  it,  and  in 
what  position  it  is  so. 

Monday,  January  16.     9  to  12. 

1.  Investigate  the  conditions  necessary  and  sufficient  for  the 
equilibrium  of  a  rigid  body,  acted  on  by  any  number  of  forces  in 
any  directions  in  space. 

A  uniform  heavy  ellipsoid  has  a  given  point  in  contact  with  a 
smooth  horizontal  plane.  Find  the  plane  of  the  couple  necessaiy 
to  keep  it  at  rest  in  this  j)osition ;  and  investigate  its  equation 
referred  to  the  principal  axes  of  the  ellipsoid. 

2.  If  a  heavy  rigid  body  rest  upon  more  than  three  immove- 
able points  of  support,  prove  that  the  pressure  at  each  jioint  is 
indeterminate. 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  171 

An  oblong  table  has  the  legs  at  the  four  comers  alike  in  all 
respects  and  slightly  compressible.  Supposing  the  floor  and  top 
of  the  table  to  be  perfectly  rigid,  find  the  pressures  on  the  legs, 
when  the  table  is  loaded  in  any  given  manner,  supposing  the  com- 
pression to  be  proportional  to  the  pressure ;  and  prove  that,  when 
the  resultant  weight  lies  in  one  of  ftmr  straight  lines  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  table,  the  table  is  supported  by  three  legs  only. 

3.  Find  the  equations  of  eqiulibrium  of  a  perfectly  flexible 
uniform  inextensible  string  when  acted  on  by  any  given  forces. 

If  a  small  rough  heavy  bead  be  strung  upon  such  a  string,  and 
the  string  be  suspended  from  two  points  and  acted  on  by  gravity 
only,  write  down  the  equations  for  determining  within  what  por- 
tion of  the  string  it  is  possible  for  the  bead  to  rest. 

iv.  Prove  that,  when  any  number  of  particles Pj,  P^,...P^  are 
moving  in  any  manner,  the  acceleration  of  P^  is  the  resultant  of 
the  accelerations  of  P^  relative  to  -?*„_,,  of  P_^_,  relative  to  P,_^,... 
of  /*j  relative  to  /*„  and  of  P^. 

A  particle  is  attached  by  a  rod  without  mass,  to  the  extremity 
of  another  rod,  n  times  as  long,  which  revolves  in  a  given  manner 
about  the  other  extremity,  the  whole  motion  taking  place  in  a 
horizontal  plane.  If  6  be  the  inclination  of  the  rods,  w  the  an- 
gular velocity  of  the  second  rod  at  the  time  t,  prove  that 

d  6     d<3i        (dm        -       9  .    \     ~. 

-r-i  +   -y-+W(-y-C0S^  +  O)   Sm  5  )  =  0. 

dt       dt         \dt  ) 

V.  A  bead  is  capable  of  free  motion  on  a  fine  smooth  wire  in 
the  form  of  any  plane  curve,  and  is  acted  on  by  given  forces ;  com- 
pare the  pressure  on  the  wire  with  the  weight  of  the  bead. 

If  the  wire  be  a  horizontal  circle,  radius  o,  and  the  bead  be 
acted  on  only  by  the  tension  of  an  elastic  string,  the  natural  length 
of  which  is  a,  fixed  to  a  point  in  the  plane  of  the  circle  at  distance 
2a  from  its  centre,  find  the  condition  that  the  bead  may  just 
revolve  ;  and  prove  that  in  this  case  the  pressures  at  the  extremi- 
ties of  the  diameter  through  the  fixed  point  will  be  twice  and 
four  times  the  weight  of  the  bead  if  that  weight  be  such  as  to 
stretch  the  string  to  double  its  natural  length. 

vi.  Find  the  nature  of  the  orbit,  when  a  particle  moves  under 
the  action  of  a  centitd  force  which  varies  inversely  as  the  cube  of 
the  distance. 

If  a  particle,  acted  on  by  a  central  force,  and  moving  in  a 
resisting  medium  in  which  the  retardation  =  k  (vel.)*  describe  an 


172  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

equiangular  spiral,  the  pole  of  which  is  the  centre  of  force ;  prove 
that  the  central  force 

1       ?5L 
oc  -je~<^*, 

where  a  is  the  angle  of  the  spiral. 

vii.  If  an  incompressible  fluid  be  in  equilibrium  under  the 
action  of  any  forces,  prove  that  the  direction  of  the  resultant  force 
at  any  point  is  perpendicular  to  the  surface  of  equal  pressure  at 
that  point. 

If  the  particles  of  a  mass  of  fluid  rotating  uniformly  about  a 
fixed  axis,  attract  one  another  according  to  such  a  law  that  the 
surfaces  of  equal  pressure  are  similar  coaxial  oblate  spheroids, 
pi'ove  that  the  resultant  attraction  of  a  spheroid,  the  particles  of 
which  atti-act  according  to  the  8:ime  law,  is  the  resultant  of  two 
forces  perpendicular  to  the  equator  and  the  axis  of  revolution 
respectively,  and  varying  as  the  distance  of  the  attracted  point 
from  them. 

viii.     Prove  that,  when  the  density  of  a  mass  of  air  is  suddenly 

changed  from  p  to  p',   the  pressure  is  altered  in  the  ratio  ( — ) » 

where  X  is  the  ratio  of  the  specific  heats  of  air,  on  the  supposi- 
tions of  the  pressure  and  volume  remaining  constant  respec- 
tively. 

9.  A  small  pencil  of  light,  diverging  from  a  given  point, 
passes  centrically  and  with  small  obliquity  through  a  lens ;  deter- 
mine the  position  of  the  primary  focal  line. 

A  distant  circular  window  is  viewed  by  a  short-sighted  man 
through  his  eye-glass,  the  axis  of  which  passes  through  the  centre 
of  the  window  and  is  perpendicular  to  its  plane.  Prove  that  the 
image  of  the  window  formed  by  primary  focal  lines  will  be  spher- 
ical, provided  the  window  be  filled  with  concentric  rings  of 
stained  gla.ss,  and  the  refractive  index  of  the  colour  throughout 
any  ring  be 

(;.-l)(2^-fl)    r' 

fj.  being  the  index  of  the  central  colour,  r  the  radius  of  the  ring  in 
question,  and  d  the  distance  of  the  window  from  the  lens. 

x-  Prove  that,  in  order  to  determine  the  time  at  a  given 
place  by  a  single  altitude  of  a  star,  the  most  favourable  stars  to 
observe  are  those  near  the  prime  vertical 


9 — 12.]  AND  RIDERS.  173 

1 1 .  Find  the  parallax  in  right  ascension  of  a  heavenly  body, 
in  terms  of  the  latitude  of  the  place  of  observation,  and  the  hour 
anglt;  and  declination  of  the  body,  assuming  the  distance  of  the 
body  from  the  Earth  to  be  so  great  that  the  sine  and  circular  mea- 
sure of  the  parallax  may  be  considered  equal. 

Shew  that  the  locus  of  all  the  bodies,  which  on  this  assumption 
have  their  parallaxes  in  right  ascension  for  a  given  place  and  time 
equal  to  a  given  quantity,  is  a  right  circular  cylinder  touching  the 
plane  of  the  meridian  of  the  place  along  the  axis  of  the  heavens. 


Monday,  January  16.     1^  to  4. 

1.     Shew  how  to  expand  a*  in  a  series  of  ascending  powers 
of  X. 

Prove  that  the  series 

2'  3'  4^ 

1  ^  172  ■" ITTTS -^  07374  ^•  =  ^^- 

IL     Prove  de  Moivre's  theorem  ;  and  thence  prove  that,  what- 
ever be  the  unit  of  angular  measure,  if  cos  1  +  ^(—  1) sin  \=k, 

COS  5  =  — g — ,  8m&=— 


V(-i)" 

Prove  also  that  the  limit  of  —^ ,  as  ^  is  indefinitely  dimi- 
nished, is 

iii.  Give  Cardan's  solution  of  a  cubic  equation  :  and  prove 
that,  when  the  roots  are  all  real,  they  will  be  exhibited  under  an 
imaginaiy  form. 

Solve  the  equation,  a;'—  6a;  —  9  =  0. 

iv.  Enunciate  Sturm's  Theorem;  and  apply  it  to  find  the 
number  and  position  of  the  real  roots  of  the  equation, 

a'+6x*  +  4  =  0. 

V.  Find  the  area  of  the  triangle,  the  co-ordinates  of  the  an- 
gular points  of  which  are  (Aj,  k^,  (A,,  A;J,  (A»  k^. 


174  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  16, 

Hence  deduce  the  equation  of  a  straight  line  passing  through 
two  given  points. 

vi.  Find  the  value  of  p,  in  order  that  the  straight  line  repre- 
sented by  the  equation,  x  cos  6  +  i/sind  =p,  may  touch  the  ellipse 

1-  —  =  1. 

a       0 

Prove  that  the  locus  of  the  vertices  of  an  equilateral  triangle 

a;*      ?/"  .      . 

described  about  the  ellipse,  -^  +  't;  =  1,  is  given  by  the  equation 

Ct  0 

4  (6V+  ay-  a'b')  =  3{x'+  f-  a'-  bj. 

vii.  Investigate  the  criterion  by  which  it  is  determined  whe- 
ther the  equation,  ax'+  2hxy  +  cy'+  2dx+  2ey  +1  =  0,  represents  an 
ellipse,  parabola,  or  hyperbola. 

Prove  that,  however  rectangular  co-ordinate  axes  be  shifted, 
the  ratio  of  the  quantities  6*—  ac,  (a  +  c)',  will  remain  unaltered. 
What  is  the  geometrical  meaning  of  this  ratio  1 

8.  Investigate  the  condition  that  the  straight  lines 

x  —  a _y—h _  z—c 
I  m  w   ' 

x  —  a_y  —  h'_z  —  c' 
V  m  n     * 

may  be  at  right  angles  to  one  another. 

Prove  that,  if  a  straight  line  be  drawn  from  the  origin  to 
cut  the  first  of  the  above  straight  lines  at  right  angles,  its  equa- 
tions will  be 

x     _     y      _     z 
a— It     b  —  mt     c  -nt' 

.  al  +  bm  +  en 

where  t  =   «i,,,^»  • 
t  +171  +n 

9.  Find  the  equation  of  a  plane  in  the  form 

Ix  +  my  +  nz  —p  =  0, 

where  I,  m,  n,  are  its  direction-cosines. 

If  a,  )3,  y  be  the  distances  of  a  point  from  the  three  faces  of 
a  tetrahedron  which  meet  in  the  vertex,  prove  that  the  equation 


1| — 4.]  AND  RIDERS.  175 

of  the  plane  passing  through  the  vertex,  and  through  the  centres 
of  the  circles  inscribed  in  and  circumscribed  about  the  base,  is 

(cos5-cos(7);)ia  +  (cosC-  cosA)p^  +  (cos  A  -  cos  B)  p^y=  0, 

where  A,  B,  C  are  the  angles  of  the  base,  and  p^J  p^  p^  the  per- 
pendiculars from  the  vertex  on  the  sides  of  the  base. 

10.  Define  the  polar  plane  of  a  given  point  with  respect  to 
a  given  sphere ;  and  find  its  equation,  referred  to  the  centre  of 
the  sphere  as  origin. 

Find  the  equation  of  the  sphere,  passing  through  a  given 
point  and  through  the  circle  in  which  the  polar  plane  of  that 
point  with  respect  to  a  given  sphere  cuts  that  sphere. 

11.  Shew  how  to  find  the  real  circular  sections  of  the  s\ir£aM» 
of  which  the  equation  is 

Ax'+By'+Cz'^l; 

and  describe  their  positions  relative  to  the  difi*erent  classes  of  sur- 
faces represented  by  the  above  equation. 

If  a  sphere  touch  an  ellipsoid  and  also  cut  it,  the  common  sec- 
tion cannot  be  a  plane  curve  unless  the  point  of  contact  be  one  of 
four  fixed  points  on  the  ellipsoid. 


Tuesday,  Jantmry  17.     9  to  12. 

L  FiNT>  a  point  the  distances  of  which  from  three  given  points, 
not  in  the  same  straight  line,  are  proportional  to  p,  q  and  r  respec- 
tively, the  four  points  being  in  the  same  plane. 

2.  If  TP,  TQ  be  two  tangents  drawn  from  any  point  T  to 
touch  a  conic  in  P  and  Q,  and  il"  S  and  U  be  the  foci,  then 


iii.  A  polygon  is  inscribed  in  an  ellipse  so  that  each  side  sub- 
tends the  same  angle  at  one  of  the  foci.  Prove  that,  if  the  alter- 
nate sides  be  produced  to  meet,  their  points  of  intersection  will  lie 
on  a  conic  section  having  the  same  focus  and  directrix  as  the  ori- 
ginal ellipse,  and  that  the  chords  joining  the  consecutive  points  of 
intci-section  all  subtend  the  same  constant  angle  at  the  focus  as 
the  sides  of  the  original  polygon. 


176  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

4.  Prove  that  the  equiangular  spiral  is  the  only  curve  such 
that  its  radius  of  curvature  is  proportional  to  the  reciprocal  of  the 
radius  of  curvature  at  the  corresponding  point  of  the  reciprocal 
polar. 

5.  If  two  plane  sections  of  a  right  cone  be  taken,  having  the 
same  directrix,  the  foci  corresponding  to  that  directrix  lie  on  a 
straight  line  which  passes  through  the  vertex. 

vi.  Find  the  equation  of  the  envelope  of  the  perpendiculars  to 
the  successive  focal  radii  of  a  parabola  drawn  through  the  extremi- 
ties of  these  radii. 

vii.  If  two  concentric  rectangular  hyperbolas  have  a  common 
tangent,  the  lines  joining  their  points  of  intersection  to  their  re- 
spective points  of  contact  with  the  common  tangent  will  subtend 
equal  angles  at  their  common  centre. 

viii.  If  P  be  a  point  on  a  geodesic  line  AP,  drawn  on  a  con- 
oidal  surface,  s  the  length  ofAF,  a;  iV,  and  0  the  projections  of  «, 
P,  and  the  axis  on  any  plane  perpendicular  to  the  axis,  and  p  the 
projection  of  OiV  on  the  tangent  io  AP  a.t  P,  then 

dp     d(r 
da-     ds' 

9.  A  string  is  placed  on  a  smooth  plane  curve  under  the 
action  of  a  central  force  F,  tending  to  a  point  in  the  same  plane ; 
prove  that,  if  the  curve  be  such  that  a  particle  could  freely  de- 
scribe it  under  the  action  of  that  force,  the  pressure  of  the  string 

on  the  curve  referred  to  a  unit  of  length  will  be  =  — ^—  +  -, 

where  <}>  is  the  angle  which  the  radius  vector  from  the  centre  of 
force  makes  with  the  tangent,  p  is  the  radius  of  curvature,  and  c 
is  an  arbitrajy  constant. 

If  the  curve  be  an  equiangular  spiral  with  the  centre  of  force 
in  the  pole,  and  if  one  end  of  the  string  rest  freely  on  the  spiral  at 
a  distance  a  from  the  pole,  then  the  pressure  is  equal  to 

2r\r^     a') ' 

10.  If  a  string,  the  particles  of  which  repel  each  other  with 
a  force  varying  as  the  distance,  be  in  equilibrium  when  fastened  to 
two  fixed  points,  ])rove  that  the  tension  at  any  point  varies  as  the 
square  root  of  the  radius  of  curvature. 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  177 

11.  If  any  uniform  arc  of  an  equiangular  spiral  attract  a 
particle,  placed  at  the  pole  with  a  force  varying  inversely  as  the 
square  of  the  distance,  prove  that  the  resultant  attraction  acts  along 
the  line  joining  the  jiole  %vith  the  intersection  of  the  tangents  at 
the  extremities  of  the  ara 

Prove  also  that,  if  any  other  given  curve  possess  this  same 

property,  the  law  of  attraction  must  be  F=—g  -J-,  where  p  is  the 

perpendicvdar  drawn  from  the  attracted  particle  on  the  tangent  at 
the  point  of  which  the  radius  vector  is  r. 

xii.  A  material  particle  is  acted  on  by  a  force  the  direction  of 
which  always  meets  an  infinite  straight  line  AB  at  right  angles, 
and  the  intensity  of  which  is  invei-sely  proportional  to  the  cube  of 
the  distance  of  the  particle  from  the  line.  The  particle  is  pro- 
jected with  the  velocity  from  infinity  from  a  point  /*  at  a  distance 
a  from  the  nearest  point  0  of  the  line  in  a  dii-ection  perpendicular 
to  OP,  and  inclined  at  the  angle  a  to  the  plane  AOP.  Prove  that 
the  particle  is  always  on  the  sphere  of  which  0  is  the  centre,  that 
it  meets  every  meridian  line  through  AB  at  the  angle  a,  and  that 
it  reaches  the  line  ^^  in  the  time 


^(/i.)  cos  a ' 
/x  being  the  absolute  force. 

13.  If  a  particle  slide  along  a  smooth  curve  which  turns 
with  uniform  angular  velocity  to  about  a  fixed  point  0,  then  the 
velocity  of  the  pai-ticle  relatively  to  the  moving  curve  is  given  by 
the  equation 

t>*  =  c*  +  to)  V, 

where  r  is  the  distance  of  the  jjarticle  from  the  point  0 ;  and  the 
pressure  on  the  curve  will  be  given  by  the  formula 

—  =  —  +  to»  n  +  2(i>r, 
m     p        *^ 

where  m  is  the  mass  of  the  particle,  and  p  the  perpendicular  from 
0  on  the  tangent. 

14.  A  string  is  laid  on  a  smooth  table  in  the  form  of  a  cate- 
nary, and  an  impulse  is  communicated  to_  one  extremity  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  tangent,  prove  (1)  that  the  initial  velocity  of  any 
point,  resolved  parallel  to  the  directrix,  is  proportional  to  the  in- 
verse square  of  the  distance  of  that  pouit  from  the  directrix,  and 

N 


178  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

(2)  that  the  velocity  of  the  centre  of  gmvity  of  any  arc,  resolved  in 
the  same  direction,  is  proportional  to  the  angle  between  tlie  tan- 
gents at  extremities  of  the  arc  directly,  and  to  the  length  of  the 
arc  inversely. 

XV.  A  right  circular  cone  floats  with  its  axis  horizontal  in 
a  fluid,  the  specific  gravity  of  which  is  double  that  of  the  cone,  the 
vertex  of  the  cone  being  attached  to  a  fixed  point  in  the  surface  of 
the  fluid.  Prove  that  for  stability  of  equilibrium  the  semi-vertical 
angle  of  the  cone  must  be  less  than  60°. 

xvi.  A  ribbon  of  very  small  uniform  thickness  h  is  coiled  up 
tightly  into  a  cylindrical  form,  and  placed  with  its  curved  s  ivfnce 
in  contact  with  a  perfectly  rough  plane  inclined  to  the  horizon  at 
an  angle  a,  the  axis  of  the  cylinder  being  parallel  to  the  inter- 
section of  the  plane  with  the  horizon.  Prove  that  the  time  in 
which  the  whole  will  be  unrolled  is  very  approximately 

4  V   \(/h  sin  a)  ' 
where  d  is  the  diameter  of  the  original  coil. 

17.  If  three  beads,  the  masses  of  which  are  m,  ni,  m",  slide 
along  the  sides  of  a  smooth  triangle  ABC,  and  attract  each  other 
with  forces  which  vary  as  the  distance,  find  the  position  of  equi- 
librium. Prove  also  that,  if  they  be  slightly  disturbed,  the  dis- 
placement of  each  will  be  given  by  a  series  of  three  terms  of  the 
form 

L  sin  {nt  +  A), 

where  L  and  X  are  arbitrary  constants,  and  the  values  of  n  are  t^e 
three  positive  roots  of  the  equation 

(n*  -  a)  {n'  -  /3)  {n'  -y)-  cos' A  m'm"  (n'  -  a)  -  cos'^m"w  (n'  -  /3) 

—  cos'Cmm  (n'  —  y)  —  2  cos  A  cos  B  cos  Cmm'm"  =  0, 

where  a,  /8,  y  represent  m"  +  m\  m  +  m",  m+m  respectively. 

xviiL  The  boi-e  of  a  gun  barrel  is  formed  by  the  motion  of  an 
ellipse  of  which  the  centre  is  in  the  axis  of  the  barrel,  and  the 
plane  is  perpendicular  to  that  axis,  the  centre  moving  along  the 
axis,  and  the  ellipse  revolving  in  its  own  plane  with  an  angular 
velocity  always  bearing  the  same  ratio  to  the  linear  velocity  of  its 
centre.     A  spheroidal  ball  fitting  the  barrel  is  fii-ed  from  the  gun. 


9—12.]  AND  EIDERS.  179 

If  V  be  the  velocity  with  which  the  ball  would  have  emerged  from 
the  barrel  had  there  been  no  twist;  prove  that  the  velocity  of 
rotatioa  with  which  it  actually  emerges  in  the  case  supposed  is 

2Trrjv 


J{1'  +  A-r'n'k') ' 

the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  ellipse  corresponding  to  the  whole 
length  I  of  the  barrel  being  n,  and  k  being  the  radius  of  gyration 
of  the  ball  about  the  axis  coinciding  with  the  axis  of  the  barrel, 
and  the  gun  being  supposed  to   be  immovable. 

xix.  An  elastic  ring  of  length  I,  mass  m,  and  elasticity  U  is 
placed  over  the  vertex  of  a  smooth  cone,  the  semi-vertical  angle 
of  which  is  a,  and  stretched  upon  it  to  any  size.  Supposing  it 
then  set  free,  prove  that  the  time  before  it  leaves  the  cone  is 


V(x) 


cosec  a, 
the  action  of  gravity  being  neglected. 

Tuesday,  Jan.  17.     1|  to  4. 

1.  Investigate  the  condition  of  achromatism  which  is  required 
in  Huyghens'  eye-piece ;  and  find  the  magnifying  power  of  Gregory's 
Telescope  with  this  eye-piece.  Draw  a  figure  representing  the 
course  of  the  pencil. 

2.  If  pq  be  the  image  of  PQ,  placed  perpendicular  to  the  axis 
QCq  of  a  lens  or  mirror  C2i,  Qliq  the  course  of  a  ray  from  Q  to  q, 
shew  that  PQ  :  pq  ::  RqC  :  BQC. 

Hence  prove  that,  with  all  combinations  of  lenses  for  eye- 
pieces, the  magnifying  power  of  a  telescope,  airanged  for  parallel 
or  diverging  emergent  pencils,  is  the  ratio  of  tlie  diameter  of  the 
object-glass  or  mirror  to  that  of  its  image  formed  on  emergence 
from  the  eye-piece. 

iiL  Define  the  equation  of  time;  state  the  causes  to  which  it  is 
due,  and  prove  that  it  vanishes  four  times  a  year.  Find  also  roughly 
when  it  attains  its  maxima  and  minima  values^  assuming  the  longi- 
tude of  perihelion  to  be  100". 

N2 


180  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  17, 

iv.  Two  particles  move  under  the  influence  of  gravity,  and  of 
their  mutual  attractions;  prove  that  their  centre  of  gravity  will 
describe  a  parabola,  and  that  each  particle  will  describe,  relatively 
to  that  point,  areas  proportional  to  the  times. 

5.  Define  a  principal  axis  through  any  point  of  a  rigid  body  ; 
and,  having  given  one  principal  axis  through  a  point,  find  the  posi- 
tions of  the  other  two. 

Prove  that  the  locus  of  a  point,  thi'ough  which  one  of  the 
principal  axes  is  in  a  given  direction,  is  a  rectangular  hyperbola 
in  the  plane  of  which  the  centre  of  gravity  lies,  and  of  which 
one  of  the  asymptotes  is  in  the  given  direction;  unless  the  given 
direction  be  that  of  one  of  the  principal  axes  through  the  centoe  of 
gravity. 

vi.  Investigate  the  efiect  of  the  central  disturbing  force  on  the 
position  of  the  apsides  of  the  Moon's  orbit,  supposing  the  line  of 
apsides  near  syzygy. 

By  what  two  causes  is  the  excess  of  progression  over  regres- 
sion, during  a  synodic  revolution  of  the  Sun  and  line  of  apsides 
increased  1 

vii.  Ifp  be  the  pressure,  and  p  the  density,  at  any  point,  x,  y,  z 
of  a  mass  of  fluid  in  motion,  w,  v,  w  the  component  velocities  of  the 
fluid  at  that  point,  X,  F,  Z  the  component  accelerations  due  to  the 
forces  acting  on  the  fluid  parallel  to  the  co-ordinate  axes,  investi- 
gate the  equations. 

\  dp  _  y.     du        du        du        du 

p  dx  dt        dx        dy        dz*  y 

1  dp      „     dv        dv        dv         dv 
p  dy  dt         dx        dy        dz 

1  dp  _  „    dio       din        dw        dw 
p  dz  dt         dx        dy        dz' 

State  the  hypothesis  of  steady  motion ;  and  point  out  the  modi- 
fication which  will  be  introduced  into  the  above  equation.s,  if  the 
motion  be  steady. 

8.  Give  a  full  account  of  the  methods  of  ap]>roximation  adopted 
in  the  Lunar  Theoiy;  and  state  of  what  circumstances  advantage 
is  taken  in  order  to  conduct  the  approximation  to  the  solution  of 
the  equations  in  the  Planetary  Theory. 


1| i.]  AND   EIDERS.  181 

9.     Assuming  the  equations 

d^u  „  ((Pu       \  cTdB       T   du       P       . 

3/     /3 

r  = 2^  sin  2  (^-^, 

investigate  that  term  in  u  the  argument  of  which  is 
(2  -  2m  -  2c)  ^  -  2^  +  2a. 


Webnesday,  Jan.  18.     9  to  12, 

1.  A  PARABOLA  touches  one  side  of  a  triangle  in  its  middle 
point  and  the  other  two  sides  produced.  Prove  that  the  perpendi- 
culai-s  drawn  from  the  angles  of  the  ti'iangle  upon  any  tangent  to 
the  parabola  are  in  harmonical  progression. 

2.  Find  the  length  of  the  longest  straight  line  which  can  be 
drawn  in  the  interval  between  two  similar  similarly  situated  and 
concentric  ellipsoids ;  and,  if  a  line  shorter  than  the  line  so  deter- 
mined be  moved  about  in  the  interval,  prove  that  its  point  of 
contact  with  the  interior  ellipsoid  can  never  lie  within  the  cone 
represented  by  the  equation 

a*  {a*  (1  -  7J»*)  -  r'}  "^  h'  [b'  (1  -  m^)  -  r'}  "^  c*  {c»  (1  -  m«)  -  r*}  ~   ' 

a,  b,  c  being  the  semi-axes  of  the  outer  ellipsoid,  m  the  ratio  of 
the  linear  magnitudes  of  the  inner  and  outer  ellipsoid,  and  2r  the 
length  of  the  line  in  question,  which  is  assumed  greater  than 

2bJ(l-m'). 

What  is  the  meaning  of  the  boundary  so  determined  when  2r 
is  less  than  26  ^^(1  —  m*)  and  greater  than  2c  ^(1  —  w»*)1 

3.  If,  in  a  rigid  body  moving  in  any  manner  about  a  fixed 
point,  a  series  of  points  be  taken  along  any  straight  line  in  the 
body,  and  through  these  points  straight  lines  be  drawn  in  the 
direction  of  the  instantaneous  motion  of  the  points,  prove  that  the 
locus  of  these  stiuight  lines  is  an  hyperbolic  paraboloid. 


182  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

4.  If  /  («,  y,  2)  =  0  be  the  equation  to  a  surface,  and  r  be  a 
straight  line  drawn  through  the  point  x,  y,  z  of  which  the  mag- 
nitude and  direction  are  any  given  functions  of  x,  y,  z,  state 
what  is  the  relation  between  the  original  surface  and  that  whose 

equation  is  n  '"'/  {x,  y,  z)  =  0,  supposing  that  in  the  latter  equa- 
tion X,  y,  and  z  have  been  expressed  in  terms  of  r  and  any  two 
other  variables  independent  of  r,  and  that  n  is  a  given  numerical 
quantity,  and  prove  that  if  the  two  surfaces  coincide  for  all  values 
of  w,  the  line  r  must  lie  altogether  in  either  of  them. 

Apply  this  to  find  the  partial  differential  equations  of  conical 
and  conoidal  surfaces  respectively  when  referred  to  any  system  of 
rectangular  axes. 

5.  From  a  flexible  envelope  in  the  form  of  an  oblate  sphe- 
roid, of  which  the  eccentricity  of  the  generating  ellipse  is  e,  the 
part  between  two  meridians,  the  planes  of  which  ai'e  inclined  to 
each  other  at  the  angle  27r  (1  —  e),  is  cut  away  and  the  edges  are 
then  sewed  together ;  prove  that  the  meridian  curve  of  the  new 
envelope  will  be  the  curve  of  sines. 

6.  If  an  uniform  inextensible  and  flexible  string  be  stretched 
over  a  smooth  surface  of  revolution,  prove  that  the  following 
equations  hold  : 


s(^4^)-^|^^'=«- 


where  ds  is  the  element  of  the  string  at  any  point,  dx  and  dy  are 
corresponding  elements  of  the  arc  of  the  circle  through  that  poii^t 
j)eq>endicular  to  the  meridian,  and  of  the  meridian  respectively, 
X  and  Y  are  the  resolved  parts  of  the  impressed  forces  along  these 
directions,  and  r  is  the  distance  from  the  axis,  the  mass  of  an  unit 
of  length  of  the  string  being  taken  as  unity.  Hence  prove  that,  if 
such  a  string  be  acted  upon  by  a  force  at  all  points  perpendicular 
to  the  axis  of  revolution,  and  inversely  proportional  to  the  square 
of  the  distance  from  that  axis,  the  string  will,  if  properly  suspended, 
cut  every  meridian  in  the  same  angle. 

7.  A  string  is  wound  round  a  vertical  cylinder  of  radius  a 
in  the  form  of  a  given  helix,  the  inclination  to  the  horizon  being 
i.  The  upper  end  is  attached  to  a  fixed  point  in  the  cylinder, 
and  the  lower,  a  portion  of  the  string  of  length  I  sec  i  having 
been  unwound,  has  a  material  particle  attached  to  it  which  is  also 


9—12.]  AND  RIDERS.  183 

in  contact  with  a  rough  horizontal  plane,  the  coefficient  of  friction 
being  fji.  Supposing  a  horizontal  velocity  V  perpendicular  to  tlie 
free  jjortion  of  the  string  to  be  applied  to  the  particle  so  as  to 
tend  to  wind  the  string  on  the  cylinder,  determine  the  motion ; 
and  prove  that  the  particle  will  leave  the  plane  after  the  projec- 
tion of  the  unwound  portion  of  string  upon  the  plane  has  described 
the  angle  of  which  the  circular  measure  is 


2fi  tan {  '     "  2fxtSLn'i.V' —2figl  tani  +  ag * 

8.  A  particle  is  acted  on  by  two  centres  of  force  residing  in 
the  same  point,  one  attractive,  the  other  repulsive,  and  varying 
inversely  as  the  square  and  cube  of  the  distance  respectively.  Two 
consecutive  equal  apsidal  distances  are  drawn  and  the  portion  of 
the  plane  of  motion  included  between  them  is  rolled  into  a  right 
circular  cone.  Prove  that  the  trajectory  described  under  the  cir- 
cumstances mentioned  above  becomes  a  plane  curve  on  the  surface 
of  the  cone,  and  that  it  will  be  an  ellipse,  parabola,  or  hyperbola, 
according  as  the  velocity  in  the  trajectory  was  less  than,  equal  to, 
or  greater  than  that  from  infinity. 

9.  A  particle  is  describing  an  orbit  round  a  centre  of  force 
which  is  any  function  of  the  distance,  and  is  acted  upon  by  a  dis- 
turbing force  which  is  always  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the 
instantaneous  orbit  and  inversely  proportional  to  the  distance  of 
the  body  from  the  original  centre  of  force.  Prove  that  the  plane 
of  the  instantaneous  orbit  revolves  uniformly  round  its  instanta- 
neous axis. 

10.  A  die  in  the  form  of  a  pai-allelopiped  the  edges  of  which 
are  2a,  2b,  and  2c,  is  loaded  in  such  a  manner  that  the  centre  of 
gravity  remains  coincident  with  the  centre  of  figure,  but  the  prin- 
cipal moments  of  inertia  about  the  centre  of  gravity  become  equal ; 
if  it  then  fall  from  any  height  and  without  rotation  upon  a  hori- 
zontal plane  composed  of  adhesive  material  so  that  no  point  which 
has  once  come  in  contact  with  the  plane  can  separate  from  it,  prove 
that  the  chance  of  one  of  the  faces  bounded  by  the  edges  26,  2c 
coming  uppermost  is 

2  .  _,  be 

-sm 


T  Jiia'  +  b*)  {a* +  €')}' 

11.     A  uniform  sphere  is  placed  in  contact  with  the  exterior 
Biu-face  of  a  perfectly  rough  cone.   Its  centre  is  acted  on  by  a  force, 


184  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

the  direction  of  which  always  meets  the  axis  of  the  cone  at  right 
angles,  and  the  intensity  of  which  varies  inversely  as  the  cube  of 
the  distance  from  that  axis.  Prove  that,  if  the  sphere  be  properly 
started,  the  path  described  by  its  centre  will  meet  every  generating 
line  of  the  cone  on  which  it  lies  in  the  same  angle. 

12.  A  small  rigid  vertical  cylinder,  containing  air,  is  rigidly 

closed  at  the  bottom,  and  covered  at  the  top  by  a  disk  of  very 

small   weight  which  fits  it  air-tight.     Supposing  the  air  in  the 

cylinder  to  be  set  in  vibration,  prove  that  the  period  of  a  vibra- 

27r 
tion  is  — ,  m  being  a  root  of  the  equation 
m 

,      ml     kBU 
m  tan  —  =  — —  : 
a        fia 

where  I  is  the  length  of  the  tube,  a  the  velocity  of  sound  in  air, 
fjL  the  mass,  k  the  area  of  the  disk,  pec  p  (I  +  ^s)  the  relation  be- 
tween the  pressure  and  density  when  the  latter  is  suddenly 
changed  from  p  to  p  (1  +  «),  and  11  the  pressure  of  the  air  in  the 
cylinder  before  motion  commences. 

13.  A  circular  drumhead  of  uniform  thickness  is  stretched 
with  a  tension  of  uniform  magnitude  at  all  points  in  its  circum- 
ference, and  is  then  set  in  vibration  by  a  small  disturbance  com- 
mencing at  the  centre.  Prove  (1)  that  if  z  be  the  transversal 
disturbance  at  the  time  t  of  a.  point  the  initial  distance  of  which 
from  the  centre  was  r,  then 


<fg_    ,  /Idz      d'z\ 
^~"   [rdr'^d?)' 

and  (2)  that  the  general  primitive  of  this  differential  equation  is 
z=  j    <l> {at  +  r  cos  6)  d6  +  I    \p{at  +  r  cos  &) log  (r  sin*^)  dO, 

<f>  and  i/r  being  arbitrary  functions,  and  a  a  constant  depending 
upon  the  tension  and  constitution  of  the  drumhead. 


1^ — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  185 


Wedkesday,  Jan.  18.     1^  to  4. 

1.  Define  the  terms  Limit,  Independent  and  Dependent 
Variable,  and  Differential  Coefficient. 

If  X  represent  the  time  which  has  elapsed  since  a  given  epoch, 
and  y  the  space  which  a  moving  point  has  described  in  that  time, 

what  will  -J-  represent  1 

ii.     Prove  thaf^-4-T  =.,,,,  [  ,  where  6  lies  between  0  and  1, 
<l){x)     <f>  (Bx) 

with  certain  limitations :  and  deduce  Stirling's  Theorem. 

3.  Change  the  independent  variables  in 

<rV       d'r     j/c/F     dV\ 
"^  dx'^'^dy'^'^\di^'d^r 
from  X  and  y  to  m  and  v,  having  given  x-k-  y  =  u,  y  =  uv. 

4.  Explain  the  use  of  the  method  of  indeterminate  multipliers 
in  determining  the  values  of  a  function  of  several  variables  con- 
nected by  given  equations,  which  are  maxima  or  minima. 

Find  the  position  of  the  point,  the  sum  of  the  squares  on  the 
distances  of  which  from  the  three  sides  of  a  triangle  is  the  least 
possible;  and  prove  that  the  angles,  which  the  sides  respectively 
subtend  at  this  point,  exceed  the  supplements  of  those  which  they 
subtend  at  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  triangle  by  the  respective 
angles  of  the  triangle. 

V.  Prove  that,  if  a  curve  represented  by  an  algebraical  equa- 
tion have  an  asymptote,  and  the  curve  lies  on  the  same  side  at  both 
ends,  there  will  be  an  odd  number  of  points  at  an  infinite  distance 
in  which  the  asymptote  meets  the  curve. 

vi     Trace  the  curves  represented  by  the  equations 

(a:'-4a*)y'-12a'a;(a-y)  =  0 (1), 

sin  y  —  m,  sin  a;  =  0 (2). 

In  (1)  explain  the  circumstance  that  the  asymptotes  parallel  to 
the  axis  of  y  appear  to  contradic^  the  statement  of  (v.).  In  (2) 
distinguish  between  the  cases  in  ^hich  m  >  =  or  <  1. 


186  SENATE-HOUSE   PKOBLEMS  [Jan.  18, 

vii.  If  /  (x,  y)  =  0  be  the  equation  of  a  ciirve  in  a  rational 
integi-al  form,  in  which  (Xg,  y^  is  a  multiple  point  through  which 
n  branches  pass ;  shew  that  the  directions  of  the  branches  are 
determined  by  the  equation 

<t>^{0)  =  0,  where  <f>  (r)  =/  (x^  +  Ir,  y„  +  mr). 
Find  the  form  of  the  curve  represented  by  the  equation 
{y-by-{x'-2axy-a'  =  0, 
at  the  multiple  point. 

viii.  Find  the  co-ordinates  of  the  centre  of  curvature  at  any 
point  of  a  plane  curve. 

The  equation  of  a  cii'cle  is  x'  +  y'  =  c',  prove  that  the  equation 
of  the  directrix  of  a  parabola  of  which  the  axis  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  x  and  which  has  the  closest  possible  contact  at  the  point 

{x^  yj  is  2x  =  3x^. 

9.     Integrate  the  following  diffei-entials : 

dx  dO  dx 


£c»(A  +  a;)»'    (m  +  wcos^)''    (x* -  2aa;  +  a"  +  c«) (a; - 6)" 

and  evaluate  I  *  log  sin  Odd. 

10.  Prove  that  the  area  of  a  curve,  represented  by  the  equa- 
tion y  (a;,  y)  =  0,  will  be  given  by  the  formula  ^j{xdy  —  ydx),  the 
integrals  being  taken  within  proper  limits. 

One  circle  rolls  within  another;  apply  the  above  formula  to 
find  the  area  of  the  curve  traced  out  by  a  given  point  within  the 
rolling  circle. 

xi.  Prove  that,  if  a  plane  intersect  a  surface,  it  will  generally 
be  a  tangent  plane  to  the  surface  at  every  multiple  point  of  the 
curve  of  intersection.     What  exceptions  are  there  ? 

Prove  that  a  tangent  plane  to  a  developable  surface  meets  the 
surface  in  a  straight  liue  and  a  curve  touching  that  straight  line. 

xii.  Explain  generally  the  principle  of  Variation  of  Parame- 
ters, as  applied  to  the  solution  of  a  diiferential  equation ;  and  illus- 


1^—4.]  AND  RIDERS.  187 

trate  this  method  of  solution  by  assuming  the  result  in  the  form  of 
that  obtained  fi-om  the  fii^st  three  terms    f 

g-2m|H-m'3,4(|-'»3')=0. 

13.  Define  a  developable  surface  ;  and,  from  your  definition, 
deduce  the  pai'tial  differential  equation  of  such  surfaces. 

Find  the  equation  of  the  developable  surface  generated  by  the 
plane  which  moves  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  always  in  contact 
with  the  surfaces 

<v*  »•*  ^' 

X      y      z      ^ 

—T+— 1 =1 


a'     b' 


c 


X'  y'  z' 

—  -I — 1 

-»  ^  JvH       ^  ^  „a 


14.     Explain  what  is  meant  by  A".  O" ;   and  prove  that,   if 
/{e')  be  expanded  in  a  series  proceeding  by  ascending  powers  of 

t,  the  coefficient  of  r  isV^—t-^i— . 
1.  2 m 

Prove  that,  if  m  be  less  than  r, 

{l+log(l  +  A)}'.0'"  =  r(r-l)(r-2)...(r-m  +  l). 


Thursday,  Jan.  19.     9  to  12. 

1.  If  at  the  extremities  P,  Q  of  any  two  diameters  CF,  CQ  of 
an  ellipse,  two  tangents  Pp,  Qq  be  drawn  cutting  each  other  in 
T  and  the  diameters  produced  in  p  and  q,  then  the  areas  of  the 
triangles  TQp,  TPq  are  equal 

2.  If  a  straight  line  CN  be  drawn  from  the  centre  to  bisect 
that  chord  of  the  circle  of  curvature  at  any  point  P  of  an  ellipse 
which  is  common  to  the  ellipse  and  circle,  and  if  it  be  prodticed  to 
cut  the  ellipse  in  Q  and  the  tangent  in  T^  prove  that  CP  =  CQ,  and 
that  each  is  a  mean  proportional  between  CN  and  CT, 

3.  If  a,  5,  c  be  the  sides  of  a  triangle,  and  r  the  radius  of 
the  inscribed  circle,  then  the  distances  of  the  radical  centre  of 


188  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

the  three  escribed  circles  from  the  sides  of  the  triangle  will  be 
respectively 

b  +  c  c  +  a  a  +  b 

^~2^'     ^~2b~'     '^~W 

4.  Two  equal  hea\'y  particles  are  connected  by  a  string 
which  passes  through  a  small  smooth  fixed  ring.  Prove  that  the 
equation  to  the  plane  vertical  curve  on  which  the  particles  will 
rest  in  all  positions  is, 

r  cos  0  =  a+  \j/{r)  —  \p{l  —  r), 

where  6  is  the  angle  the  radius  vector  makes  with  the  vertical,  I  is 
the  length  of  the  string,  ij/  an  arbitrary  function  and  a  an  arbitrary 
constant. 

5.  If  four  equal  particles,  attracting  each  other  with  forces 
which  vary  as  the  distance,  slide  along  the  arc  of  a  smooth  ellipse, 
they  cannot  generally  be  in  equilibrium  unless  placed  at  the  extremi- 
ties of  the  axes;  but  if  a  fifth  eqiial  particle  be  fixed  at  any  pf»int 
and  attract  the  other  four  according  to  the  same  law,  there  will  be 
equilibrium  if  the  distances  of  the  four  particles  from  the  semi-axis 
major  be  the  roots  of  the  equation 

where  p  and  q  are  the  distances  of  the  fifth  particle  from  the  axis 
minor  and  axis  major  respectively. 

6.  A  heavy  string  is  placed  in  eqxiilibrium  on  a  smooth 
sphere  ;  prove  that,  if  0  be  the  length  of  the  spherical  arc  drawn 
from  the  highest  point  of  the  sphere  perpc  ndicular  to  the  great 
circle  touching  the  string  at  any  point  P,  then 

sm  0  = J- , 

z+  b 

where  z  is  the  perpendicular  from  F  on  any  horizontal  plane,  and 
a,  b  are  constants. 

Shew  that  the  form  of  the  string  can  be  a  circle  only  when  its 
plane  is  vertical  or  horizontal 

7.  If  three  particles  of  masses  m,  rn,  m",  attracting  each  other 
start  from  rest,  shew  that  if  at  any  instant  parallels  to  their  direc- 
tions of  motion  be  drawn  so  as  to  form  a  triangle  the  momenta  of 
the  several  particles  are  proportional  to  the  sides  of  that  triangle. 


9 — 12.]  AND   EIDERS.  189 

8.  If  from  any  point  on  a  surface  a  number  of  geodesic  lines 
be  drawn  in  all  directions,  shew,  (1)  that  those  which  have  the 
greatest  and  least  cui^vature  of  toi-sion  bisect  the  angles  between 
the  principal  sections,  and  (2)  that  the  radius  of  torsion  of  any 
line,  making  an  angle  9  with  a  principal  section,  is  given  by  the 
equation 


ji  U  p) 


sin  6  cos  6, 
where  pj,  p^  axe  the  radii  of  curvature  of  the  principal  sections. 

9.  If  t/it  and  de  be  the  angles  of  torsion  and  contingence  of 
any  curve  of  double  curvature,  and  if  sin  <^  be  the  ratio  of  the 
radius  of  circular  curvature  to  the  radius  of  spherical  curvature, 
prove  that  the  square  of  the  angle  of  contingence  of  the  locus  of 
the  centres  of  circular  curvature  is 

d(f>  +  du  ['  +  cos*^>^*. 

10.  A  particle  is  projected  with 'velocity  V  along  an  infi- 
nitely thin  ellipsoidal  shell  attracting  according  to  the  law  of 
nature  ;  prove  that,  when  it  leaves  the  ellipsoid  the  perpendicular 

from  the  centre  on  the  tangent  plane  is       y  [  — ^-^ —  J  where 

R  is  the  radius-vector  parallel  to  the  initial  direction  of  motion, 
and  P  the  perpendicular  on  the  tangent,  /x  the  attraction  of  a 
mass  equivalent  to  a  unit  of  area  of  the  ellipsoid  at  a  unit  of  dis- 
tance. 

11.  An  infinitely  thin  ellipsoidal  shell  attracting  according  to 
the  law  of  nature  is  bounded  by  two  similar  and  similarly  situated 
ellipsoids.  A  very  small  pie«e  is  cut  out  of  the  shell  and  replaced 
in  its  original  position.  Shew  that  the  force  necessary  to  hold  the 
piece  in  equilibrium  is  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  thickness 
of  the  shell. 

12.  A  sphere  of  radius  a  is  suspended  from  a  fixed  point  by  a 
string  of  length  I  and  is  made  to  rotate  about  a  vertical  axis  with 
an  angular  velocity  <d.  Prove  that,  if  the  string  make  small 
oscillations  about  its  mean  jwsition,  the  motion  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  will  be  represented  by  a  series  of  terms  of  the  form 

L  cos  {kI  +  M), 


190  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

where  the  several  values  of  k  are  the  roots  of  the  equation 

13.  A  string  is  in  equilibrium  in  the  form  of  a  circle  about 
a  centre  of  force  in  the  centre.  If  the  string  be  now  cut  at  any 
point  A,  prove  that  the  tension  at  any  point  P  is  instantaneously 

changed  in  the  i-atio  of  1 :  1,  where  6  is  the  angle 

subtended  at  the  centre  by  the  arc  AP. 

14.  An  inelastic  string  is  siispended  from  two  fixed  points 
so  that  it  hangs  in  the  form  of  a  catenary  of  which  the  parameter 
is  c.  Suppose  it  to  make  small  oscillations  in  a  vertical  plane, 
prove  the  equation 


§=f-HS-**-/(')}. 


where  a  is  the  angle  the  tangent  at  any  point  makes  with  the 
horizon  when  the  string  is  at  rest,  and  a  +  <^  is  the  value  of  the 
same  angle  at  the  time  t. 

Shew  that  there  are  sufficient  data  to  determine  all  the  arbi- 
trary functions. 


Thursday,  Jan.  19.     1|  to  4. 

L     Shew  that  the  series  w,  +  w,  +  ...  +  w„+  . ..  will  be  convot- 

gent>  if  the  fraction  — =-^  converge  to  a  limit  less  than  unity  as  n 

is  indefinitely  increased,  and  divergent,  if,  supposing  all  the  terms 
to  be  of  the  same  sign,  this  limit  be  equal  to  or  greatt-r  than 
unity. 

Find  a  superior  limit  to  the  numerical  values  of  x  consistent 
with  the  convergency  of  the  series 

2  V        3V  m".  x" 

''■'  iT2  "-TTira ""  ■••'"1.2...^^  ••• 

2.     If  the  sides  of  a  sj)herical  triangle  be  small  compared  with 
the  radius  of  the  sphere,  then  each  angle  of  the  spherical  triangle 


1^ — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  191 

exceeds  by  one-third  of  the  spherical  excess  the  corresponding 
angle  of  the  plane  triangle,  the  sides  of  which  ai-e  of  the  same 
length  as  the  sides  of  the  spherical  triangle. 

If  the  sides  of  a  right-angled  plane  triangle  of  given  area  be 
bent  so  as  to  form  a  spherical  triangle  on  a  given  sphere  of  great 
radius,  the  altemtion  of  area  in  the  triangle  is  very  nearly  propor- 
tional to  the  square  of  the  hypothenuse. 

3.  If  a,  j8,  y,  be  the  distances  of  a  point  from  three  given 
straight  lines,  determine  the  position  of  the  conic,  ayS  =  ky' ;  and 
prove  that  the  equation  of  the  tangent  at  any  point  may  be  put 
into  the  form, 

Two  tangents  OA,  OB  ai'e  drawn  to  a  conic,  and  are  cut  in 
P  and  ^  by  a  variable  tangent;  prove  that  the  locus  of  the 
centres  of  all  circles  described  about  the  triangle  OFQ  is  an 
hyperbola. 

iv.  If  ?*  be  a  function  of  three  independent  variables  x,  y,  z, 
which  are  connected  by  three  equations  with  three  new  inde- 
pendent variables  ^,  -q,  ^  shew  how  to  express  the  partial  differen- 
tial coefficients  of  w,  to-  the  firet  and  second  ordera  respectively, 
with  respect  to  x,  y,  z,  in  terms  of  the  corresponding  partial 
differential  coefficients  with  respect  to  ^,  t;,  ^. 

Apply  this  method  to  prove  that,  if  at  a  certain  point  in  a 
surface  r  =  t  and  «  =  0  when  the  axes  of  a;  and  y  are  taken  parallel 
to  a  particular  pair  of  lines,  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  in  the 
tangent  plane  at  that  jwint,  then  the  following  relations  will  hold 
at  that  point  whatever  be  the  direction  of  the  co-ordinate  axes 
provided  they  be  rectangular,  viz. 


1  +;>*     pq      \-\-<f* 

,  ,       ,    dz      dz      d*z       d'z       d*z  .     , 

where p,(?,r,,,<,  denote^,    ^,    ^,   ^^,    ^, respectively. 

V.     If  the  differential  equations  of  the  first  order 


192  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  [Jan.  19, 

^ve  rise  to  the  same  differential  equation  of  the  second  order, 
shew  how  the  general  solution  of  an  equation  of  the  form 

may  be  found  without  integration. 

Apply  this  or  any  other  method  to  the  discovery  of  the  general 
solution  of  the  equation 

6.  Enunciate  and  explain  d'Alembert's  principle.  Apply  it 
to  determine  the  small  oscillations  in  space  of  a  uniform  heavy  rod 
of  length  2a,  suspended  from  a  fixed  point  by  an  inextensible 
string  of  length  I  fastened  to  one  extremity.  Prove  that,  if  x  be 
one  of  the  horizontal  co-ordinates  of  that  extremity  of  the  rod  to 
which  the  string  is  fastened, 

£c  =  j1  sin  (n^t  +  a)  +  £  sin  {njt  +  fi), 

where  n^,  n^  are  the  two  positive  roots  of  the  equation, 

ahi*-  {ia  +  dl)  (jn'+  3g'=  0, 
and  A,  B,  o,  /3,  are  arbitrary  constants. 

vii.  A  rigid  body  is  rotating  about  an  axis  through  its  centre 
of  gravity,  when  a  certain  point  of  the  body  becomes  suddeyJy 
fixed,  the  axis  being  simultsmeously  set  free  ;  find  the  equations  of 
the  new  instantaneous  axis ;  and  prove  that,  if  it  be  parallel  to  the 
originally  fixed  axis,  the  point  must  lie  in  the  line  represented  by 
the  equations, 

a'lx  +  b'rny  +  c'nz  =  0, 

(6«  -  c»)  y  +  (c'  -a')^+  (a'-  6')  -  =  0  ; 
^  '  I      ^  ^  m     ^  '  n 

the  principal  axes  through  the  centre  of  gravity  being  taken  as 
axes  of  co-ordinates,  a,  h,  c  the  radii  of  gyration  about  these  lines, 
and  I,  m,  n  the  direction-cosines  of  the  originally  fixed  axis  referred 
to  them. 


1| — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  193 

8.     Explain  the  physical  meaning  of  the  term 

15 

-^  inea  cos  {(2  -  2m  -  c)  6  -  2/3  +  a} 

in  the  expression  for  the  reciprocal  of  the  Moon's  radius  vector. 

Calculate  roughly  the  proportionate  alteration  in  the  Moon's 
mean  distance  produced  by  this  term,  and  its  period.  Why  is  this 
term  usually  taken  in  combination  with  the  elliptic  inequality] 

ix.  Prove  the  following  relation  between  the  perturbations  of 
a  planet  in  longitude  and  radius  vector 

h\     dt  r  dt  JJ   dt  J    dr      j' 

h  being  twice  the  sectorial  area  described  in  a  iinit  of  time  by  the 
undisturbed  planet  round  the  Sun:  and  find  the  corresponding 
relation  whatever  be  the  law  of  force,  provided  it  be  centi*al  and 
a  function  of  the  distance  only,  and  provided  such  a  function  as  li 
can  be  found, 

10.  If  the  object-glass  of  a  telescope  be  covered  over  by  a 
diaphragm,  pierced  iu  the  centre  by  a  small  hole,  the  form  of 
which  is  a  rectangle,  state  generally  the  nature  of  the  spectra 
formed  about  the  image  of  a  star  on  a  screen  placed  at  the 
focus. 

If  the  hole  be  circular  and  the  screen  be  pushed  towards  the 
lens,  prove  that,  when  the  light  is  homogeneous,  the  centre  is 
alternately  bright  and  dark.  Trace  also  the  order  of  the  coloui'S 
seen  if  the  light  be  not  homogeneous. 


Friday,  Jan.  20.     9  to  12. 

1.  When  the  reciprocal  of  a  circle  ia  taken  with  respect  to 
another  circle,  investigate  the  nature  of  the  reciprocal  conic,  and 
the  polars  of  its  centre  and  further  focus. 

OA,  OB  are  common  tangents  to  two  conies  having  a  common 
focxis  S,  CAy  CB  are  tangents  at  one  of  their  points  of  intersection, 
BD,  AE  tangents  intersecting  CA,  CB  iu  D,  E.  Prove  that  SDE 
is  a  straight  line. 


194  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [Jan.  20, 

ii.  Define  the  term  potential  of  a  mass,  the  particles  of  which 
attract  according  to  the  law  of  nature ;  and  prove  that,  if  a  body 
moveable  about  a  fixed  axis  be  subject  to  the  action  of  an  at- 
tracting mass  of  which  the  potential  is  V,  then  ///  — -  dm  is  the 

moment  which  must  be  impressed  upon  the  botly  about  that  axis 
in  order  to  produce  equilibrium,  where  6  is  the  inclination  of  the 
plane  through  the  fixed  axis  and  the  particle  of  which  the  mass 
is  dm  to  a  fixed  plane, 

A  uniform  straight  line,  the  particles  of  which  attract  accord- 
ing to  this  law,  acts  upon  a  rigid  uniform  circular  arc  ia  the  same 
plane  with  the  line,  of  which  the  radius  is  equal  to  the  line,  and 
which  is  moveable  about  an  axis  through  its  centre  perpendicular 
to  its  plane,  the  axis  being  coincident  with  one  extremity  of  the 
line.  Prove  that  the  moment  necessary  to  produce  equilibrium 
when  the  bounding  radii  are  inclined  at  the  angles  a  and  /3  to  the 
line  produced  is  proportional  to 

sec  n  +  1 
log 


sec  ^  +  1 


3.  Define  lines  of  curvature  on  a  surface;  and  find  their  dif- 
ferential equation.  Prove  that  one  line  of  curvature  at  any  point 
very  near  an  umbilicus  passes  through  that  umbilicus. 

4.  State  and  prove  the  principle  of  Vis  Viva.     If  an  elastic 

string,  whose  natural  length  is  that  of  a  uniform  rod,  be  attached 

to  the  rod  at  both  ends  and  suspended  by  the  middle  point,  prove 

by   means  of  Vis  Viva  that  the  rod  will  sink  until  the  strings 

are  inclined   to  the  horizon  at  an  angle  ^,   which  satisfies  the 

equation 

6  6 

cot»2-cot^-2n=0, 

where  the  tension  of  the  string,  when  stretched  to  double  its  length 
ia  n  times  the  weight. 

If  the  string  be  suspended  by  a  point,  not  in  the  middle,  write 
down  the  equation  of  Vis  Viva. 

V.  If  a  spheroid  of  revolution  be  moveable  about  its  centre 
which  is  fixed,  and  6  be  the  inclination  of  its  equator  to  a  fixed  plane, 


9 — 12.]  AND   RIDERS.  195 

^  the  inclination  of  the  line  of  intersection  of  its  eqnator  with  this 
plane  to  a  fixed  line  in  the  plane,  A  and  C  the  respective  moments 
of  ineitia  about  the  axis  of  figure  and  a  line  in  the  equator  respec- 
tively, L  and  J/  the  moments  of  impressed  couples  about  the  line 
of  intersection  of  the  equator  with  the  fixed  plane,  and  a  line  in 
the  eq\iator  perpendicular  to  this  latter  line  respectively,  w  the 
angular  velocity  about  the  axis  of  figure,  prove  that 

C  -nr-0 1 -r)  sm  6  cos  9  +  Aw  sm  6  ~-  =  L, 
df         \dtj  dt         ' 

„  d  /dib    .      A      ^d^  dO         a       A     ^^      nr 

C  -ri-f-  sin  6   +  C-^  -^  cos  B  -  Aw -^  =  M, 

dt  \dt  )        dt  dt  dt         ' 

hence  deduce  the  processional  and  nutational  velocity  of  the 
Eiirth's  axis,  assuming  the  effect  of  the  Sun's  action  to  be  a  couple 
of  which  the  moment  is  m,  sin  A  cos  A  about  an  axis  in  the  equator 
90'  distant  from  the  Sun,  m  being  a  very  small  quantity,  A  and  C 
very  nearly  equal,  and  the  Sun's  motion  in  declination  and  right- 
ascension  being  neglected. 

vi.  If  /t  be  a  given  function  of  the  co-ordinates  x  and  y  of 
any  point  in  a  plane  curve,  prove  that  if  the  curve  be  so  deter- 
mined as  to  render  the  integraJ  jiids  between  given  limits  a  maxi- 
mum or  minimum,  then 


1        1  /dui  da 

—  =  —  \-j-  cos  a  +  —  cos 
p        II  \dx  ay 


.). 


p  being  the  radius  of  curvature  at  any  point,  and  a,  ^  the  acute 
angles  which  the  normal  at  that  point  makes  with  the  axes  of  x 
and  y  respectively. 

If  a  solid  of  revolution  be  immersed  in  a  heavy  homogeneous 
fluid  with  its  axis  vertical,  prove  that,  when  the  total  normal 
pressure  on  the  surface  is  a  minimum,  its  form  must  be  such 
that  the  numerical  value  of  the  diameter  of  curvature  of  the 
meridian  at  any  point  is  a  harmonic  mean  between  the  segments 
of  the  normal  to  the  surface  at  that  point  intercepted  between  the 
point  and  the  surface  of  the  fluid  and  between  the  point  and  the 
axis,  respectively. 

7.  Supposing  the  orbits  of  a  disturbing  and  disturbed  planet 
to  be  in  the  same  plane,  prove  that  the  rate  of  change  of  the 


19(5  SENATE-HOUSE  PROBLEMS  [/an.  20, 

longitude  of  perihelion  of  the  instantaneous  ellipse  of  the  disturbed 
planet  is 

In  what  respects  do  the  theories  of  the  motion  of  the  apsides  in 
lunar  and  planetary  disturbances  present  themselves  respectively 
in  simpler  aspects? 

viii.  Explain  the  phenomenon  of  external  conical  refraction 
where  a  small  ])encil  of  light  passes  through  a  biaxal  ciystal ; 
and  describe  an  experiment  by  which  this  phenomenon  may  be 
manifested. 

If  the  ciystal  be  bounded  by  planes  peqiendicular  to  the  line 
bisecting  the  acute  angles  between  the  optic  axes,  write  down 
equations  whence  the  equation  of  the  cone  of  emei-ging  i-ays  may 
be  obtained. 


Friday,  Jan.  20.     1|  <o  4. 

1.  If  a,  /?,  y  be  the  respective  distances  of  a  straight  line 
from  the  three  angular  points  of  a  triangle  ABC,  these  distances 
]>eing  reckoned  positive  or  negative  according  as  their  directions 
fall  within  the  angles  of  the  triangle  itself  or  their  supplements, 
investigate  the  following  relation, 

(asin  ^)»4-  OSsin  5)*  +  (y  sin (7)' -  2  cos ^  sin  5  sin  C^y  -  2  cos  5 

sin  G  sin  Aya  —  2  cos  C  sin  A  sin  Ba^  =  4^*  sinM  sin*^  sin'C, 
where  R  is  the  radius  of  the  circunMcribed  circle. 

2.  State  the  positive  and  negative  characteristics  of  a  singular 
solution  of  a  differential  equation;  and  shew  how  it  is  deduced 
from  the  complete  primitive.  Shew  also  how  the  singular  solution 
of  a  differential  equation  of  the  fir.st  order  is  obtained  from  the 
equation  itself. 

Obtain  the  singular  solution  of  the  equation  of  which 

y  cos*m  =  2  cos  {x  —  2m) 

is  the  complete  primitive ;  and  find  the  singular  solution  of  the 
equation 


\ 


1^ — 4.]  AND   RIDERS.  197 

iii.  Prove  that,  in  any  curve  of  double  curvature,  the  locus  of 
the  centres  of  spherical  curvature  is  the  edge  of  regression  of  the 
envelope  of  the  normal  planes.  Prove  also  that  this  locus  cannot 
be  an  evolute. 

The  normal  plane  to  the  locus  of  the  centres  of  circular  curva- 
ture bisects  the  i-adius  of  spherical  curvature. 

4.  Determine  the  class  of  curves  which  possess  the  property 
that  the  locus  of  the  extremity  of  the  polar  subtangent  of  any  one 
is  similar  to  the  curve  itself 

Shew  that  r^c"  =  a  is  the  equation  of  such  a  curve. 

v.  Investigate  the  general  equations  of  motion  of  a  sphere 
under  the  action  of  any  forces. 

If  a  homogeneous  sphere  roll  on  a  perfectly  rough  plane  under 
the  action  of  any  forces  whatever,  of  which  the  resultant  passes 
through  the  centre  of  the  sphere,  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  gi"avity 
will  be  the  same  as  if  the  plane  were  smooth  and  all  the  forces 
were  reduced  in  a  certain  constant  ratio;  and  the  plane  is  the  only 
surface  which  possesses  this  property. 

6.  Assuming  the  following  equations  for  the  rate  of  variation 
of  the  inclination  and  of  the  longitude  of  the  line  of  nodes  of  a 
planet  m  disturbed  by  a  planet  m\ 

do,  na  dR 


dt      /A  (1  —  e*)^  sin  i  di  ' 

di  _  na        C    1     dR  i  /dR 

di^~ /x(l-e^)»  (^i^  dQ'^        2\d^ 


dR     dR\^ 


investigate  general  expressions  for  i  and  il,  so  far  as  they  are 
affected  by  the  effect  of  the  following  terms  in  the  expansion 
of  R, 

-  m'  [2D^ee  cos  (ct'  -zt)  +  \aa'D^  {tan'  i-2  tan  i  tani'coa  (Q  -  W)\\ 

vii.  Prove  that,  if  the  Earth  be  considered  as  a  homogeneous 
mass  of  fluid  in  the  form  of  a  spheroid,  revolving  *s^ith  a  uniform 
angiilar  velocity  about  its  axis,  gi-avity  at  any  point  acts  along 
the  normal,  and  is  proportional  to  the  part  of  the  normal  inter- 
cepted between  the  point  of  contact  and  the  plane  of  the  equator. 


198  SENATE-HOUSE   PROBLEMS  AND   RIDERS.      [Jan.  20. 

If  the  Earth  be  completely  covered  by  a  sea  of  small  depth, 
prove  that  the  depth  in  latitude  I  is  very  nearly  equal  to 
H{l—esin'l)  where  //  is  the  depth  at  the  equator,  and  c  the 
ellipticity  of  the  Earth. 

8.  A  thin  plate  of  Iceland  spar,  cut  perpendicTilarly  to  its 
axis,  is  interposed  between  two  tourmalines,  used  as  a  polarizing 
and  analyzing  plate,  and  a  pencil  of  parallel  rays  is  transmitted 
through  the  crj'stals.  Assuming  that  the  difference  of  retardation 
of  the  ordinary  and  extraordinary  rays,  when  a  ray  is  transmitted 
through  a  plate  of  Iceland  spar  in  a  direction  inclined  to  its  axis 
at  a  small  angle  i  varies  as  Tsin'i,  investigate  an  expression  for 
the  illumination  at  any  point  of  the  field  of  view,  the  axes  of  the 
tourmalines  being  parallel ;  and  hence  deduce  a  description  of  the 
phenomena  observed,  supposing  the  light  (1)  to  be  homogeneous, 
(2)  to  be  white. 

ix.  State  under  what  circumstances  in  the  motion  of  a  fluid 
we  may  assume  udx  +  vdy  +  wdz  to  be  a  perfect  differential  of  some 
function. 

Assuming  this  function  to  be  <^,  and  the  fluid  to  be  homoge- 
neous, investigate  the  equation 

fi  +  ^  +  ^^o. 

dx'      dxf      di? 

The  base  of  an  infinite  cylinder  is  the  space  contained  between 
an  equilateral  hyperbola  and  its  asymptotes.  A  plane  is  drawn 
perpendicular  to  the  base,  and  cutting  it  in  a  straight  line  parallel 
tx)  an  asymptote,  and  the  portion  of  the  cylinder  between  this  plague 
and  its  parallel  asymptote  is  filled  with  homogeneous  fluid,  vrnder 
the  action  of  no  impressed  forces.  The  plane  being  suddenly 
removed,  determine  the  motion;  and  prove  that  the  free  surface 
of  the  fluid  will  remain  plane,  and  advance  with  a  uniform 
velocity  proportional  to  Jts,  where  -jn"  is  the  pressure  at  an  infi- 
nite distance,  which  is  supposed  to  remain  constant  throughout 
the  motion. 


CAMBRIDGE:  PRINTED  BY  C.  J.  CLAY.  M-A.   AT  THb  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 


h 


•k 


A'. 
» 

A 

55 
.860 
C.l 
PASC 

^Ss 


/ 


'i\ 


"^  "^S-s^  ^)